OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F

Series
V500R007 Kunpeng

Installation Guide

Issue 10
Date 2021-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2021. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://e.huawei.com

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes how to install OceanStor 2000 V5, 5000 V5, 5000F, 6000,
and 6000F V5 series storage systems. It consists of the following parts: precautions
and planning, installation process and preparation, hardware installation, cabling
and checking, system power-on and initialization, and software installation. In
addition to FAQs and cable routing and binding basics, this document also
provides instructions on how to prepare labels and cables as well as how to seek
technical support.

The following table lists the product models that this document is applicable to.

OceanStor 2000 V5 OceanStor 2200 V5/2600 V5

series

OceanStor 5000 V5 OceanStor 5300 V5, 5500 V5, 5600 V5, and 5800 V5
series

OceanStor 5000F OceanStor 5300F V5, 5500F V5, 5600F V5, and 5800F V5
V5 series

OceanStor 6000 V5 OceanStor 6800 V5

series

OceanStor 6000F OceanStor 6800F V5

V5 series

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

● Technical support engineers

● Maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which,

if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk

which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which,

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

if not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.

Supplements the important information in the

main text.
NOTE is used to address information not related
to personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue
contains all changes made in earlier issues.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30)
This issue is the tenth official release.

Optimized description of some sections.

Issue 09 (2021-09-15)
This issue is the ninth official release.

Added the description of OceanStor 2200 V5.

Issue 08 (2021-06-30)
This issue is the eighth official release.

Optimized description of some sections.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide About This Document

Issue 07 (2021-01-30)
This issue is the seventh official release.

● Added the support for multi-controller networking through switches.

● Added the support for high-density disk enclosures by 4 U controller
enclosures.

Issue 06 (2020-11-30)
This issue is the sixth official release.

● Added the description of OceanStor 2600 V5.

● Added the description of controller enclosures of OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe)
and OceanStor 5300F V5 (NVMe).

Issue 05 (2020-09-15)
This issue is the fifth official release.

● Optimized the document structure.

● Supported high-density disk enclosures for 2 U controller enclosures of
OceanStor 5000 V5 Kunpeng series.
● Supported the multi-controller networking via switches for 4 U controller
enclosures.

Issue 04 (2020-04-10)
This issue is the fourth official release.

● Optimized descriptions about chapter "Controller Enclosure and Application

Server Connection Planning".
● Added the description about remote power-on.

Issue 03 (2019-12-30)
This issue is the third official release.

● Added chapter "Before You Start".

● Added chapter "Using SmartKit for Deployment Inspection".

Issue 02 (2019-10-30)
This issue is the second official release.

Added description of OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5.

Issue 01 (2019-07-30)
This issue is the first official release.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Before You Start....................................................................................................................... 1
2 Safety Operation Guide......................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Safety Precautions for ESD Protection............................................................................................................................. 5
2.3 Safety Precautions for Laser Protection...........................................................................................................................5
2.4 Safety Precautions for Using Fibers.................................................................................................................................. 6
2.5 Safety Precautions for Using Power Cables (Applicable to Japan)........................................................................ 7
2.6 Safety Precautions for Short Circuit Protection............................................................................................................ 7
2.7 Safety Precautions for Operating Equipment................................................................................................................ 7
2.8 Safety Precautions for Condensation Prevention......................................................................................................... 8

3 Installation Planning and Preparation............................................................................... 9

3.1 Installation Planning.............................................................................................................................................................. 9
3.1.1 Planning Tools....................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1.2 Cabinet Layout and Connection Planning................................................................................................................ 11
3.1.2.1 Cabinet Planning............................................................................................................................................................ 11
3.1.2.2 Cabinet Layout................................................................................................................................................................ 17
3.1.2.2.1 Layout Requirements................................................................................................................................................ 17
3.1.2.2.2 Maximum Cabling Distance for High-Density Disk Enclosures.................................................................. 18
3.1.2.3 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning....................................................................................................................... 21
3.1.2.3.1 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 2200 V5..................................................................... 22
3.1.2.3.2 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 2600 V5..................................................................... 24
3.1.2.3.3 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)............... 27
3.1.2.3.4 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)......31
3.1.2.3.5 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800
V5, and 5800F V5......................................................................................................................................................................... 35
3.1.2.3.6 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5........................................ 39
3.1.2.4 (Optional) Connection Planning for Multiple Controller Enclosures........................................................... 44
3.1.2.4.1 Direct-Connection Network (OceanStor 2600 V5)......................................................................................... 44
3.1.2.4.2 Direct-Connection Network (OceanStor 5300 V5 and 5300F V5)............................................................ 46
3.1.2.4.3 Direct-Connection Network (OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and
5800F V5)....................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
3.1.2.4.4 Direct-Connection Network (OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5)............................................................ 51

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide Contents

3.1.2.4.5 Switched Network (OceanStor 2600 V5)........................................................................................................... 53

3.1.2.4.6 Switched Network (OceanStor 5300 V5 and 5300F V5 in V500R007C71 Kunpeng and Later)..... 56
3.1.2.4.7 Switched Network (OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and 5800F V5 in
V500R007C71 Kunpeng and Later)....................................................................................................................................... 63
3.1.2.4.8 Switched Network (OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5 in V500R007C70SPC200 and Later)..........67
3.1.2.5 Connection Planning Between Controller Enclosures and Application Servers........................................71
3.1.2.5.1 Connection Planning Between 2 U Controller Enclosures and Application Servers............................ 71
3.1.2.5.2 Connection Planning Between 4 U Controller Enclosures and Application Servers............................ 79
3.1.2.6 (Optional) Active-Active Network Planning......................................................................................................... 93
3.1.3 Other Planning Items....................................................................................................................................................... 93
3.1.3.1 Power Distribution Planning...................................................................................................................................... 93
3.1.3.2 IP Address and Network Parameter Planning......................................................................................................95
3.1.3.3 User Account Planning................................................................................................................................................. 98
3.1.3.4 Compatibility Solution Planning............................................................................................................................... 98
3.2 Preparing for Installation................................................................................................................................................... 98
3.2.1 Checking Installation Tools and Auxiliary Materials............................................................................................. 98
3.2.2 Checking the Installation Environment................................................................................................................... 100
3.2.3 Unpacking and Checking Devices..............................................................................................................................101

4 Hardware Installation........................................................................................................ 104

4.1 Installation Process............................................................................................................................................................ 104
4.2 Installing Storage Devices............................................................................................................................................... 106
4.2.1 Accessing the Hardware Installation Multimedia................................................................................................ 106
4.2.2 (Optional) Installing Cabinets.................................................................................................................................... 107
4.2.2.1 Installing an FR42612L Cabinet.............................................................................................................................. 107
4.2.2.2 Installing PGND Cables and Power Cables......................................................................................................... 116
4.2.3 Determining Installation Positions............................................................................................................................ 121
4.2.4 Installing Controller Enclosures and Standard Disk Enclosures...................................................................... 124
4.2.4.1 (Optional) Installing U-shaped Brackets and Adjustable Guide Rails.......................................................124
4.2.4.2 Installing Enclosures................................................................................................................................................... 130
4.2.4.3 (Optional) Installing the Cable Tray for a 4 U Disk Enclosure.................................................................... 134
4.2.5 Installing a High-Density Disk Enclosure (Applicable to the OceanStor 2000, 5000, and 6000 V5
Series)............................................................................................................................................................................................ 136
4.2.5.1 Installing Ball Bearing Guide Rails (for High-Density Disk Enclosures)................................................... 137
4.2.5.2 Installing a High-Density Disk Enclosure into a Cabinet............................................................................... 144
4.2.5.3 Installing a Cable Tray................................................................................................................................................148
4.2.5.4 Installing a Disk Module........................................................................................................................................... 154
4.2.6 (Optional) Installing a Data Switch..........................................................................................................................156
4.2.7 (Optional) Installing Filler Panels............................................................................................................................. 158
4.3 Connecting Cables.............................................................................................................................................................. 159
4.3.1 Connecting Ground Cables.......................................................................................................................................... 159
4.3.2 Connecting Mini SAS HD Cables................................................................................................................................162
4.3.3 Connecting RDMA Cables............................................................................................................................................ 166
4.3.4 (Optional) Connecting Controller Enclosures....................................................................................................... 169

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide Contents

4.3.5 Connecting Controller Enclosures to Application Servers................................................................................. 171

4.3.6 Connecting a Management Network Port to the Network............................................................................. 176
4.3.7 Connecting a Serial Port to a Maintenance Terminal........................................................................................ 181
4.3.8 Connecting Power Cables.............................................................................................................................................183
4.3.8.1 Connecting AC Power Cables.................................................................................................................................. 184
4.3.8.2 Connecting DC Power Cables.................................................................................................................................. 189
4.4 Checking Hardware Installation.................................................................................................................................... 193
4.5 Powering On the Storage System................................................................................................................................. 196
4.6 Installing Filler Panels....................................................................................................................................................... 200

5 Operations After Installation........................................................................................... 202

5.1 Initializing the Storage System...................................................................................................................................... 202
5.1.1 Logging In to the Storage System.............................................................................................................................202
5.1.1.1 Changing the Initial IP Address of the Management Network Port over a Serial Port...................... 202
5.1.1.2 Logging In to DeviceManager................................................................................................................................. 208
5.1.1.2.1 Logging In to DeviceManager Through Web................................................................................................. 208
5.1.1.2.2 Logging In to DeviceManager Through a Tablet.......................................................................................... 212
5.1.1.3 (Optional) Changing IP Addresses of Management Network Ports Using DeviceManager............. 214
5.1.1.4 Logging In to the CLI.................................................................................................................................................. 217
5.1.1.4.1 Logging In to the CLI (User Name + Password)........................................................................................... 217
5.1.1.4.2 Logging In to the CLI (Public Key)..................................................................................................................... 221
5.1.2 Initializing a Storage Device........................................................................................................................................ 226
5.1.3 Applying for a License................................................................................................................................................... 228
5.1.3.1 Preparing for License Application.......................................................................................................................... 228
5.1.3.2 Applying for a License File........................................................................................................................................231
5.1.3.2.1 Applying for a License in Entitlement Activation Mode............................................................................. 231
5.1.3.2.2 Applying for a License in Password Activation Mode..................................................................................234
5.1.3.3 Importing a License File............................................................................................................................................ 236
5.1.3.4 Activating a License File............................................................................................................................................ 237
5.1.4 Configuring Domain Authentication for a Storage System..............................................................................237
5.1.4.1 Preparing Windows AD Domain Configuration Data..................................................................................... 237
5.1.4.2 Preparing LDAP Domain Configuration Data.................................................................................................... 242
5.1.4.3 Adding a Storage System to an LDAP Domain................................................................................................. 246
5.1.5 Enabling and Managing the eService...................................................................................................................... 251
5.1.5.1 About eService.............................................................................................................................................................. 251
5.1.5.2 Preparations...................................................................................................................................................................255
5.1.5.3 Configuring eService................................................................................................................................................... 256
5.1.5.4 Exporting a Data Package to Be Uploaded........................................................................................................ 266
5.1.6 Configuring Alarm and Event Handling Policies.................................................................................................. 268
5.1.6.1 Enabling Email Notification..................................................................................................................................... 268
5.1.6.2 Enabling SMS Notification........................................................................................................................................272
5.1.6.3 Enabling Alarm Dump............................................................................................................................................... 274
5.1.6.4 Configuring SNMP....................................................................................................................................................... 278

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide Contents

5.1.6.4.1 SNMP Configuration Process............................................................................................................................... 278

5.1.6.4.2 Configuring a Port for the SNMP Service........................................................................................................ 279
5.1.6.4.3 Enabling the SNMP Function (Applicable to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c)................................................. 280
5.1.6.4.4 Configuring SNMP Community Strings (Applicable to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c).............................. 281
5.1.6.4.5 Adding a USM User (Applicable to SNMPv3)................................................................................................ 282
5.1.6.4.6 Adding a Trap Server Address.............................................................................................................................. 285
5.1.6.5 Enabling Syslog Notification.................................................................................................................................... 290
5.1.6.5.1 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................. 290
5.1.6.5.2 Generating and Exporting a Certificate on the Storage System..............................................................291
5.1.6.5.3 Signing the Certificate and Exporting the CA Certificate........................................................................... 292
5.1.6.5.4 Importing the Syslog Certificate and CA Certificate.................................................................................... 292
5.1.6.5.5 Configuring Syslog Server Certificate and CA Certificate...........................................................................293
5.1.6.5.6 Enabling the Syslog Notification Function...................................................................................................... 294
5.1.7 Connecting a Storage System to the DNS Server................................................................................................ 300
5.1.8 (Optional) Setting a GSM Modem........................................................................................................................... 301
5.1.9 (Optional) Configuring the NTP Service................................................................................................................. 304
5.1.9.1 Configuring the NTP Service in Windows........................................................................................................... 304
5.1.9.1.1 Configuring an NTP Service on a Server.......................................................................................................... 304
5.1.9.1.2 Configuring NTP Parameters on the Storage System..................................................................................306
5.1.9.2 Configuring the NTP Service in Linux................................................................................................................... 308
5.1.9.2.1 Configuring an NTP Service on a Server.......................................................................................................... 308
5.1.9.2.2 Configuring NTP Parameters on the Storage System..................................................................................311
5.1.10 (Optional) Building a Remote Maintenance Environment............................................................................ 313
5.1.11 Other Configurations...................................................................................................................................................317
5.2 (Optional) Deploying Multi-Controller Storage Systems..................................................................................... 317
5.2.1 Adding Controllers in a Direct-Connection Network.......................................................................................... 318
5.2.1.1 Adding Controllers Using SmartKit....................................................................................................................... 318
5.2.2 Adding Controllers in a Switched Network............................................................................................................ 321
5.2.2.1 Configuring New IP Addresses for the Management Network Ports on the Switches and SSH Login
User Information........................................................................................................................................................................ 321
5.2.2.1.1 Applicable to CE6865-48S8CQ-EI Switches..................................................................................................... 321
5.2.2.1.2 Applicable to CE8850-32CQ-EI Switches......................................................................................................... 324
5.2.2.1.3 Applicable to CE8850-SAN Switches................................................................................................................. 326
5.2.2.2 (Optional) Manually Configuring Switches........................................................................................................ 328
5.2.2.2.1 Applicable to CE6865-48S8CQ-EI Switches.....................................................................................................328
5.2.2.2.2 Applicable to CE8850-32CQ-EI Switches......................................................................................................... 336
5.2.2.2.3 Applicable to CE8850-SAN Switches................................................................................................................. 344
5.2.2.3 Adding Controllers Using SmartKit....................................................................................................................... 353
5.2.3 Expansion Rollback......................................................................................................................................................... 355
5.2.3.1 Rolling Back the Storage System........................................................................................................................... 357
5.2.3.2 Clearing the Controllers That Failed to Be Added (Applicable to the OceanStor 2000, 5000, and
5000F V5 Series)........................................................................................................................................................................ 358

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide Contents

5.2.3.3 Clearing the Controllers That Failed to Be Added (Applicable to the OceanStor 6000 and 6000F V5
Series)............................................................................................................................................................................................ 364
5.3 (Optional) Installing and Configuring a Key Management Server................................................................... 370
5.4 (Optional) Installing Other Software on an Application Server........................................................................ 370
5.5 Using SmartKit for Deployment Inspection...............................................................................................................372

6 FAQs....................................................................................................................................... 377
6.1 What Can I Do If Controller Expansion Fails Because the Process Lasts for Over 24 Hours After the
Controllers to Be Added Are Powered On?.......................................................................................................................377
6.2 How Do I Query and Configure the NPIV Function of Switches?..................................................................... 378
6.3 How Do I Create AD Domain Users and Groups on the AD Domain Controller?....................................... 379
6.4 How Can I Import the Windows AD Domain Server's CA Certificate to the Storage System?............... 382
6.5 How Can I Use Self-Signed Certificates to Fix the Privacy Error Displayed When I Attempt to Log In to
DeviceManager?.........................................................................................................................................................................384
6.6 How Do I Check Whether Network Firewall Ports Are Enabled?...................................................................... 388
6.7 What Should I Do If Login to DeviceManager over Internet Explorer Failed?..............................................391

7 Appendix............................................................................................................................... 393
7.1 Installation Tools.................................................................................................................................................................393
7.2 Using SmartKit for Capacity Expansion...................................................................................................................... 394
7.2.1 Using SmartKit for Capacity Expansion (Direct-Connection Network)........................................................395
7.2.2 Using SmartKit for Capacity Expansion (Switched Network)..........................................................................403
7.3 Loop ID and Disk Enclosure ID Naming Rules......................................................................................................... 413
7.3.1 OceanStor 2200 V5........................................................................................................................................................ 413
7.3.2 OceanStor 2600 V5........................................................................................................................................................ 415
7.3.3 OceanStor 5300 V5 and 5300F V5............................................................................................................................ 416
7.3.4 OceanStor 5500 V5, 5600 V5, 5800 V5, 5500F V5, 5600F V5, and 5800F V5............................................417
7.3.5 OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5............................................................................................................................ 419
7.4 Introduction to an FR42612L Cabinet......................................................................................................................... 422
7.5 Installation Environment Checklist............................................................................................................................... 426
7.6 Checking a Third-Party Cabinet.....................................................................................................................................429
7.7 Using SmartKit to Install UltraPath..............................................................................................................................437
7.8 General Cable Routing Principles.................................................................................................................................. 446
7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics................................................................................................................................ 447
7.9.1 Cable Routing and Binding.......................................................................................................................................... 447
7.9.2 Optical Fiber Routing and Bundling......................................................................................................................... 449
7.10 Preparing Cables and Connectors.............................................................................................................................. 452
7.10.1 Preparing Ordinary Network Cables...................................................................................................................... 452
7.10.2 Preparing Shielded Network Cables.......................................................................................................................456
7.10.3 Preparing External Power Cables and Ground Cables with OT Terminals................................................461
7.11 Engineering Label Specifications for Cables........................................................................................................... 464
7.11.1 Introduction to Labels................................................................................................................................................. 465
7.11.2 Usage of Labels............................................................................................................................................................. 467
7.11.3 Filling In Labels............................................................................................................................................................. 468

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide Contents

7.11.4 Affixing Labels............................................................................................................................................................... 469

7.12 Replacing an Optical Fiber, Optical Module, Electrical Module, or Network Cable Using a Fiber
Extractor........................................................................................................................................................................................ 471
7.12.1 Introduction to the Fiber Extractor......................................................................................................................... 471
7.12.2 Replacing an Optical Fiber, Optical Module, or Network Cable.................................................................. 473
7.12.2.1 Replacing an Optical Fiber..................................................................................................................................... 473
7.12.2.2 Replacing a Network Cable................................................................................................................................... 476
7.12.2.3 Replacing an Optical or Electrical Module....................................................................................................... 477

A How to Obtain Help...........................................................................................................479

A.1 Preparations for Contacting Huawei........................................................................................................................... 479
A.1.1 Collecting Troubleshooting Information................................................................................................................. 479
A.1.2 Making Debugging Preparations.............................................................................................................................. 479
A.2 How to Use the Document............................................................................................................................................. 480
A.3 How to Obtain Help from Website..............................................................................................................................480
A.4 Ways to Contact Huawei................................................................................................................................................. 480

B Glossary................................................................................................................................. 481
C Acronyms and Abbreviations........................................................................................... 482

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 1 Before You Start

1 Before You Start

Before using this document, read this chapter carefully to ensure that the
document is applicable to your storage device. This document applies to
V500R007 Kunpeng, not V500R007. You can check whether the storage device
version is V500R007 Kunpeng by observing the rear view of a controller enclosure
or querying the version on DeviceManager or the CLI.
● If yes, use this document.
● If no, use the OceanStor 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F Series V500R007
Installation Guide.
For details about how to check the device version, see Checking the Device
Version from the Rear View of a Controller Enclosure, Checking the Device
Version on DeviceManager, and Checking the Device Version on the CLI.

Checking the Device Version from the Rear View of a Controller Enclosure
If the slot layout in the rear view of a controller enclosure is shown as Figure 1-1,
Figure 1-2, Figure 1-3, Figure 1-4, Figure 1-5, Figure 1-6, or Figure 1-7, the
device version is V500R007 Kunpeng.

Figure 1-1 Rear view of an OceanStor 2200 V5 controller enclosure (25 disk slots)

Figure 1-2 Rear view of an OceanStor 2200 V5 controller enclosure (12 disk slots)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 1 Before You Start

Figure 1-3 Rear view of an OceanStor 2600 V5 controller enclosure

Figure 1-4 Rear view of an OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS)/5300F V5 (SAS) controller

enclosure

Figure 1-5 Rear view of an OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe)/5300F V5 (NVMe)

controller enclosure

Figure 1-6 Rear view of an OceanStor 5500 V5/5500F V5/5600 V5/5600F V5/5800
V5/5800F V5 controller enclosure

Figure 1-7 Rear view of an OceanStor 6800 V5/6800F V5 controller enclosure

Checking the Device Version on DeviceManager

Log in to DeviceManager. In the navigation tree of DeviceManager, click

Home. In the Basic Information area of the function pane, check whether
Version is V500R007CXX Kunpeng, as shown in Figure 1-8.
● If Version is V500R007CXX Kunpeng, the device version is V500R007
Kunpeng.
● If Version is V500R007CXX, the device version is V500R007.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 1 Before You Start

Figure 1-8 Basic information about the storage device

NOTE

For details about how to log in to DeviceManager, see 5.1.1.2 Logging In to

DeviceManager.

Checking the Device Version on the CLI

Log in to the command-line interface (CLI) of a storage device and check Product
Version.
● If Version is V500R007CXX Kunpeng, the device version is V500R007
Kunpeng.
● If Version is V500R007CXX, the device version is V500R007.
System Name : Huawei.Storage
Health Status : Normal
Running Status : Normal
Total Capacity : XXXXX
SN : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Location :
Product Model : XXXXX
Product Version : V500R007CXX Kunpeng
Time : XXXX-XX-XX/XX:XX:XX UTC+XX:XX
Patch Version : XXXXX

NOTE

For details about how to log in to the CLI, see 5.1.1.4 Logging In to the CLI.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 2 Safety Operation Guide

2 Safety Operation Guide

This chapter provides guidelines for safety operations during activities such as
installation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. The guidelines consist of safety
regulations for both personnel and equipment. You must follow these guidelines
to avoid personal injury and equipment damage.
2.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols
2.2 Safety Precautions for ESD Protection
2.3 Safety Precautions for Laser Protection
2.4 Safety Precautions for Using Fibers
2.5 Safety Precautions for Using Power Cables (Applicable to Japan)
2.6 Safety Precautions for Short Circuit Protection
2.7 Safety Precautions for Operating Equipment
2.8 Safety Precautions for Condensation Prevention

2.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols

When installing or maintaining equipment, follow the precautions indicated by
alarm and safety symbols to prevent personal injury and equipment damage.
Table 2-1 lists the alarm and safety symbols labeled on equipment.

Table 2-1 Alarm and safety symbols labeled on equipment

Symbol Description

ESD Protection Symbol

Indicates that you must wear an electrostatic discharge
(ESD) wrist strap or glove to avoid personal injury and
equipment damage caused by electrostatic discharge.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 2 Safety Operation Guide

Symbol Description

Cabinet Grounding Symbol

Indicates the position of a grounding point.

Disk Swap and Install Warning Symbol

Indicates that you should be cautious when you swap,
install, or pull out a disk.

2.2 Safety Precautions for ESD Protection

When installing or maintaining the equipment, follow the ESD safety precautions
to prevent personal injury and equipment damage.

indicates an electrostatic sensitive area. To prevent personal injury and

equipment damage when operating equipment in this area, wear an ESD wrist
strap, ESD clothing, or ESD gloves. Note the following:

● Do not wear an ESD wrist strap when powering on the equipment to prevent
an electric shock.
● Do not touch devices with bare hands to prevent damage to the electrostatic
sensitive devices (ESSDs) on the circuit boards.
● The electronic line is prone to electrostatic damage. Wear an ESD wrist strap,
ESD gloves, and ESD clothing when handling disks, especially bare disks. Hold
a disk by its edge.
● Since an ESD wrist strap only prevents static electricity from the body, the ESD
clothing is required to prevent static electricity from clothes.
● Before installing or replacing devices, wear an ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves,
and ESD clothing to protect you and the equipment from static electricity.
● Use special ESD bags to carry or transport device components.

2.3 Safety Precautions for Laser Protection

When installing or maintaining equipment, follow the laser safety precautions to
ensure the safety of personnel and equipment.

Laser safety risks include:

● Personal injury
● Equipment damage

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 2 Safety Operation Guide

Personal Injury

DANGER

The laser emitted by an optical module is an invisible infrared ray, which may
cause permanent eye injury. Do not look into the optical module during device
maintenance.

Equipment Damage
To prevent equipment damage when you handle the equipment, follow these
precautions:

● When not in use, the optical interfaces on the equipment and fiber connectors
on fiber jumpers must be covered with dust-proof caps.
● After removing a fiber jumper that connects to an optical interface on the
equipment, cover the optical interface and the fiber jumper connector with
dust-proof caps.
● When performing a hardware loopback test by connecting a fiber jumper to
an optical interface, add an attenuator to prevent the risk of damage to the
optical module caused by excessively strong optical power.
● When using the Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), disconnect the
fiber jumper between the peer equipment and the local equipment to avoid
damage to the optical module caused by excessively strong optical power.
● Unless necessary, do not remove or insert the modules connecting to fibers.

2.4 Safety Precautions for Using Fibers

Use fibers in a safe and correct manner to ensure proper operation of the
equipment and prevent personal injury and equipment damage.

DANGER

The laser beam on an optical interface board or from a fiber may cause eye injury.
Do not look into optical interfaces or fiber connectors during installation and
maintenance.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

Use special cleaning tools and materials to clean fiber connectors and optical
interfaces. Common tools and materials are as follows:

● Special cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next

option, however ethanol and formalin are forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue
● Dedicated compressed gas

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 2 Safety Operation Guide

● Cotton stick (medical or long fiber cotton)

● Special cleaning roll (used with the preceding special cleaning solvent)
● Magnifier for optical connectors

Replacing Fibers
Use dust-proof caps to cap the connectors of the fibers that are not in use.

2.5 Safety Precautions for Using Power Cables

(Applicable to Japan)
Using power cables safely and correctly can prevent personal injury and ensure
proper device running.

2.6 Safety Precautions for Short Circuit Protection

When installing or maintaining equipment, follow the regulations on operating
tools to avoid short circuits.

NOTICE

● Do not place tools on air intake boards of cabinets. Otherwise, a short circuit
may occur.
● Do not drop screws into a cabinet or the equipment. Otherwise, a short circuit
may occur.

2.7 Safety Precautions for Operating Equipment

When installing and maintaining devices, follow the electrical safety precautions
to prevent personal injury and equipment damage.

Power-on and Power-off

DANGER

● Before checking device installation and cable connections, ensure that the
system power supply is switched off. Otherwise, incorrect or loose cable
connections may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
● Do not wear an ESD wrist strap when powering on the equipment to prevent
an electric shock.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 2 Safety Operation Guide

● Do not remove or insert cables and field replaceable units (FRUs) during a
system startup. Otherwise, data loss may occur.
● After you switch off the power supply, wait at least one minute before
switching it back on.
● To avoid disk damage and data loss, do not switch the power supply off while
any disk running indicators are still blinking.

Troubleshooting

DANGER

● Do not touch the connectors of power cables or communication cables.

Otherwise, an electric shock may occur.
● Do not touch devices with bare hands in electrostatic sensitive areas. Wear an
ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, or ESD clothing to prevent personal injury and
equipment damage.

When you perform troubleshooting, follow these precautions:

● Do not perform troubleshooting during a thunderstorm.
● Ensure that power cables are intact and the grounding measures are safe and
effective.
● Keep the troubleshooting area clean and dry.

2.8 Safety Precautions for Condensation Prevention

Before installing the equipment, ensure that no condensation is on the equipment.
Otherwise, the equipment may fail to be powered on.
If the indoor and outdoor temperature difference is 15°C or more, wait eight hours
after moving devices to the equipment room and before installing them.

NOTE

If the temperature difference cannot be determined, wait one night after moving devices to
the equipment room and then install them.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Before installing devices, plan and check the installation environment at the site to
improve installation efficiency.

NOTICE

● Before mounting a device into the cabinet, do not move the device without
using original packaging materials provided by Huawei. Do not install the
device in a third-party cabinet and transport it.
● If you need to move a device to a different equipment room after unpacking,
pack the device with the original packaging materials provided by Huawei.
● Packed devices can be stored for a maximum of six months. After being
unpacked, the devices must be powered on within seven days.
● Once the device has been powered on and you want to power it off, it cannot
stay in the off state for more than 7 days.

3.1 Installation Planning

3.2 Preparing for Installation

3.1 Installation Planning

This chapter describes the power distribution principles, hardware quantity, initial
configuration parameters, expansion plan, hardware layout plan, and data plan to
avoid unnecessary rework during and after the installation.

3.1.1 Planning Tools

You can use tools to plan for installation to improve installation efficiency and
delivery quality.

Introduction to Planning Tools

Table 3-1 lists the necessary tools for installation planning.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-1 Planning tools

Tool Description

Storage Networking Provides the networking diagrams of storage systems

Assistant for all standard or user-defined configurations.
URL: http://support.huawei.com/
onlinetoolsweb/sna/#/home

Power Consumption Quickly calculates the power consumption of storage

Calculation systems to help evaluate the power supply capabilities
of equipment rooms.
URL: https://support-it.huawei.com/powercalc/#/
home

Huawei Storage Provides information about compatibility relationships

Interoperability between Huawei storage products and third-party
Navigator devices based on field environments.
URL: http://support-open.huawei.com/en/pages/
user/compatibility/support-matrix.jsf

LLDesigner Quickly generates low-level design (LLD) documents

and storage configuration files based on your
requirements. The major functions are as follows:
● Supports one-click bill of quantities (BOQ) import
and automatically identifies storage devices,
controllers, interface modules, disk enclosures, as
well as types and quantity of disks to help quickly
complete hardware information planning.
● Creates LLDs using templates, covering typical
networking scenarios such as active-active storage
and multi-controller scenarios.
● Supports automatic export of offline configuration
files that are then imported to storage devices
through DeviceManager to configure basic services.
● Supports planning and design for disk enclosure
expansion as well as export of LLDs and project
implementation documents.

Access to LLDesigner
1. Log in to eService with your Uniportal account and password.
2. In the Delivery Service area, click LLDesigner, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-1 eService home page

3. Click Create LLD and select a scenario to start project planning and design.
NOTE

● Currently, LLDesigner can run only on Google Chrome.

● If you do not have the permission to create LLDs, apply for it as prompted. Only
Huawei engineers and channel engineers can apply for the permission.
● For details about how to use LLDesigner, see the demo video and documentation
for each scenario.

3.1.2 Cabinet Layout and Connection Planning

Before installing a storage system, properly plan the connections between
application servers and the storage system and between controller enclosures and
disk enclosures.

3.1.2.1 Cabinet Planning

Before planning networks, check whether the cabinet where storage devices are
installed has sufficient space. Select a cabinet with a sufficient depth based on
dimensions of your devices.

Context
● Device dimensions
The dimensions of storage devices vary according to their models. Table 3-2
lists the dimensions of the related storage devices.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-2 Device dimensions

Device Dimensions

Controller enclosure (applicable to 2 U controller enclosure (25 x 2.5-

OceanStor 2200 V5) inch SAS disks)
● Depth: 410 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm
2 U controller enclosure (12 x 3.5-
inch SAS disks)
● Depth: 488 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm

Controller enclosure (applicable to 2 U controller enclosure (25 x 2.5-

OceanStor 2600 V5) inch SAS disks)
● Depth: 520 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm
2 U controller enclosure (12 x 3.5-
inch SAS disks)
● Depth: 600 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm

Controller enclosure (applicable to 2 U controller enclosure (25 x 2.5-

OceanStor 5300 V5 and 5300F V5) inch SAS disks)
● Depth: 520 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm
2 U controller enclosure (12 x 3.5-
inch SAS disks)
● Depth: 600 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm
2 U controller enclosure (25 x palm-
sized NVMe SSDs)
● Depth: 620 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Device Dimensions

Controller enclosure (applicable to 2 U controller enclosure (25 x 2.5-

OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 inch SAS disks)
V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and 5800F ● Depth: 820 mm
V5)
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm
2 U controller enclosure (12 x 3.5-
inch SAS disks)
● Depth: 900 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm
2 U controller enclosure (36 x palm-
sized NVMe SSDs)
● Depth: 920 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm

Controller enclosure (applicable to 4 U controller enclosure

OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5) ● Depth: 865 mm
● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 175 mm

2 U SAS disk enclosure (25 disk ● Depth: 410 mm

slots) ● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm

4 U SAS disk enclosure (24 disk ● Depth: 488 mm

slots) ● Width: 447 mm
● High: 175 mm

2 U smart SAS disk enclosure (25 ● Depth: 520 mm

disk slots) ● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm

2 U smart SAS disk enclosure (12 ● Depth: 600 mm

disk slots) ● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm

2 U smart NVMe disk enclosure ● Depth: 620 mm

● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 86.1 mm

High-density disk enclosure ● Depth: 790 mm

● Width: 447 mm
● Height: 176.5 mm

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

● U-shaped brackets
The distance between the front mounting bar and the inner side of the front
door varies according to the cabinet types. Since the system enclosure needs
to be fixed on the front mounting bars, a longer distance between the front
mounting bars and the inner side of the front door can result in smaller space
for cabling at the rear of the device. In such a case, you can install U-shaped
brackets to move the system enclosure forward and leave more space at the
rear of the device for cabling.
A U-shaped bracket is a mechanical part installed between the mounting ear
of the enclosure and mounting bar of the cabinet to adjust the relative
position between the enclosure and the cabinet. A maximum of two U-shaped
brackets can be stacked.
U-shaped brackets are classified into three types: 25 mm, 50 mm, and 75 mm,
as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 U-shaped brackets of different specifications

25mm 50mm 75mm

NOTE

● If U-shaped brackets are not installed, the system enclosure is installed on the
front mounting bar by using captive screws. The distance between the front panel
of the system enclosure and the inner side of the front door is fixed.
● Install the U-shaped brackets on the front mounting bars, and then secure the
system enclosure to U-shaped brackets of the respective size. This allows you to
adjust the distance between the front panel of the system enclosure and the inner
side of the front door within a certain range.

Cabinet Space
Before installing storage devices in a cabinet, ensure that:
● The front panel of the system enclosure does not affect closing of the cabinet
door.
● The distance between the rear of the system enclosure and the rear door of
the cabinet is greater than or equal to 90 mm. Otherwise, the cables at the
rear of the system enclosure may affect routing of cables or closing of the
cabinet door.
If the distance between the front mounting bars and the inner side of the front
door does not meet the installation requirements, use U-shaped brackets to
shorten the distance between the front panel of the system enclosure and the

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

inner side of the front door. Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 show the positions of the
storage system before and after the U-shaped brackets are installed.

NOTE

● A measuring scale is contained in the auxiliary material package. You can use it to
determine the type of U-shaped brackets for your storage device. For details about how
to use the measuring scale, see the instructions on it.
● For details on how to install the U-shaped brackets, see 4.2.4.1 (Optional) Installing
U-shaped Brackets and Adjustable Guide Rails.
● The U-shaped brackets decrease the distance between the front panel of the system
enclosure and the inner side of the front door (L1 in the figures) but increase the
distance between the rear of the system enclosure and the rear door of the cabinet (L2
in the figures).

Figure 3-3 Top view of the cabinet (no U-shaped brackets installed)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-4 Top view of the cabinet (U-shaped brackets installed)

NOTE

The preceding cabinet space requirements do not consider the space that may be contained
in the front and rear doors of the cabinet.

Table 3-3 lists the recommended cabinet depths for different storage devices.

Table 3-3 Recommended cabinet depths

Device Type Cabinet Depth

2 U controller enclosure (25 disk slots) a 1000 mm

2 U controller enclosure (12 disk slots) a 1000 mm

2 U controller enclosure (25 disk slots) b 1200 mm

2 U controller enclosure (12 disk slots) b 1200 mm

4 U controller enclosure 1200 mm

Smart NVMe disk enclosure (36 disk 1000 mm

slots)

Smart SAS disk enclosure (25 disk slots) 1000 mm

Smart SAS disk enclosure (12 disk slots) 1000 mm

2 U SAS disk enclosure (25 disk slots) 1000 mm

4 U SAS disk enclosure 1000 mm

High-density disk enclosure 1100 mm

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Device Type Cabinet Depth

a: Applicable to OceanStor 2200 V5, 2600 V5, 5300 V5, and 5300F V5
b: Applicable to OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and
5800F V5

Checking the Installation Conditions in a Third-Party Cabinet

If the storage device needs to be installed in a third-party cabinet provided by the
customer, extra requirements must be met in addition to the preceding
requirements. For the check items, refer to 7.6 Checking a Third-Party Cabinet.

3.1.2.2 Cabinet Layout

Plan cabinet locations and cable routing among cabinets in advance. Proper
cabinet layout is essential for normal running of the storage devices.

3.1.2.2.1 Layout Requirements

Proper layout ensures normal operation of the storage devices. Table 3-4
describes the device layout principles.

Table 3-4 Device layout principles

Scenario Principles

Plan the 1. Leave at least 120 cm between two rows of cabinets and 100
location of a cm between a wall and the nearest cabinet.
cabinet.
2. Use 15 m SAS cables or 10 m RDMA cables to connect
cabinets.

Plan the 1. Ensure that the bearing capacity of guide rails in a cabinet is
locations of larger than 50 kg. For a 4 U controller enclosure, ensure that the
storage bearing capacity of guide rails is larger than 97 kg.
devices in a
cabinet. 2. (Recommended) Install the 2 U and 4 U controller enclosures
in the middle position (19 U to 20 U for the 2 U controller
enclosure and 22 U to 25 U for the 4 U controller enclosure) of a
cabinet.

3. Consider the requirements of cabinet power supply and

equipment room heat dissipation (by air conditioners) when
determining the installation position.

4. Install disk enclosures from the bottom up in descending order

of weight.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Scenario Principles

5. If the cabinet has sufficient space, you are advised to reserve 1

U (44.45 mm) space between storage devices. Reserve 2 U space
at the bottom of a cabinet to facilitate cable routing, heat
dissipation, and device maintenance in the lower part of the
cabinet. Reserve 2 U space on the top of the cabinet for the side-
mounted fiber management tray.

NOTE

The device configuration and installation at your site may vary depending on the number of
components, cabinet types, and disk specifications.

3.1.2.2.2 Maximum Cabling Distance for High-Density Disk Enclosures

In addition to the preceding layout requirements, high-density disk enclosures
must meet the following requirements:
● The weight of cabinets and all devices, PDUs, and accessories in the cabinets
must meet the load-bearing requirements of the equipment room. The weight
of a single high-density disk enclosure is 100 kg in full configuration.
● A high-density disk enclosure cannot be installed in the 4 U space on the
upper part of the cabinet.

Maximum Cabling Distance of Mini SAS HD Cables

Only 3-meter or 5-meter mini SAS HD cables can be used to connect controller
enclosures to high-density disk enclosures or connect two high-density disk
enclosures. Their functions are as follows:
● 5-meter mini SAS HD cables: Connect controller enclosures to high-density
disk enclosures or connect two high-density disk enclosures in the different
cabinets.
● 3-meter mini SAS HD cables: Connect controller enclosures to high-density
disk enclosures or connect two high-density disk enclosures in the same
cabinet.
If 3-meter mini SAS HD electrical cables are delivered with storage devices, the
layout of high-density disk enclosures must meet the following cabling distance
requirements:

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTICE

● Use 5-meter mini SAS HD cables if connections are required between a

controller enclosure and a high-density disk enclosure or between two high-
density disk enclosures in different cabinets.
● According to the recommended layout, install a controller enclosure in the
middle of the cabinet, and install high-density disk enclosures right above or
below the controller enclosure.
● One cable tray is deployed for each high-density disk enclosure to ensure that
cable connections are not affected when high-density disk enclosures are pulled
out. For details about how to install cable trays and route cables through cable
trays, see 4.2.5.3 Installing a Cable Tray.
● For OceanStor 2600 V5, only 3-meter mini SAS HD electrical cables can be used
when the onboard 12 Gbit/s SAS ports of a controller enclosure is used to
connect to a high-density enclosure.

● The maximum cabling distance between a 2 U controller enclosure and a

high-density disk enclosure is 25 U.

Figure 3-5 Maximum cabling distance between a 2 U controller enclosure and

a high-density disk enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

● The maximum cabling distance between two high-density disk enclosures is 3

U.

Figure 3-6 Maximum cabling distance between two high-density disk

enclosures

If the maximum cabling distance is met, install devices inside the cabinet in
compliance with the layout requirements.

Routing of Redundant Cables

5-meter mini SAS HD cables are used to connect controller enclosures to high-
density disk enclosures or connect two high-density disk enclosures in the
different cabinets. If they are used to connect those devices in the same cabinet
due to a design change, the cables can be overlong. If the redundant parts of
these cables are improperly routed, the cabinet door cannot be closed.
In such a case, bind the redundant part of cables to the side of the cabinet so that
the cabinet door can be closed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-7 Layout of redundant cables

3.1.2.3 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning

Work out a proper connection plan before installing storage devices. Complying
with the connection principles can improve the installation efficiency. Before
planning disk enclosure connections, find out the distribution of expansion
modules.

● In the rear view of a disk enclosure, expansion module A is in the upper part
and expansion module B is in the lower part. An identifier is provided on the
expansion modules.
● In the rear view of a high-density disk enclosure, expansion module A is on
the right, and expansion module B is on the left. An identifier is provided on
the expansion modules.

Connection Principles
Before the planning, note the following:
● Bend cables naturally and reserve at least 97 mm clearance in front of the
enclosure for winding cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

● High-density disk enclosures are connected to the controller using mini SAS
HD cables. Bend cables naturally and reserve at least 97 mm clearance in
front of the enclosure for winding cables.
● SAS disk enclosures and smart disk enclosures are not connected to the same
expansion loop.
● Standard and high-density disk enclosures are not connected to the same
expansion loop.
● The number of disk enclosures connected to the expansion ports on the
controller enclosure and the number of disk enclosures connected to the
back-end ports must not exceed the upper limit.
● For a 2 U controller enclosure, connect the expansion module on controller A
to expansion module A on each disk enclosure and the expansion module on
controller B to expansion module B on each disk enclosure.
● For a 4 U controller enclosure, connect the expansion module in slot H to
expansion module A on the disk enclosure and the expansion module in slot L
to expansion module B on the disk enclosure.
● The disk enclosure type and the number of cascaded disk enclosures
supported by a controller enclosure must not exceed the specifications. For
details, visit Specifications Query (http://support-it.huawei.com/
storagespecification/#/home).

3.1.2.3.1 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 2200 V5

Comply with the following interface module installation rules and work out the
connection plan.

Rules for Installing Interface Modules

Connect 2 U controller enclosures and disk enclosures using onboard 12 Gbit/s
SAS interface modules. Each of controllers A and B provides two interface module
slots (slot layout shown in Figure 3-8), and a 12 Gbit/s SAS interface module can
be installed only in slot IOM 1.

Figure 3-8 Layout of interface module slots

IOM 0 IOM 1

IOM 0 IOM 1

IOM 0 IOM 1

IOM 0 IOM 1

Connection Planning
To ensure network reliability, connect disk enclosures in the same expansion loop
in forward redundancy mode so that two independent links are set up between
the disk enclosures for mutual backup. In the expansion loops shown in Figure 3-9

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

and Figure 3-10, the orange and blue lines represent two independent links in
mutual backup. A controller failure does not cause all expansion loops to fail. The
following networking diagrams of disk enclosures are for your reference only. You
can access Huawei Storage Product Networking Assistant (https://
support.huawei.com/onlinetoolsweb/sna/#/home) for more networking
diagrams.

Figure 3-9 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 2 U SAS disk

enclosures
P0
硬盘框2
Disk
enclosure 2

P0

Controller
控制框
P1 enclosure

P0
P1

P0

P0 Disk
enclosure 0

P1

P0 P1

硬盘框1
Disk
P0 enclosure 1

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-10 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 4 U SAS

disk enclosures
Disk
enclosure 2
P0

P0

Controller
P1 enclosure

P0
P1

P0

Disk
enclosure 0
P0

P1

P0
P1

Disk
enclosure 1
P0

P0

NOTICE

After disk enclosures are connected and powered on, do not change their positions
in the storage system. Otherwise, IDs of disk enclosures may be displayed
incorrectly, service performance may deteriorate, or some storage resources may
be unavailable.

3.1.2.3.2 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 2600 V5

Comply with the following interface module installation rules and work out the
connection plan.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Rules for Installing Interface Modules

Connect 2 U controller enclosures and disk enclosures using onboard 12 Gbit/s
SAS interface modules. Each of controllers A and B provides two interface module
slots (slot layout shown in Figure 3-11), and a 12 Gbit/s SAS interface module can
be installed only in slot IOM 1.

Figure 3-11 Layout of interface module slots

IOM 0
IOM 1
IOM 0
IOM 1

Connection Planning
To ensure network reliability, connect disk enclosures in the same expansion loop
in forward redundancy mode so that two independent links are set up between
the disk enclosures for mutual backup. In the expansion loops shown in Figure
3-12 and Figure 3-13, the orange and blue lines represent two independent links
in mutual backup. A controller failure does not cause all expansion loops to fail.
The following networking diagrams of disk enclosures are for your reference only.
You can access Huawei Storage Product Networking Assistant (https://
support.huawei.com/onlinetoolsweb/sna/#/home) for more networking
diagrams.

Figure 3-12 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 2 U SAS

disk enclosures
Disk
P0
enclosure 2

P0

P1 Controller
enclosure
P0
P1
P0

P0 Disk
enclosure 0
P1

P0 P1

Disk
P0 enclosure 1

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-13 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 4 U SAS

disk enclosures (applicable to OceanStor 2600 V5)
Disk
enclosure 2
P0

P0

P1 Controller
enclosure
P0
P1
P0

Disk
enclosure 0
P0

P1

P0
P1
Disk
enclosure 1
P0

P0

For V500R007C71 Kunpeng and later versions, the OceanStor 2600 V5 storage
system supports high-density disk enclosures.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-14 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to two high-density

disk enclosures

Controller
1 2 enclosure

1 2

High-density
disk enclosure 0

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

High-density
disk enclosure 1

3 4 3 4

NOTICE

After disk enclosures are connected and powered on, do not change their positions
in the storage system. Otherwise, IDs of disk enclosures may be displayed
incorrectly, service performance may deteriorate, or some storage resources may
be unavailable.

3.1.2.3.3 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS) and
5300F V5 (SAS)
Comply with the following interface module installation rules and work out the
connection plan.

Rules for Installing Interface Modules

Connect 2 U controller enclosures and disk enclosures using onboard 12 Gbit/s
SAS interface modules. Each of controllers A and B provides three interface
module slots. For the slot layout, see Figure 3-15.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-15 Layout of interface module slots

IOM 0 IOM 1
IOM 2
IOM 0 IOM 1
IOM 2

● The recommended slot sequence for installing a 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface
module is as follows: IOM 2 > IOM 1 > IOM 0.
● A 12 Gbit/s SAS interface module can be installed only in slot IOM 2.

Connection Planning
To ensure network reliability, connect disk enclosures in the same expansion loop
in forward redundancy mode so that two independent links are set up between
the disk enclosures for mutual backup. In the expansion loops shown in Figure
3-16, Figure 3-17, and Figure 3-18, the orange and blue lines represent two
independent links in mutual backup. A controller failure does not cause all
expansion loops to fail. The following networking diagrams of disk enclosures are
for your reference only. You can access Huawei Storage Product Networking
Assistant (https://support.huawei.com/onlinetoolsweb/sna/#/home) for more
networking diagrams.

Figure 3-16 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 2 U SAS

disk enclosures

P0 Disk
enclosure 2

P0

P1 Controller
enclosure
P0
P1
P0

P0 Disk
enclosure 0
P1

P0 P1

Disk
P0 enclosure 1

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-17 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 4 U SAS

disk enclosures (applicable to OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS))
Disk
enclosure 2
P0

P0

P1 Controller
enclosure
P0
P1
P0

Disk
enclosure 0
P0

P1

P0
P1
Disk
enclosure 1
P0

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-18 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three smart disk

enclosures
Disk
enclosure 2
P0

P0
Controller
P1 enclosure

P0
P1

P0
Disk
P0 enclosure 0

P1
P1
P0
Disk
enclosure 1
P0

P0

For V500R007C70SPC100 Kunpeng and later versions, OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS)

storage systems support high-density disk enclosures.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-19 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to two high-density

disk enclosures

Controller
1 2 enclosure

1 2

High-density
disk enclosure 0

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

High-density
disk enclosure 1

3 4 3 4

NOTICE

After disk enclosures are connected and powered on, do not change their positions
in the storage system. Otherwise, IDs of disk enclosures may be displayed
incorrectly, service performance may deteriorate, or some storage resources may
be unavailable.

3.1.2.3.4 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe) and
5300F V5 (NVMe)
Comply with the following interface module installation rules and work out the
connection plan.

Rules for Installing Interface Modules

Each of controllers A and B provides three interface module slots. For the slot
layout, see Figure 3-20.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-20 Layout of interface module slots

IOM 0 IOM 1
IOM 2
IOM 0 IOM 1
IOM 2

● The recommended slot sequence for installing a 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface
module is as follows: IOM 2 > IOM 1 > IOM 0.
● A 12 Gbit/s SAS interface module can be installed only in slot IOM 2.

Connection Planning
To ensure network reliability, connect disk enclosures in the same expansion loop
in forward redundancy mode so that two independent links are set up between
the disk enclosures for mutual backup. In the expansion loops shown in Figure
3-21, Figure 3-22, and Figure 3-23, the orange and blue lines represent two
independent links in mutual backup. A controller failure does not cause all
expansion loops to fail. The following networking diagrams of disk enclosures are
for your reference only. You can access Huawei Storage Product Networking
Assistant (https://support.huawei.com/onlinetoolsweb/sna/#/home) for more
networking diagrams.

Figure 3-21 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 2 U SAS

disk enclosures
Disk
enclosure 2
P0

P0
Controller
P1 enclosure

P0
P1

P0
P0 Disk
enclosure 0
P1

P0
P1
Disk
P0
enclosure 1

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-22 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 4 U SAS

disk enclosures (OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe))
Disk
enclosure 2

P0

P0
Controller
P1 enclosure

P0
P1

P0
P0 Disk
enclosure 0

P1

P0
P1
Disk
enclosure 1
P0

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-23 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three smart disk

enclosures
Disk
enclosure 2

P0

P0
Controller
P1 enclosure

P0
P1

P0
P0 Disk
enclosure 0
P1

P0 P1

Disk
P0 enclosure 1

P0

For V500R007C70SPC100 Kunpeng and later versions, OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe)

storage systems support high-density disk enclosures.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-24 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to two high-density

disk enclosures
Controller
enclosure

1 2

1 2

High-density
disk enclosure 0

1 2 1 2

3 4 3 4

High-density
disk enclosure 1

3 4 3 4

NOTICE

After disk enclosures are connected and powered on, do not change their positions
in the storage system. Otherwise, IDs of disk enclosures may be displayed
incorrectly, service performance may deteriorate, or some storage resources may
be unavailable.

3.1.2.3.5 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5,
5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and 5800F V5
Comply with the following interface module installation rules and work out the
connection plan.

Rules for Installing Interface Modules

Connect 2 U controller enclosures and disk enclosures through onboard 12 Gbit/s
SAS or 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface modules, depending on the actual
configuration. Each of controllers A and B provides six interface module slots. For
the slot layout, see Figure 3-25.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-25 Layout of interface module slots

IOM 0 IOM 1 IOM 2
IOM 3 IOM 4 IOM 5
IOM 0 IOM 1 IOM 2
IOM 3 IOM 4 IOM 5

● When the onboard 12 Gbit/s SAS interface module is used, the recommended
slot sequence for installing a 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface module is as follows:
IOM 5 > IOM 4 > IOM 3 > IOM 1 > IOM 0 > IOM 2; the recommended slot
sequence for installing a 12 Gbit/s SAS interface module is as follows: IOM 5
> IOM 4 > IOM 3.
● When the onboard 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface module is used, the
recommended slot sequence for installing the 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface
module is as follows: IOM 5 > IOM 4 > IOM 3 > IOM 1 > IOM 0 > IOM 2. A 12
Gbit/s SAS interface module cannot be installed in any one slot between IOM
5 and IOM 0.

Connection Planning
To ensure network reliability, connect disk enclosures in the same expansion loop
in forward redundancy mode so that two independent links are set up between
the disk enclosures for mutual backup. In the expansion loops shown in Figure
3-26, Figure 3-27, and Figure 3-28, the orange and blue lines represent two
independent links in mutual backup. A controller failure does not cause all
expansion loops to fail. The following networking diagrams of disk enclosures are
for your reference only. You can access Huawei Storage Product Networking
Assistant (https://support.huawei.com/onlinetoolsweb/sna/#/home) for more
networking diagrams.

Figure 3-26 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 2 U SAS

disk enclosures

P0 Disk
enclosure 2

P0
Controller
P1
enclosure

P0
P1
P0

P0 Disk
enclosure 0
P1

P0 P1
P0 Disk
enclosure 1

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-27 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three 4 U SAS

disk enclosures (applicable to OceanStor 5500 V5, 5600 V5, and 5800 V5)
Disk
enclosure 2
P0

P0

Controller
P1
enclosure
P0
P1
P0

Disk
enclosure 0
P0

P1

P0
P1
Disk
enclosure 1
P0

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-28 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to three smart disk

enclosures
Disk
enclosure 2

P0
P0

Controller
P1
enclosure
P0
P1

P0
Disk
P0 enclosure 0
P1

P0 P1

Disk
P0 enclosure 1

In V500R007C71SPC100 Kunpeng and later versions, OceanStor 5500F V5 for HPC

is available (the device model displayed on DeviceManager is OceanStor 5500F V5
for HPC). Figure 3-29 shows the connection with a disk enclosure.

Figure 3-29 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to one 2 U SAS disk

enclosure
Controller
enclosure

P0 P1

P0
P1 P1
P0 Disk
enclosure 0

P0
P1

For V500R007C70SPC100 Kunpeng and later versions, OceanStor 5500 V5, 5600
V5, and 5800 V5 storage systems support high-density disk enclosures.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-30 Example of connecting a 2 U controller enclosure to two high-density

disk enclosures

Controller
1 2 enclosure

1 2

High-density
disk enclosure 0

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

High-density
disk enclosure 1

3 4 3 4

NOTICE

After disk enclosures are connected and powered on, do not change their positions
in the storage system. Otherwise, IDs of disk enclosures may be displayed
incorrectly, service performance may deteriorate, or some storage resources may
be unavailable.

3.1.2.3.6 Disk Enclosure Connection Planning for OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5
Comply with the following interface module installation rules and work out the
connection plan.

Rules for Installing Interface Modules

Each of the H and L planes of a 4 U controller enclosure provides 14 interface
module slots. For the slot layout, see Figure 3-31.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-31 Layout of interface module slots

IOM H11
IOM H12
IOM H13
IOM H10
IOM H4
IOM H5
IOM H6
IOM H7
IOM H0
IOM H1
IOM H2
IOM H3

IOM H8
IOM H9

IOM L11
IOM L12
IOM L13
IOM L10
IOM L4
IOM L5
IOM L6
IOM L7
IOM L0
IOM L1
IOM L2
IOM L3

IOM L8
IOM L9
● The recommended slot sequence for installing 12 Gbit/s SAS interface
modules is as follows: IOM H6/L6 > IOM H7/L7 > IOM H5/L5 > IOM H8/L8.
● The recommended slot sequence for installing 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface
modules is as follows: IOM H6/L6 > IOM H7/L7 > IOM H5/L5 > IOM H8/L8 >
IOM H4/L4 > IOM H9/L9 > IOM H2/L2 > IOM H11/L11 > IOM H1/L1 > IOM
H12/L12 > IOM H3/L3 > IOM H10/L10.
NOTE

The SO 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface module used for adding controller enclosures can
be installed only in slots IOM H3/L3 and IOM H10/L10. When connecting disk
enclosures, do not use these slots unless other slots are not enough for disk enclosure
connection.
● The configuration disk enclosure (the enclosure with coffer disk identifiers)
must be installed in slots IOM H6/L6.

Connection Planning
To ensure network reliability, connect disk enclosures in the same expansion loop
in forward redundancy mode so that two independent links are set up between
the disk enclosures for mutual backup. In the expansion loops shown in Figure
3-32, Figure 3-33, and Figure 3-34, the orange and blue lines represent two
independent links in mutual backup. A controller failure does not cause all
expansion loops to fail. The following networking diagrams of disk enclosures are
for your reference only. You can access Huawei Storage Product Networking
Assistant (https://support.huawei.com/onlinetoolsweb/sna/#/home) for more
networking diagrams.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-32 Example of connecting a 4 U controller enclosure to three 2 U SAS

disk enclosures
P0 Disk
enclosure 2

P0

P1 Controller
enclosure
P0

P0
P1

P0 Disk
enclosure 0
P1
P0

P1
P0 Disk
enclosure 1

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-33 Example of connecting a 4 U controller enclosure to three 4 U SAS

disk enclosures (applicable to OceanStor 6800 V5)
Disk
enclosure 2

P0

P0

Controller
P1
enclosure
P0

P1 P0

Disk
enclosure 0
P0

P0 P1

P1
Disk
enclosure 1
P0

P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-34 Example of connecting a 4 U controller enclosure to three smart disk

enclosures

P0 Disk
enclosure 2

P0

Controller
P0
enclosure
P0

P0 P0

P0 Disk
enclosure 0

P1
P0
P1

Disk
P0 enclosure 1

P0

For V500R007C71SPC100 Kunpeng and later versions, the OceanStor 6800 V5

storage system supports high-density disk enclosures.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-35 Example of connecting a 4 U controller enclosure to two high-density

disk enclosures

Controller
1 enclosure

High-density
disk enclosure 0

1 1

2 2

High-density
disk enclosure 1

2 2

NOTICE

After disk enclosures are connected and powered on, do not change their positions
in the storage system. Otherwise, IDs of disk enclosures may be displayed
incorrectly, service performance may deteriorate, or some storage resources may
be unavailable.

3.1.2.4 (Optional) Connection Planning for Multiple Controller Enclosures

This section describes how to deploy the storage system with two or more
controller enclosures.

3.1.2.4.1 Direct-Connection Network (OceanStor 2600 V5)

Figure 3-36 shows the direct-connection network of controller enclosures when
the storage system is configured with two controller enclosures (with four
controllers).

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTICE

The 25 Gbit/s RDMA interface module that connects two controller enclosures
must be installed in slot IOM 0.

Figure 3-36 Directly connecting two controller enclosures

Connects to the
management network
4
3
2
1
Controller
enclosure 0

1 3
2 4
Connects to the
management network

(Optional) Connects to the

2 4
management network 1 3
Controller
enclosure 1

1
2
3
4
(Optional) Connects to the
management network

To use remote power-on, connect the maintenance ports between the controller
enclosures using network cables, as shown by the green cables in Figure 3-37.

NOTICE

● For a storage system with a single controller enclosure, no additional cable

connection is required.
● For a storage system with multiple controller enclosures, you must connect the
maintenance ports between these controller enclosures using network cables
after establishing the multi-controller network.
● After the first power-on and initialization, the controller enclosures support
remote power-on in later operations. For the first power-on and initialization,
you must use the power button on the controller enclosures. For details on
remote power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on the CLI,
Applicable to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the Administrator Guide
specific to your product model.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-37 Directly connecting two controller enclosures (supporting remote

power-on)
Connects to the
management network
4
3
2
1
Controller
enclosure 0

1 3
2 4
Connects to the
management network

(Optional) Connects to the

2 4
management network 1 3
Controller
enclosure 1

1
2
3
4
(Optional) Connects to the
management network
Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports.
If remote power-on is not needed, you do not need to connect the green cables.

3.1.2.4.2 Direct-Connection Network (OceanStor 5300 V5 and 5300F V5)

Figure 3-38 and Figure 3-39 show the direct-connection network of controller
enclosures when the storage system is configured with two controller enclosures
(with four controllers).

NOTICE

The 25 Gbit/s RDMA interface module that connects two controller enclosures
must be installed in slot IOM 1.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-38 Directly connecting two controller enclosures for OceanStor 5300 V5
(SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)
Connects to the
management network
4
3
2
1
Controller
enclosure 0

1 3
2 4
Connects to the
management network

2 4
(Optional) Connects to the 1 3
management network Controller
enclosure 1

1
2
3
4
(Optional) Connects to the
management network

Figure 3-39 Directly connecting two controller enclosures for OceanStor 5300 V5
(NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)
Connects to the
management network
4
3
2
1
Controller
enclosure 0

1 3
2 4
Connects to the
management network

2 4
(Optional) Connects to the 1 3
management network Controller
enclosure 1

1
2
3
4
(Optional) Connects to the
management network

To use remote power-on, connect the maintenance ports between the controller
enclosures using network cables, as shown by the green cables in Figure 3-40 and
Figure 3-41.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTICE

● For a storage system with a single controller enclosure, no additional cable

connection is required.
● For a storage system with multiple controller enclosures, you must connect the
maintenance ports between these controller enclosures using network cables
after establishing the multi-controller network.
● After the first power-on and initialization, the controller enclosures support
remote power-on in later operations. For the first power-on and initialization,
you must use the power button on the controller enclosures. For details on
remote power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on the CLI,
Applicable to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the Administrator Guide
specific to your product model.

Figure 3-40 Directly connecting two controller enclosures (supporting remote

power-on) for OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)
Connects to the
management network
4
3
2
1
Controller
enclosure 0

1 3
2 4
Connects to the
management network

2 4
(Optional) Connects to the 1 3
management network Controller
enclosure 1

1
2
3
4
(Optional) Connects to the
management network

Note:
In V500R007C70 and later versions, if you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the
green cables to the maintenance network ports. If remote power-on is not needed, you do not need to
connect the green cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-41 Directly connecting two controller enclosures (supporting remote

power-on) for OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)
Connects to the
management network
4
3
2
1
Controller
enclosure 0

1 3
2 4
Connects to the
management network

2 4
(Optional) Connects to the 1 3
management network
Controller
enclosure 1

1
2
3
4
(Optional) Connects to the
management network

Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports.
If remote power-on is not needed, you do not need to connect the green cables.

3.1.2.4.3 Direct-Connection Network (OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5,
5600F V5, 5800 V5, and 5800F V5)
Figure 3-42 shows the direct-connection network of controller enclosures when
the storage system is configured with two controller enclosures (with four
controllers).

NOTICE

The 25 Gbit/s RDMA interface module that connects two controller enclosures
must be installed in slot IOM 2.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-42 Directly connecting two controller enclosures

Connects to the
management network
4
3
2
1
Controller
enclosure 0

1 3
2 4
Connects to the
management network

(Optional) Connects to
2 4
the management network 1 3
Controller
enclosure 1

(Optional) Connects to 1
the management network 2
3
4

To use remote power-on, connect the maintenance ports between the controller
enclosures using network cables, as shown by the green cables in Figure 3-43.

NOTICE

● For a storage system with a single controller enclosure, no additional cable

connection is required.
● For a storage system with multiple controller enclosures, you must connect the
maintenance ports between these controller enclosures using network cables
after establishing the multi-controller network.
● After the first power-on and initialization, the controller enclosures support
remote power-on in later operations. For the first power-on and initialization,
you must use the power button on the controller enclosures. For details on
remote power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on the CLI,
Applicable to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the Administrator Guide
specific to your product model.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-43 Directly connecting two controller enclosures (supporting remote

power-on)
Connects to the
management network
4
3
2
1
Controller
enclosure 0

1 3
2 4
Connects to the
management network

(Optional) Connects to
2 4
the management network 1 3
Controller
enclosure 1

(Optional) Connects to 1
the management network 2
3
4

Note:
In V500R007C70 and later versions, if you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the
green cables to the maintenance network ports. If remote power-on is not needed, you do not need to
connect the green cables.

3.1.2.4.4 Direct-Connection Network (OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5)

Figure 3-44 shows the direct-connection network of controller enclosures when
the storage system is configured with two controller enclosures (with six or eight
controllers).

NOTICE

The SO 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface modules that connect two controller
enclosures must be installed in slots IOM H3/L3 and IOM H10/L10.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-44 Directly connecting two controller enclosures

Controller
控制框0 1 2
enclosure 0 Connects to the user
连接到用户管理网络
management network

Connects to the user

连接到用户管理网络
management network

1 2

Controller
控制框1 1 2 (Optional) Connects to
enclosure 1 连接到用户管理网络
the management network

(Optional) Connects to
连接到用户管理网络
the management network

1 2

To use remote power-on, connect the maintenance ports between the controller
enclosures using network cables, as shown by the green cables in Figure 3-45.

NOTICE

● For a storage system with a single controller enclosure, no additional cable

connection is required.
● For a storage system with multiple controller enclosures, you must connect the
maintenance ports between these controller enclosures using network cables
after establishing the multi-controller network.
● After the first power-on and initialization, the controller enclosures support
remote power-on in later operations. For the first power-on and initialization,
you must use the power button on the controller enclosures. For details on
remote power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on the CLI,
Applicable to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the Administrator Guide
specific to your product model.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-45 Directly connecting two controller enclosures (supporting remote

power-on)

Controller
控制框0 1 2
enclosure 0 Connects to the user
连接到用户管理网络
management network

Connects to the user

连接到用户管理网络
management network

1 2

Controller
控制框1 1 2 (Optional) Connects to
enclosure 1 连接到用户管理网络
the management network

(Optional) Connects to
连接到用户管理网络
the management network

1 2

Note:
In V500R007C70 and later versions, if you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables
to the maintenance network ports. If remote power-on is not needed, you do not need to connect the green cables.

3.1.2.4.5 Switched Network (OceanStor 2600 V5)

When a storage system has two controller enclosures, they can be connected
using switches. The 25 Gbit/s RDMA interface module that connects multiple
controller enclosures must be installed in slot IOM 0. To facilitate future
maintenance, attach labels to data switches 0 and 1 to distinguish them after the
networking is complete.
When switches are used for networking, only Huawei CE6865-48S8CQ-EI switches
are supported. Ensure that the switch software version is V200R005C10SPC800
(with the V200R005C10SPH017 patch installed) or later. For details about how to
query and upgrade the switch version, see the product documentation of
CE6865-48S8CQ-EI switches. To obtain the documentation, log in to Huawei's
technical support website (https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/), enter the
product model (for example, CE6865) in the search box, and click the suggested
path beneath the search box. On the documentation page of the product model,
search for, browse through, and download the desired documentation.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

WARNING

● The two switches used for controller expansion must be of the same model.
● Switches for controller expansion can only be used for scale-out networking. Do
not use them for front-end service networking or other purposes.
● Switches used for controller expansion cannot be stacked or cascaded.
● Do not upgrade the firmware of the switches used for controller expansion.

Figure 3-46 shows how to connect multiple controller enclosures.

NOTICE

After the first power-on and initialization, the controller enclosures support
remote power-on in later operations. For the first power-on and initialization, you
must use the power button on the controller enclosures. For details on remote
power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on the CLI, Applicable
to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the administrator guide corresponding to
your product model.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-46 Switched networking between two controller enclosures

The ETH management network port at the front Data switch 0

of a switch connects to the management network. (front)

The ETH management network port at the front Data switch 1

of a switch connects to the management network. (front)

3
1 Data switch 0
(rear)
2
4

3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4

Connects to the 1 1
management network. Controller
enclosure 0

2 2

Connects to the
management network.
3 3
(Optional) Connects to the
Controller
management network.
enclosure 1

4 4

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.
Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports as
instructed in the figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

Follow-up Procedure
After planning ports, you must formulate port correlation tables for connections
between the storage system and switch ports, as listed in Table 3-5.

Table 3-5 Port correlation between the storage system and switches
Port Number Storage System Switch Port Port Number
Port

0 Storage_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 0

Y stands for the port number.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

3.1.2.4.6 Switched Network (OceanStor 5300 V5 and 5300F V5 in V500R007C71

Kunpeng and Later)
When a storage system has two or more controller enclosures, they can be
connected using switches. The 25 Gbit/s RDMA interface module that connects
multiple controller enclosures must be installed in slot IOM 1. To facilitate future
maintenance, attach labels to data switches 0 and 1 to distinguish them after the
networking is complete.
When switches are used for networking, only Huawei CE6865-48S8CQ-EI switches
are supported. Ensure that the switch software version is V200R005C10SPC800
(with the V200R005C10SPH017 patch installed) or later. For details about how to
query and upgrade the switch version, see the product documentation of
CE6865-48S8CQ-EI switches. To obtain the documentation, log in to Huawei's
technical support website (https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/), enter the
product model (for example, CE6865) in the search box, and click the suggested
path beneath the search box. On the documentation page of the product model,
search for, browse through, and download the desired documentation.

WARNING

● The two switches used for controller expansion must be of the same model.
● Switches for controller expansion can only be used for scale-out networking. Do
not use them for front-end service networking or other purposes.
● Switches used for controller expansion cannot be stacked or cascaded.
● Do not upgrade the firmware of the switches used for controller expansion.

Figure 3-47, Figure 3-48, Figure 3-49, Figure 3-50, Figure 3-51, and Figure 3-52
show how to connect multiple controller enclosures.

NOTICE

After the first power-on and initialization, the controller enclosures support
remote power-on in later operations. For the first power-on and initialization, you
must use the power button on the controller enclosures. For details on remote
power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on the CLI, Applicable
to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the Administrator Guide corresponding to
your product model.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-47 Switched networking between two controller enclosures for

OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)

The ETH management network port at the front of Data switch 0

a switch connects to the management network. (front)

The ETH management network port at the front of Data switch 1

a switch connects to the management network. (front)

3
1 Data switch 0
(rear)
2
4

3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4

Connects to the 1 1
management network. Controller
enclosure 0

2 2

Connects to the
management network.
3 3
(Optional) Connects to the
Controller
management network.
enclosure 1

4 4

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.
Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports as
instructed in the figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-48 Switched networking between two controller enclosures for

OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)

Connects the ETH management network port at

Data switch 0
the front of a switch to the management network.
(front)

Connects the ETH management network port at

Data switch 1
the front of a switch to the management network.
(front)

3
1
Data switch 0
2 (rear)
4

3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4

Connects to the 1 1
management network. Controller
enclosure 0

2 2

Connects to the
management network.

3 3
(Optional) Connects to the Controller
management network. enclosure 1

4 4

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.
Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the cables (green cables) of the maintenance network
ports as instructed in the figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-49 Switched networking among three controller enclosures for

OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)

The ETH management network port at the front of a Data switch 0

switch connects to the management network. (front)

The ETH management network port at the front of a Data switch 1

switch connects to the management network. (front)

5
3
1 Data switch 0
(rear)
2
4
6
5
3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4
6

Connects to the 1 1
management network. Controller
enclosure 0

2 2

Connects to the
management network.
3 3
(Optional) Connects to the
Controller
management network.
enclosure 1

4 4

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.

5 5
(Optional) Connects to the Controller
management network. enclosure 2

6 6

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.
Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports as instructed in the
figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-50 Switched networking among three controller enclosures for

OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)

Connects the ETH management network port at

Data switch 0
the front of a switch to the management network.
(front)

Connects the ETH management network port at

Data switch 1
the front of a switch to the management network.
(front)

5
3
1 Data switch 0
(rear)
2
4
6
5
3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4
6

Connects to the 1 1 Controller enclosure

management network.
0 (original)

2 2

Connects to the
management network.
3 3
(Optional) Connects to the Controller
management network. enclosure 1

4 4

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.

5 5
(Optional) Connects to the
management network. Controller
enclosure 2

6 6

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.

Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the cables (green cables) of the maintenance network ports as
instructed in the figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-51 Switched networking among four controller enclosures for OceanStor
5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)

The ETH management network port at the front of a Data switch 0

switch connects to the management network. (front)

The ETH management network port at the front of a Data switch 1

switch connects to the management network. (front)

5 7
3
Data switch 0
1
(rear)
2
4
6 8
7
5
3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4
6
8
Connects to the 1 1
management network. Controller
enclosure 0

2 2

Connects to the
management network.
3 3
(Optional) Connects to the
Controller
management network.
enclosure 1

4 4

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.

5 5
(Optional) Connects to the
Controller
management network.
enclosure 2

6 6

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.

7 7
(Optional) Connects to the
Controller
management network.
enclosure 3

8 8

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.
Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports as instructed in the figure.
In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-52 Switched networking among four controller enclosures for OceanStor
5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)

Connects the ETH management network port at Data switch 0

the front of a switch to the management network. (front)

Connects the ETH management network port at Data switch 1

the front of a switch to the management network. (front)

5 7
3
1 Data switch 0
2 (rear)

4
6 8
7
5
3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4
6
8
Connects to the 1 1
Controller
management network.
enclosure 0

2 2

Connects to the
management network.
3 3
(Optional) Connects to the Controller
management network. enclosure 1

4 4

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.

5 5
(Optional) Connects to the Controller
management network. enclosure 2

6 6

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.

7 7
(Optional) Connects to the Controller
management network. enclosure 3

8 8

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.
Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the cables (green cables) of the maintenance network ports as instructed in
the figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

Follow-up Procedure
After planning ports, you must formulate port correlation tables for connections
between the storage system and switch ports, as listed in Table 3-6.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-6 Port correlation between the storage system and switches

Port Number Storage System Switch Port Port Number

Port

0 Storage_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 0

Y stands for the port number.

3.1.2.4.7 Switched Network (OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5,
5800 V5, and 5800F V5 in V500R007C71 Kunpeng and Later)
When a storage system has two or more controller enclosures, they can be
connected using switches. The 25 Gbit/s RDMA interface module that connects
multiple controller enclosures must be installed in slot IOM 2. To facilitate future
maintenance, attach labels to data switches 0 and 1 to distinguish them after the
networking is complete.

When switches are used for networking, only Huawei CE6865-48S8CQ-EI switches
are supported. Ensure that the switch software version is V200R005C10SPC800
(with the V200R005C10SPH017 patch installed) or later. For details about how to
query and upgrade the switch version, see the product documentation of
CE6865-48S8CQ-EI switches. To obtain the documentation, log in to Huawei's
technical support website (https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/), enter the
product model (for example, CE6865) in the search box, and click the suggested
path beneath the search box. On the documentation page of the product model,
search for, browse through, and download the desired documentation.

WARNING

● The two switches used for controller expansion must be of the same model.
● Switches for controller expansion can only be used for scale-out networking. Do
not use them for front-end service networking or other purposes.
● Switches used for controller expansion cannot be stacked or cascaded.
● Do not upgrade the firmware of the switches used for controller expansion.

Figure 3-53, Figure 3-54, and Figure 3-55 show how to connect multiple
controller enclosures.

NOTICE

After the first power-on and initialization, the controller enclosures support
remote power-on in later operations. For the first power-on and initialization, you
must use the power button on the controller enclosures. For details on remote
power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on the CLI, Applicable
to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the Administrator Guide corresponding to
your product model.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-53 Switched networking between two controller enclosures

The ETH management network port at the front of Data switch 0

a switch connects to the management network. (front)

The ETH management network port at the front of Data switch 1

a switch connects to the management network. (front)

3
Data switch 0
1
(rear)
2

3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4
Connects to the management network.

1 1
Controller enclosure 0

Connects to the
management 2 2
network.

(Optional) Connects to
the management
network.
3 3

Controller enclosure 1

(Optional) Connects to the 4 4

management network.

Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports as
instructed in the figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.
This figure uses the controller enclosures with onboard 100 Gbit/s RDMA ports as an example. Networking of the controller
enclosures with onboard mini SAS HD ports is the same.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-54 Switched networking among three controller enclosures

The ETH management network port at the front of Data switch 0

a switch connects to the management network. (front)

The ETH management network port at the front of Data switch 1

a switch connects to the management network. (front)

5
3
Data switch 0
1
(rear)
2

4
6
5
3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4
6

Connects to the
1 1
management network.
Controller enclosure 0

Connects to the
management 2 2
network.

(Optional) Connects
to the management
network.
3 3

Controller enclosure 1

(Optional) Connects to
the management 4 4
network.

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.
5 5

Controller enclosure 2

(Optional) Connects to the 6 6

management network.

Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports as instructed in the
figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

This figure uses the controller enclosures with onboard 100 Gbit/s RDMA ports as an example. Networking of the controller enclosures
with onboard mini SAS HD ports is the same.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-55 Switched networking among four controller enclosures

The ETH management network port at the front of Data switch 0

a switch connects to the management network. (front)

The ETH management network port at the front of Data switch 1

a switch connects to the management network. (front)

5 7
3
1 Data switch 0
(rear)
2
4
6 8
7
5
3
1

Data switch 1
(rear)

2
4
6
8
Connects to the management network. 1 1
Controller enclosure 0

Connects to the
management 2 2
network.

(Optional) Connects
to the management
network.
3 3
Controller enclosure 1

(Optional) Connects to the 4 4

management network.

(Optional) Connects to
the management network.
5 5
Controller enclosure 2

(Optional) Connects to the 6 6

management network.

(Optional) Connects to the

management network.
7 7
Controller enclosure 3

(Optional) Connects to the

management network. 8 8

Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the green cables to the maintenance network ports as instructed in the figure.
In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

This figure uses the controller enclosures with onboard 100 Gbit/s RDMA ports as an example. Networking of the controller enclosures with
onboard mini SAS HD ports is the same.

Follow-up Procedure
After planning ports, you must formulate port correlation tables for connections
between the storage system and switch ports, as listed in Table 3-7.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-7 Port correlation between the storage system and switches

Port Number Storage System Switch Port Port Number

Port

0 Storage_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 0

Y stands for the port number.

3.1.2.4.8 Switched Network (OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5 in

V500R007C70SPC200 and Later)
When a storage system has two or more controller enclosures, they can be
connected using switches. The SO 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface modules used for
multi-controller cascading must be installed in slots IOM H3/L3 and IOM H10/L10.
To facilitate future maintenance, attach labels to data switches 0 and 1 to
distinguish them after the networking is complete.

When switches are used for networking, only Huawei CE8850-32CQ-EI or CE8850-
SAN switches are supported.

● For CE8850-32CQ-EI switches, ensure that the switch software version is

V200R005C10SPC800 (with the V200R005C10SPH017 patch installed) or later.
For details about how to query and upgrade the switch version, see the
product documentation of CE8850-32CQ-EI switches. To obtain the
documentation, log in to Huawei's technical support website (https://
support.huawei.com/enterprise/), enter the product model (for example,
CE8850) in the search box, and click the suggested path beneath the search
box. On the documentation page of the product model, search for, browse
through, and download the desired documentation.
● For CE8850-SAN switches, ensure that the switch software version is
V300R020C10SPC200 or later. For details about how to query and upgrade
the switch version, see the product documentation of CE8850-SAN switches.
To obtain the documentation, log in to Huawei's technical support website
(https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/), enter the product model (for
example, CE8850) in the search box, and click the suggested path beneath the
search box. On the documentation page of the product model, search for,
browse through, and download the desired documentation.

WARNING

● The two switches used for controller expansion must be of the same model.
● Switches for controller expansion can only be used for scale-out networking. Do
not use them for front-end service networking or other purposes.
● Switches used for controller expansion cannot be stacked or cascaded.
● Do not upgrade the firmware of the switches used for controller expansion.

Figure 3-56 and Figure 3-57 show how to connect multiple controller enclosures.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTICE

After the first power-on and initialization, the controller enclosures support
remote power-on in later operations. For the first power-on and initialization, you
must use the power button on the controller enclosures. For details on remote
power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on the CLI, Applicable
to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the Administrator Guide specific to your
product model.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-56 Switched networking between two controller enclosures (with

CE8850-32CQ-EI switches)

Connects the ETH management network port at the Data switch 0

front of a switch to the management network. (front)

Connects the ETH management network port at the Data switch 1

front of a switch to the management network. (front)

3
1
Data switch 0
2 (rear)
4

3
1

Data switch 1
(rear)
2
4

1 Connects to the
1 management network.
Controller enclosure 0
(original)

2 Connects to the
2 management network.

(Optional) Connects to
3
the management
3 network.
Controller enclosure 1
(new)

(Optional) Connects to
4 the management
4 network.

Note:
· If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the cables (green cables) of the maintenance
network ports as instructed in the figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.
· The network uses the controller enclosures with 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion modules as an example to describe
the networking. Networking of the controller enclosures with 12 Gbit/s SAS expansion modules is the same.
· SO 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface modules must be installed in slots IOM H3/L3 and IOM H10/L10.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-57 Switched networking between two controller enclosures (with

CE8850-SAN switches)

Connects the ETH management network port at Data switch 0

the front of a switch to the management network. (front)

Connects the ETH management network port at Data switch 1

the front of a switch to the management network. (front)

3
1 Data switch 0
2 (rear)

3
1
Data switch 1
(rear)
2
4

1 Connects to the
1 management network.
Controller enclosure 0
(original)

2 Connects to the
2 management network.

3 (Optional) Connects to
3 the management
network.
Controller enclosure 1
(new)

(Optional) Connects to
4 4 the management
network.

Note:
If you want to remotely power on the storage system, connect the cables (green cables) of the maintenance
network ports as instructed in the figure. In other cases, you do not need to connect the green cables.

The network uses the controller enclosures with 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion modules as an example to describe
the networking. Networking of the controller enclosures with 12 Gbit/s SAS expansion modules is the same.

SO 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface modules must be installed in slots IOM H3/L3 and IOM H10/L10.

Follow-up Procedure
After planning ports, you must formulate port correlation tables for connections
between the storage system and switch ports, as listed in Table 3-8.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-8 Port correlation between the storage system and switches

Port Number Storage System Switch Port Port Number

Port

0 Storage_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 0

Y stands for the port number.

3.1.2.5 Connection Planning Between Controller Enclosures and Application

Servers
A controller enclosure can connect to an application server through front-end
interface modules of different speeds. The interface modules on the controller
enclosure are in redundancy configuration. Therefore, you are advised to connect
the controller enclosure to the application server in redundancy mode. For details
about front-end interface modules, see "Interface Module" in the Product
Description specific to your product model.

3.1.2.5.1 Connection Planning Between 2 U Controller Enclosures and Application

Servers
This section describes connection planning between 2 U controller enclosures and
application servers.

Context
Application servers and storage systems support various network modes. An
application server is usually connected to a storage system over multiple paths for
enhanced data transfer security and reliability.
NOTE

● In planning block services, hosts require multipathing software to select and manage
paths between application servers and storage systems. In planning file services, hosts
do not require multipathing software.
● To connect storage systems to application servers, both iSCSI and Fibre Channel
networks are supported for block services while only the NAS network is supported for
file services. The principles for planning iSCSI and NAS networks between storage
systems and application servers are the same.
● This section uses the block service network planning as an example. For details about
how to configure services, see the Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for Block
and Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for File specific to your product model.

On a network with multiple links for block services, multipathing software is

required to select and manage paths between application servers and storage
systems. This section uses UltraPath, Huawei-developed multipathing software, as
an example. For details about how to install and configure UltraPath, see the
OceanStor UltraPath User Guide. For the operating systems supporting UltraPath,
see the Release Notes corresponding to your UltraPath version. If your operating
system does not support UltraPath, use the operating system's native multipathing
software.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Planning Rules
To improve system reliability, comply with the following rules for cable connection:
● Figure 3-58 shows the 2 U controller enclosure of OceanStor 2200 V5. Each
of controllers A and B provides two interface module slots. The slot sequence
for installing interface modules to connect to application servers is IOM 0 >
IOM 1.

Figure 3-58 Layout of interface module slots in a 2 U controller enclosure

IOM 0 IOM 1

IOM 0 IOM 1

IOM 0 IOM 1

IOM 0 IOM 1

● Figure 3-59 shows the 2 U controller enclosure of OceanStor 2600 V5. Each
of controllers A and B provides two interface module slots. The slot sequence
for installing interface modules to connect to application servers is IOM 0 >
IOM 1.

Figure 3-59 Layout of interface module slots in a 2 U controller enclosure

IOM 0
IOM 1
IOM 0
IOM 1

● Figure 3-60 shows the 2 U controller enclosure of OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS)

and 5300F V5 (SAS). Each of controllers A and B provides three interface
module slots. The slot sequence for installing interface modules to connect to
application servers is IOM 0 > IOM 1 > IOM 2.

Figure 3-60 Layout of interface module slots in a 2 U controller enclosure

IOM 0 IOM 1
IOM 2
IOM 0 IOM 1
IOM 2

● Figure 3-61 shows the 2 U controller enclosure of OceanStor 5300 V5

(NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe). Each of controllers A and B provides three
interface module slots. The slot sequence for installing interface modules to
connect to application servers is IOM 0 > IOM 1 > IOM 2.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-61 Layout of interface module slots in a 2 U controller enclosure

IOM 0 IOM 1
IOM 2
IOM 0 IOM 1
IOM 2

● Figure 3-62 shows the 2 U controller enclosure of OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F
V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and 5800F V5. Each of controllers A and B
provides six interface module slots. The slot sequence for installing interface
modules to connect to application servers is IOM 0 > IOM 1 > IOM 3 > IOM 4
> IOM 5 > IOM 2.

Figure 3-62 Layout of interface module slots in a 2 U controller enclosure

IOM 0 IOM 1 IOM 2
IOM 3 IOM 4 IOM 5
IOM 0 IOM 1 IOM 2
IOM 3 IOM 4 IOM 5

● Interface modules of the same type must be inserted in sequence.

● Insert the interface modules used for Ethernet networking in ascending order
of their port rates. Then insert the interface modules used for Fibre Channel
networking in ascending order of their port rates.
● The front-end port connections are symmetric between controllers A and B on
the same storage system. That is, the interface modules reside in slots with
the same slot ID and use the ports in the same positions.
● In the Ethernet port bonding scenario, the member bond ports are symmetric
between controllers A and B on the same storage system. That is, the
interface modules reside in slots with the same slot ID and use the ports in
the same positions.

NOTICE

For the GE electrical interface module:

● If the rate of a GE electrical port is set to 1000 Mbit/s, the GE electrical port
supports only the full-duplex mode.
● If GE electrical ports on a GE electrical interface module or network ports on
an application server (or a switch) are not in autonegotiation mode, you must
use crossover cables to connect the controller enclosure to the application
server (or a switch). Otherwise, the controller enclosure may fail to
communicate with the application server (or a switch).
● A GE electrical port uses a CAT5 network cable or CAT6A shielded network
cable.

Connection Plans
A storage system can be connected to an application server directly or through
two switches.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTE

● Other connection modes between storage systems and application servers include
single-switch connection, dual-switch connection in a cluster environment, and dual-
switch connection in a HyperMetro cluster environment. For details, see "Typical
UltraPath Applications" in the OceanStor UltraPath User Guide.
● The following examples use the 2 U controller enclosure of OceanStor 5300 V5.
● Direct connection (single controller enclosure)
An application server is directly connected to a storage system through two
paths. Connect at least one front-end port on each controller to the
application server for redundancy. UltraPath automatically calculates and
selects the optimal path for data transmission based on the operating status
of the storage system. Figure 3-63, Figure 3-64, and Figure 3-65 show the
connection diagrams.

Figure 3-63 Direct connection diagram

Application server
UltraPath
Network card Network card
0/HBA 0 1/HBA 1
P0 P0

P0 P0
Controller A Controller B

Figure 3-64 Directly connecting the storage device and the application server
over GE electrical ports

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-65 Directly connecting the storage device and the application server
over Fibre Channel ports

● Dual-switch connection (single controller enclosure)

In this mode, two switches are added to the direct connections. Each
controller is connected to each switch.
The switches increase the number of ports to allow more access paths.
Moreover, the switches extend the transmission distance by connecting
remote application servers to the storage system. The two switches are
redundant of each other to prevent single point of failure and improve the
forwarding capability. Figure 3-66, Figure 3-67, and Figure 3-68 show the
connection diagrams.
NOTE

When setting up connections through switches, note the following:

● If Ethernet switches are used, plan the network segment of the switches in
advance and assign ports to each network segment.
● If Fibre Channel switches are used, plan switch zones in advance and assign ports
to each zone.
● The first and last ports on a switch are typically used to connect to other switches.

Figure 3-66 Dual-switch connection diagram

Application server
UltraPath
Network card Network card
0/HBA 0 1/HBA 1
P0 P0

Switch 1 Switch 2

P0 P1 P0 P1
Controller A Controller B

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-67 Connecting the storage device and the application server through
switches over GE electrical ports

Figure 3-68 Connecting the storage device and the application server through
switches over Fibre Channel ports

Table 3-9 provides an example of zone planning for a Fibre Channel network.

Table 3-9 Zone configuration example

Zone Name Application Storage System Switch

Server

Zone 1 HBA 0, P0 Controller A, P0 Switch 1

Zone 2 HBA 0, P0 Controller B, P0 Switch 1

Zone 3 HBA 1, P0 Controller A, P1 Switch 2

Zone 4 HBA 1, P0 Controller B, P1 Switch 2

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

● Direct connection and dual-switch connection for multiple controller

enclosures
When the storage system has two controller enclosures, ensure that front-end
interface modules on every enclosure are all connected to the application
server. The connection between each controller enclosure and the application
server is the same as that when a single controller enclosure is deployed, as
shown in Figure 3-69 and Figure 3-70.

Figure 3-69 Direct connection for multiple controller enclosures

Application server
UltraPath
Network card Network card
0/HBA 0 1/HBA 1
P0 P1 P0 P1

P0 P0 P0 P0
Controller A Controller B Controller A Controller B
Controller enclosure 0 Controller enclosure 1

Figure 3-70 Dual-switch connection for multiple controller enclosures

Application server
UltraPath
Network card Network card
0/HBA 0 1/HBA 1
P0 P0

Switch 1 Switch 2

P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1
Controller A Controller B Controller A Controller B
Controller enclosure 0 Controller enclosure 1

Table 3-10 provides an example of zone planning for a Fibre Channel

network.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-10 Zone configuration example

Zone Name Application Storage System Switch

Server

Zone 1 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure 0, Switch 1

controller A, P0

Zone 2 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure 0, Switch 1

controller B, P0

Zone 3 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure 0, Switch 2

controller A, P1

Zone 4 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure 0, Switch 2

controller B, P1

Zone 5 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure 1, Switch 1

controller A, P0

Zone 6 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure 1, Switch 1

controller B, P0

Zone 7 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure 1, Switch 2

controller A, P1

Zone 8 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure 1, Switch 2

controller B, P1

Follow-up Procedure
After planning ports, you must formulate port correlation tables for connections
between the application server and switch ports, and for connections between the
storage system and switch ports. Table 3-11 shows port correlation between the
application server and switches, and Table 3-12 shows port correlation between
the storage system and switches.

Table 3-11 Port correlation between the application server and switches

Port Number Application Switch Port Port Number

Server Port

0 Server_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 0

Y stands for the port number.

Table 3-12 Port correlation between the storage system and switches

Port Number Storage System Switch Port Port Number

Port

1 Storage_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 1

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Port Number Storage System Switch Port Port Number

Port

Y stands for the port number.

3.1.2.5.2 Connection Planning Between 4 U Controller Enclosures and Application

Servers
This section describes connection planning between 4 U controller enclosures and
application servers.

Context
● Application servers and storage systems support various network modes. An
application server is usually connected to a storage system over multiple
paths for enhanced data transfer security and reliability.
NOTE

● In planning block services, hosts require multipathing software to select and

manage paths between application servers and storage systems. In planning file
services, hosts do not require multipathing software.
● To connect storage systems to application servers, both iSCSI and Fibre Channel
networks are supported for block services while only the NAS network is supported
for file services. The principles for planning iSCSI and NAS networks between
storage systems and application servers are the same.
● This section uses the block service network planning as an example. For details
about how to configure services, see the Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide
for Block and Basic Storage Service Configuration Guide for File specific to your
product model.
On a network with multiple links for block services, multipathing software is
required to select and manage paths between application servers and storage
systems. This section uses UltraPath, Huawei-developed multipathing
software, as an example. For details about how to install and configure
UltraPath, see the OceanStor UltraPath User Guide. For the operating systems
supporting UltraPath, see the Release Notes corresponding to your UltraPath
version. If your operating system does not support UltraPath, use the
operating system's native multipathing software.
● A 4 U controller enclosure has four quadrants: A, B, C, and D, as shown in
Figure 3-71.

Figure 3-71 Quadrants on a 4 U controller enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Planning Rules
To improve system reliability, comply with the following rules for cable connection:

● Figure 3-72 shows a 4 U controller enclosure. From left to right, the slot IDs
are from IOM H0 to IOM H13 in the upper half and are from IOM L0 to IOM
L13 in the lower half.

Figure 3-72 Layout of interface module slots in a 4 U controller enclosure

IOM H11
IOM H12
IOM H13
IOM H10
IOM H4
IOM H5
IOM H6
IOM H7
IOM H0
IOM H1
IOM H2
IOM H3

IOM H8
IOM H9

IOM L11
IOM L12
IOM L13
IOM L10
IOM L4
IOM L5
IOM L6
IOM L7
IOM L0
IOM L1
IOM L2
IOM L3

IOM L8
IOM L9

– In Fibre Channel networking:

▪ If 12 Gbit/s SAS interface modules are configured, the recommended

slot sequence for installing front-end interface modules is as follows:
IOM H0/L0 > IOM H13/L13 > IOM H1/L1 > IOM H12/L12 > IOM
H2/L2 > IOM H11/L11 > IOM H4/L4 > IOM H9/L9 > IOM H3/L3 >
IOM H10/L10.

▪ If BE 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface modules are configured, the

recommended slot sequence for installing front-end interface
modules is as follows: IOM H0/L0 > IOM H13/L13 > IOM H1/L1 >
IOM H12/L12 > IOM H2/L2 > IOM H11/L11 > IOM H4/L4 > IOM
H9/L9 > IOM H5/L5 > IOM H8/L8 > IOM H7/L7 > IOM H3/L3 > IOM
H10/L10 > IOM H7/L7.
– In Ethernet networking:

▪ If 12 Gbit/s SAS interface modules are configured:

i. When the storage system is equipped with two controllers, the
recommended slot sequence for installing front-end interface
modules is as follows: IOM H0/L0 > IOM H1/L1 > IOM H2/L2 > IOM
H4/L4 > IOM H3/L3.
ii. When the storage system is equipped with four controllers, the
recommended slot sequence for installing front-end interface
modules is as follows: IOM H0/L0 > IOM H13/L13 > IOM H1/L1 >
IOM H12/L12 > IOM H2/L2 > IOM H11/L11 > IOM H4/L4 > IOM
H9/L9 > IOM H3/L3 > IOM H10/L10.

▪ If BE 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface modules are configured:

i. When the storage system is equipped with two controllers, the
recommended slot sequence for installing front-end interface
modules is as follows: IOM H0/L0 > IOM H1/L1 > IOM H2/L2 > IOM
H4/L4 > IOM H5/L5 > IOM H3/L3.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

ii. When the storage system is equipped with four controllers, the
recommended slot sequence for installing front-end interface
modules is as follows: IOM H0/L0 > IOM H13/L13 > IOM H1/L1 >
IOM H12/L12 > IOM H2/L2 > IOM H11/L11 > IOM H4/L4 > IOM
H9/L9 > IOM H5/L5 > IOM H8/L8 > IOM H3/L3 > IOM H10/L10 >
IOM H7/L7.
● Interface modules of the same type must be inserted in sequence.
● Insert the interface modules used for Ethernet networking in ascending order
of their port rates. Then insert the interface modules used for Fibre Channel
networking in ascending order of their port rates.
● The front-end port connections are symmetric between slots H0 to H13 and
slots L0 to L13 on the same storage system. That is, the interface modules
reside in slots with the same slot ID and use the ports in the same positions.
● In the Ethernet port bonding scenario, the member bond ports are symmetric
between slots H0 to H13 and slots L0 to L13 on the same storage system.
That is, the interface modules reside in slots with the same slot ID and use
the ports in the same positions.

NOTICE

For the GE electrical interface module:

● If the rate of a GE electrical port is set to 1000 Mbit/s, the GE electrical port
supports only the full-duplex mode.
● If GE electrical ports on a GE electrical interface module or network ports on
an application server (or a switch) are not in autonegotiation mode, you must
use crossover cables to connect the controller enclosure to the application
server (or switch). Otherwise, the controller enclosure may fail to
communicate with the application server (or switch).
● A GE electrical port uses a CAT5 network cable or CAT6A shielded network
cable.

Connection Plans
A storage system can be connected to an application server directly or through
two switches.

NOTE

Other connection modes between storage systems and application servers include single-
switch connection, dual-switch connection in a cluster environment, and dual-switch
connection in a HyperMetro cluster environment. For details, see "Typical UltraPath
Applications" in the OceanStor UltraPath User Guide.
● Direct connection (single controller enclosure)
– iSCSI network
i. When the controller enclosure has two controllers, the application
server is directly connected to the storage system through two paths.
UltraPath automatically calculates and selects the optimal path for
data transmission based on the operating status of the storage
system. Figure 3-73, Figure 3-74, and Figure 3-75 show the
connection diagrams.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTE

If a controller enclosure is configured with two controllers, interface

modules can be installed only in slots in quadrants A and B.

Figure 3-73 Direct connection diagram (two controllers)

Application server
UltraPath
Network Network
card 0 card 1
P0 P0

P0 P0
Quadrant A Quadrant B

Figure 3-74 Directly connecting the storage device (two controllers)

and the application server over GE electrical ports

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-75 Directly connecting the storage device (two controllers)

and the application server over ETH ports

ii. When the controller enclosure has four controllers, the application
server is directly connected to the storage system through four paths.
UltraPath automatically calculates and selects the optimal path for
data transmission based on the operating status of the storage
system. Figure 3-76, Figure 3-77, and Figure 3-78 show the
connection diagrams.

Figure 3-76 Direct connection diagram (four controllers)

Application server
UltraPath
Network Network
card 0 card 1
P0 P1 P0 P1

P0 P0 P0 P0
Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant C Quadrant D

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-77 Directly connecting the storage device (four controllers)

and the application server over GE electrical ports

Figure 3-78 Directly connecting the storage device (four controllers)

and the application server over ETH ports

– Fibre Channel network

It is recommended that you connect the application server to the storage
system through four paths, no matter whether the controller enclosure
has two or four controllers. UltraPath automatically calculates and selects
the optimal path for data transmission based on the operating status of
the storage system. Figure 3-79 and Figure 3-80 show the connection
diagrams.
NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose to connect the storage system and the application
server through two paths. You only need to configure two interface modules in
the same slots of the H and L planes, respectively.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-79 Direct connection diagram

Application server
UltraPath

HBA 0 HBA 1
P0 P1 P0 P1

P0 P0 P0 P0
Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant C Quadrant D

Figure 3-80 Directly connecting the storage device and the application
server over Fibre Channel ports

● Dual-switch connection (single controller enclosure)

In this mode, two switches are added to the direct connections. Each
controller is connected to each switch.
The switches increase the number of ports to allow more access paths.
Moreover, the switches extend the transmission distance by connecting
remote application servers to the storage system. The two switches are
redundant of each other to prevent single point of failure and improve the
forwarding capability.
NOTE

When setting up connections through switches, note the following:

● If Ethernet switches are used, plan the network segment of the switches in
advance and assign ports to each network segment.
● If Fibre Channel switches are used, plan switch zones in advance and assign ports
to each zone.
● The first and last ports on a switch are typically used to connect to other switches.
– iSCSI network
i. When the controller enclosure has two controllers, connect the
storage system to each switch through two paths, as shown in
Figure 3-81, Figure 3-82, and Figure 3-83.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTE

If a controller enclosure is configured with two controllers, interface

modules can be installed only in slots in quadrants A and B.

Figure 3-81 Dual-switch connection diagram (two controllers)

Application server
UltraPath
Network card Network card
0 1
P0 P0

Switch 1 Switch 2

P0 P1 P0 P1
Quadrant A Quadrant B

Figure 3-82 Connecting the storage device (two controllers) and the
application server over GE electrical ports through switches

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-83 Connecting the storage device (two controllers) and the
application server over ETH ports through switches

ii. When the controller enclosure has four controllers, connect the
storage system to each switch through four paths, as shown in
Figure 3-84, Figure 3-85, and Figure 3-86.

Figure 3-84 Dual-switch connection diagram (four controllers)

Application server
UltraPath
Network card Network card
0 1
P0 P0

Switch 1 Switch 2

P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1
Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant C Quadrant D

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-85 Connecting the storage device (four controllers) and the
application server over GE electrical ports through switches

Figure 3-86 Connecting the storage device (four controllers) and the
application server over ETH ports through switches

– Fibre Channel network

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

It is recommended that you connect the storage system to each switch

through four paths, no matter whether the controller enclosure has two
or four controllers. Figure 3-87 and Figure 3-88 show the connection
diagrams.
NOTE

Alternatively, you can choose to connect the storage system and each switch
through two paths. You only need to configure two interface modules in the
same slots of the H and L planes, respectively.

Figure 3-87 Dual-switch connection diagram

Application server
UltraPath

HBA 0 HBA 1
P0 P0

Switch 1 Switch 2

P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1
Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant C Quadrant D

Figure 3-88 Connecting the storage device and the application server
over Fibre Channel ports through switches

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-13 provides an example of zone planning for a Fibre Channel

network.

Table 3-13 Zone configuration example

Zone Name Application Storage Switch
Server System

Zone 1 HBA 0, P0 Quadrant A, P0 Switch 1

Zone 2 HBA 0, P0 Quadrant B, P0 Switch 1

Zone 3 HBA 0, P0 Quadrant C, P0 Switch 1

Zone 4 HBA 0, P0 Quadrant D, P0 Switch 1

Zone 5 HBA 1, P0 Quadrant A, P1 Switch 2

Zone 6 HBA 1, P0 Quadrant B, P1 Switch 2

Zone 7 HBA 1, P0 Quadrant C, P1 Switch 2

Zone 8 HBA 1, P0 Quadrant D, P1 Switch 2

● Dual-switch connection (multiple controller enclosures)

When the storage system has two controller enclosures, ensure that front-end
interface modules on every enclosure are all connected to the application
server. The connection between each controller enclosure and the application
server is the same as that when a single controller enclosure is deployed, as
shown in Figure 3-89, Figure 3-90, and Figure 3-91.

Figure 3-89 Dual-switch connection diagram (two controllers on an iSCSI

network)
Application server
UltraPath
Network card Network card
0 1
P0 P0

Switch 1 Switch 2

P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1
Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant A Quadrant B
Controller enclosure 0 Controller enclosure 1

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Figure 3-90 Dual-switch connection diagram (four controllers on an iSCSI

network)
Application server
UltraPath
Network card Network card
0 1
P0 P0

Switch 1 Switch 2

P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1
Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant C Quadrant D Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant C Quadrant D
Controller enclosure 0 Controller enclosure 1

Figure 3-91 Dual-switch connection diagram (Fibre Channel network)

Application server
UltraPath

HBA 0 HBA 1
P0 P0

Switch 1 Switch 2

P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1 P0 P1
Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant C Quadrant D Quadrant A Quadrant B Quadrant C Quadrant D
Controller enclosure 0 Controller enclosure 1

NOTE

On Fibre Channel networks, you can choose to connect the storage system and each
switch through two paths. You only need to configure two interface modules in the
same slots of the H and L planes on each controller enclosure, respectively.
Table 3-14 provides an example of zone planning for a Fibre Channel
network.

Table 3-14 Zone configuration example

Zone Name Application Storage System Switch

Server

Zone 1 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 1

0, quadrant A, P0

Zone 2 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 1

0, quadrant B, P0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Zone Name Application Storage System Switch

Server

Zone 3 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 1

0, quadrant C, P0

Zone 4 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 1

0, quadrant D, P0

Zone 5 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 2

0, quadrant A, P1

Zone 6 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 2

0, quadrant B, P1

Zone 7 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 2

0, quadrant C, P1

Zone 8 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 2

0, quadrant D, P1

Zone 9 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 1

1, quadrant A, P0

Zone 10 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 1

1, quadrant B, P0

Zone 11 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 1

1, quadrant C, P0

Zone 12 HBA 0, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 1

1, quadrant D, P0

Zone 13 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 2

1, quadrant A, P1

Zone 14 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 2

1, quadrant B, P1

Zone 15 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 2

1, quadrant C, P1

Zone 16 HBA 1, P0 Controller enclosure Switch 2

1, quadrant D, P1

Follow-up Procedure
After planning ports, you must formulate port correlation tables for connections
between the application server and switch ports, and for connections between the
storage system and switch ports. Table 3-15 shows port correlation between the
application server and switches, and Table 3-16 shows port correlation between
the storage system and switches.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-15 Port correlation between the application server and switches

Port Number Application Switch Port Port Number

Server Port

0 Server_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 0

Y stands for the port number.

Table 3-16 Port correlation between the storage system and switches

Port Number Storage System Switch Port Port Number

Port

1 Storage_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 1

Y stands for the port number.

3.1.2.6 (Optional) Active-Active Network Planning

HyperMetro is Huawei active-active storage feature. Two data centers (DCs) of
HyperMetro serve as a backup for each other and both DCs are running. For
details about HyperMetro introduction, planning, installation, and configuration,
see the HyperMetro Feature Guide for Block or HyperMetro Feature Guide for File
specific to your product model. If HyperMetro is not involved, skip this section.

3.1.3 Other Planning Items

Plan the power distribution, network allocation, user management schemes, and
compatibility solutions relevant to the storage devices.

3.1.3.1 Power Distribution Planning

Before installing devices, work out a power distribution plan for the optimal
security, stability, and reliability of devices.

Power Distribution Principles

Table 3-17 lists the power distribution principles that storage devices must comply
with.

Table 3-17 Power distribution principles

Scenario Principle

Equipment 1. A cabinet must have a backup power supply.

room
2. The input voltages to a cabinet must be the same.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Scenario Principle

3. The power distribution unit (PDU) of a cabinet supports two

independent power supplies. Therefore, the failure of one
power supply does not affect the other power supply.

4. The rated load traffic of the power cables meets

requirements of the maximum operating power of the cabinets
and devices. The circuit breakers and power cables match
design requirements.

5. The power input terminals of a cabinet must be convenient,

safe, and reliable for connections.

Power 1. Power input lines of a device of which power input is

distribution redundant must connect to different branches of the power
inside a supply.
cabinet
2. The devices in a cabinet must be effectively protected
against overcurrent and short circuit.

3. The power distribution of a cabinet must support online

maintenance of devices (excluding the devices that require
device-level backup and auxiliary devices that do not affect the
services in the cabinet).

4. A PDU must be configured in a cabinet. Connect the

external power supplies to the PDU so that the PDU supplies
power to the devices in the cabinet.

5. Devices in a cabinet should obtain power from the PDU of

the cabinet rather than from another cabinet.

6. The actuator directions of the circuit breakers in a PDU must

be the same. If the actuator direction is vertical, moving the
actuator upward connects to the power supply while moving
the actuator downward disconnects from the power supply. If
the actuator direction is horizontal, moving the actuator to the
left disconnects from the power supply while moving the
actuator to the right connects to the power supply.

7. The power cables and signal cables should be separately

routed in a cabinet. The distance between these two kinds of
cables should be greater than 3 cm.

8. Each circuit breaker in the PDU can only connect one load.

9. The power of the devices in a cabinet corresponds to the

rated current of the protection components. The devices and
enclosures of the same model can obtain power from the
protection components with the same rated current.

10. If a circuit breaker that needs onsite cable connection is

vertically installed, feed cables from the top to the bottom of
the circuit breaker.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

3.1.3.2 IP Address and Network Parameter Planning

Before installing a storage system, network administrators must plan IP addresses
and network parameters for the storage system.

Planning of IP Addresses and Network Parameters

Table 3-18 and Table 3-19 describe the default configuration information of the
device management network ports. You can log in to the DeviceManager client to
perform initial device configuration.

Table 3-18 Default IP addresses and subnet masks of the management network
ports on a 2 U controller enclosure
IP Address Subnet Mask

Controller A: 192.168.128.101 255.255.0.0

Controller B: 192.168.128.102 255.255.0.0

Table 3-19 Default IP addresses and subnet masks of the management network
ports on a 4 U controller enclosure
IP Address Subnet Mask

Management module 0: 192.168.128.101 255.255.0.0

Management module 1: 192.168.128.102 255.255.0.0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTE

● IP addresses are allocated to management network ports through BMC arbitration.

Controllers obtain IP addresses from the BMC.
● If a 4 U controller enclosure is configured with four controllers, only two of them will
obtain an IP address. The two IP addresses are allocated to the management network
ports on management modules 0 and 1.
● Management network ports use IPv4 addresses by default. If you want to use IPv6
addresses instead, log in to management network ports and complete required settings.
● Do not configure the IPv4 addresses of the management network ports within the same
network segment as the internal heartbeat IP addresses. For a storage system with dual
controllers, the default internal heartbeat IP addresses are 127.127.127.10 and
127.127.127.11. For a storage system with four controllers, the default internal
heartbeat IP addresses are 127.127.127.10, 127.127.127.11, 127.127.127.12, and
127.127.127.13. Internal heartbeat links are established between controllers for these
controllers to detect each other's working status. You do not need to separately connect
cables. In addition, internal heartbeat IP addresses are configured before delivery, and
cannot be modified.
● When the storage system is configured with a key management server, you need to plan
cluster IP addresses for the key management server to ensure the network connectivity
between the key management server clusters.
● The key management server supports only the IPv4 address. To ensure normal
communication between the storage system and the key management server, ensure
that IPv4 addresses are used for both the storage system and the key management
server.

Before initial configuration of the storage system, plan and take note of the IP
addresses and network parameters for the storage system.
Table 3-20, Table 3-21, Table 3-22, and Table 3-23 list the IP addresses of
management network ports.

Table 3-20 IPv4 address configuration for the 2 U controller enclosure

IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Gateway

Controller A:_________________ _________________ _________________

Controller B:_________________ _________________ _________________

Table 3-21 IPv6 address configuration for the 2 U controller enclosure

IPv6 Address Prefix Gateway

Controller A:_________________ _________________ _________________

Controller B:_________________ _________________ _________________

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-22 IPv4 address configuration for the 4 U controller enclosure

IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Gateway

Management module _________________ _________________

0:________________

Management module _________________ _________________

1:________________

Table 3-23 IPv6 address configuration for the 4 U controller enclosure

IPv6 Address Prefix Gateway

Management module _________________ _________________

0:________________

Management module _________________ _________________

1:________________

NOTE

You need to plan IP addresses and network parameters for the storage system each time
when:
● A controller is added to a 2 U controller enclosure.
● Two controllers are added to a 4 U controller enclosure.

Table 3-24 and Table 3-25 list the alarm policy parameters.

Table 3-24 Email notification configuration

Parameter Value

Sender's email address _________________

IP address of the SMTPa server (IPv4 _________________

or IPv6)

User name for logging in to the SMTP _________________

server

Login password _________________

Recipient's email address _________________

a: SMTP is short for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-25 Phone number of the SMS service center

Parameter Value

SMSa Service Center Number _________________

a: SMS is short for Short Messaging Service.

3.1.3.3 User Account Planning

Plan management accounts with different operation and maintenance permissions
and configure passwords in compliance with password policies to ensure security.
For details about the accounts, see the OceanStor V500R007 Account List. If you
have deployed an external key management server and want to change its
management account and password, refer to its user guide for details or contact
technical support engineers of its vendor.

3.1.3.4 Compatibility Solution Planning

Before installing a storage device, plan a compatibility solution to ensure that the
storage device can be smoothly installed and configured.
Before installing a storage device, correctly plan compatibility information,
including server models, operating systems, HBA models and quantity,
multipathing versions, switch models and versions, cluster software, and backup
software. You can use Huawei Storage Interoperability Navigator to query
detailed compatibility information.

3.2 Preparing for Installation

Installation preparations include preparing auxiliary materials, checking the
installation environment, as well as unpacking and checking devices. Sufficient
preparations ensure a safe and proper installation process.

3.2.1 Checking Installation Tools and Auxiliary Materials

Before installing the storage system, ensure that necessary installation support
materials including auxiliary tools, software, meters, and documents are available.

Installation Tools
Common tools include screwdrivers, diagonal pliers, ESD clothing, gloves, and
wrist straps. For details, see Table 7-1.

Installation Meters
Table 3-26 lists the required installation meters.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-26 Meters

Name Appearance Function

Multimeter Measures the

insulation of a bay,
connection of a cable,
and electric
performance
specifications of a
device, such as
voltage, current, and
resistance.

Software Tools
Table 3-27 lists the required software tools.

Table 3-27 Software tools

Software Function How to Obtain

SSH tool Enables login to a This document uses PuTTY as an

storage system and example. You can download PuTTY
transfers files from the chiark website. To ensure
between the successful login to the storage system,
maintenance you are advised to use PuTTY of the
terminal and the latest version.
storage system.

SmartKit Implements Log in to https://

expansion of support.huawei.com/enterprise (for
controllers and site enterprise users) or https://
survey. support.huawei.com (for carrier
users), search for SmartKit, and
download the software and documents
of the mapping version.

Technical Documentation
The documents that must be prepared before installation are as follows:
● Contract, device configuration table, equipment room design, and
construction drawing paper (provided by the customer)
● Table 3-28 lists the required product documents specific to your product
models.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Table 3-28 Product documents

Document Name Description

Product Description Helps you understand the hardware structure,

product specifications, and installation
environment requirements in the installation
preparation phase.

Security Configuration Guide Guides you to configure security policies in the

configuration phase.

Administrator Guide Guides you to configure access permissions in

the configuration phase.

Encryption User Guide Guides you to configure key management

servers in the configuration phase.

3.2.2 Checking the Installation Environment

Check the device installation environment to ensure minimal interference during
the operation of storage devices.

Quick Installation Environment Check

To ensure correct and smooth device installation, check that the installation
environment meets the requirements.
Before you get started, ensure that the installation environment meets the
requirements listed in 7.5 Installation Environment Checklist.
In addition, make sure that the following special requirements, if any, are met:
● Doors, passageways, and elevators are of adequate dimensions to allow
passage of cabinets.
● The qualification certificate of the installation company has been submitted
to the property management entity in charge of the installation site.
● The delivery time and installation time, for example, from 8:00 a.m. to 6:00
p.m, have been confirmed.

NOTICE

● Avoid bumping into doors, walls, or shelves during transportation, relocation, or

installation of storage devices.
● Do not touch the components or uncoated metal surface of any unit with dirty
gloves.

Environmental Requirements
Environmental requirements cover the following aspects: temperature, humidity,
altitude, vibration and shock, particle contaminants, corrosive airborne

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

contaminants, heat dissipation, and noise. For details, see "Environmental

Requirements" in the Product Description specific to your product model.

Power Requirements
Guidelines for configuring power supplies for the storage system are as follows:

● Huawei technical support engineers discuss with customers about how to

verify redundancy in bays' AC power supplies. If no redundant power supply
exists, data may be unavailable or lost.
● Before connecting power supplies to the OceanStor storage system, customers
must configure power supplies for the data center.
● The equipment room is equipped with a standby generator.
● In AC scenarios, each power distribution unit (PDU) in the bay is connected to
an independent external power supply. In a scenario where two PDUs exist,
two power supplies are required.
● At least one of the two power input lines is connected to an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS).
● The power cables and connectors connected to the bays must be installed and
deployed by professional personnel to ensure that the power system passes
the tests and conforms to local electrical safety specifications.
● Customers' electrical engineers or facility representatives must verify that the
voltages of the bays meet the voltage requirements of the OceanStor storage
system.

Fire Fighting
To secure an equipment room, ensure that the equipment room have a powerful
fire fighting system.

A fire fighting system should be prepared by the customer. The customer must
consult the insurance underwriter, local fire marshal, and building inspectors to
select a fire fighting system of a correct level of coverage and protection.

Because a fire fighting system must comply with local laws and regulations that
vary with countries and regions, Huawei does not participate in the design and
deployment of the customer's fire fighting system. Therefore, Huawei shares no
responsibility for device damage and personal injuries caused by a fire fighting
system failure.

3.2.3 Unpacking and Checking Devices

When required goods arrived at the site, the project supervisor and the customer
representative need to unpack and check them together to ensure that the goods
are intact and their quantity is correct.

Prerequisites
● The goods have been delivered to the site.
● The project supervisor and customer representative are present at the site.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

Context
1. The bag containing the Packing List is attached to the surface of the carton.
2. After receiving the goods, unpack and inspect them according to the Packing
List.
– If short shipment of goods is stated on the Packing List, contact order
management engineers of Huawei local office for solutions. The project
supervisor and customer representative sign the Packing List.
– If short, wrong, or excessive shipment of goods is found or goods are
damaged, the project supervisor and the customer representative sign the
Memo for Unpacking and Inspecting Goods and Packing List. The project
supervisor fills out the Goods Feedback Form, submits it to the local
Huawei local office within three days, and stores the problematic goods
(including all the internal and external packages) for further
investigation.
– After confirming that the goods are intact and complete, the project
supervisor and the customer representative sign the Packing List.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the appearance and number of packages.
NOTE

Before unpacking goods, take out the Packing List from its bag and check the goods
according to the list.

After a project is started, the project supervisor should work with the customer
representative to check and accept the goods. Table 3-29 lists the check items.

Table 3-29 Checklist for unpacking goods

No. Check Item

1 Check the appearance of the packages for damage and soak.

2 Check whether the destination place is correct.

3 Check whether the number of packages is correct.

Step 2 Take appropriate actions according to the check results.

● If the number of packages is correct and cartons are in good conditions, go to
Step 3.
● If the number of packages is incorrect or any carton is seriously damaged or
soaked, stop unpacking, find out the cause, and report the situation to
Huawei local office.

Step 3 Remove the packing materials.

Following the standard operation procedure helps avoid device damage.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 3 Installation Planning and Preparation

NOTICE

● Be careful not to bump into doors, walls, or shelves during transportation,

relocation, or installation of storage devices.
● Do not touch the components or uncoated metal surface of any unit with dirty
gloves.
● Clear the foam and cushion boards from the installation site to prevent
damage to signal cables and circuit boards.
● Wear ESD gloves when removing ESD bags or touching devices.
● If devices are soaked or rusted, stop unpacking the devices immediately, find
causes, and report to the local office.

For details about the standard operation procedure, see the unpacking diagram
printed on the carton.
Step 4 Using the information on the Order List and Packing List, inspect all components
in each package.
Step 5 Check the packages of components for obvious damage.
Step 6 Unpack components and check each component for any loss or damage.
● Appearance: tidy without scratches, loose part, or damage
● Silkscreen: clear and intact
● Connector: securely connected
● Quantity: consistent with that specified in the Packing List
NOTE

If any component is lost or damaged, notify the local office immediately.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

4 Hardware Installation

Follow the correct sequence for deploying hardware:

1. Install storage devices.
2. Connect cables.
3. Check the installation.
4. Power on the storage devices.
5. Install front panels.
4.1 Installation Process
4.2 Installing Storage Devices
4.3 Connecting Cables
4.4 Checking Hardware Installation
4.5 Powering On the Storage System
4.6 Installing Filler Panels

4.1 Installation Process

Before installing a storage system, understand the installation process. The
installation process helps ensure smooth installation of the storage system.
Figure 4-1 shows the installation process.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-1 Installation process

Start

Prepare for installation

Dual controllers Multiple controllers

(Optional)
Dual or multiple
controllers?

Install storage devices Install storage devices

Connect cables Connect cables

Check the installation Check the installation

Power on storage devices Power on storage devices

Install filler panels Install filler panels

Deploy multi-controller
storage system

Deploy applications

Build the remote

maintenance environment

Install and configure the key

management server

Install application server

software

Using SmartKit for

Deployment Inspection

Mandatory
End
Optional

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

4.2 Installing Storage Devices

The cabinet where a storage device is to be installed must meet specific
requirements. Before installing the storage device, ensure that the cabinet has
sufficient space. For details, see 3.1.2.1 Cabinet Planning.
Table 4-1 lists the recommended cabinet depths for different storage devices.

Table 4-1 Recommended cabinet depths

Device Cabinet depth

2 U controller enclosure (25 disk slots)a 1000 mm

2 U controller enclosure (12 disk slots)a 1000 mm

2 U controller enclosure (25 disk slots)b 1200 mm

2 U controller enclosure (12 disk slots)b 1200 mm

4 U controller enclosure 1200 mm

Smart NVMe disk enclosure (36 disk 1000 mm

slots)

Smart SAS disk enclosure (25 disk slots) 1000 mm

Smart SAS disk enclosure (12 disk slots) 1000 mm

2 U SAS disk enclosure (25 disk slots) 1000 mm

4 U SAS disk enclosure 1000 mm

High-density disk enclosure 1100 mm

a: Applicable to OceanStor 2200 V5, 2600 V5, 5300 V5, and 5300F V5
b: Applicable to OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and
5800F V5

NOTE

If the device is to be installed in a third-party cabinet provided by the customer, check the
third-party cabinet to ensure that it meets the installation requirements. For details, see 7.6
Checking a Third-Party Cabinet.

4.2.1 Accessing the Hardware Installation Multimedia

The hardware installation multimedia presents to you the installation procedure in
a vivid way. To access the installation multimedia, perform the following steps:
1. Log in to https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/en/index.html.
2. Choose Technical Support > Product Support > Enterprise Data Center >
Centralized Storage.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

3. Click the desired product model.

4. Click the Video tab, and then select Installation & Upgrade in Scenario.

Figure 4-2 Viewing installation and upgrade videos

5. Select the hardware installation multimedia, and click the desired operation
video in the navigation tree.

Figure 4-3 Selecting an operation video

4.2.2 (Optional) Installing Cabinets

Skip this operation procedure if your cabinet has already been installed. A cabinet
must be available before you install devices into it.

NOTE

If you are installing a device in a third-party cabinet, check the cabinet first to ensure that it
meets the conditions for installing devices. For details, see 7.6 Checking a Third-Party
Cabinet.

4.2.2.1 Installing an FR42612L Cabinet

Install cabinets in non-securing mode, including positioning, laying out, securing,
leveling, and combining cabinets. The installation is the same as that on a
concrete floor or ESD floor.

NOTE

For details about the FR42612L cabinet, see 7.4 Introduction to an FR42612L Cabinet in
the Appendix.

Prerequisites
The following required tools have been prepared:

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

● Multimeter
● Flat-head screwdriver, Phillips screwdriver, and adjustable wrench
● Measuring tape, marker, powder marker, level, right angle, protective gloves
● Ladder
● M6 screw
● Floating nut mounting bar
Meters and instruments must be tested and adjusted before use.

Procedure
Step 1 Before installing a cabinet, check the installation environment and materials.
1. Check whether the device types and quantity are the same as those in the
Packing List.
2. Check whether the cabinet appearance is in good condition and free of
collision and scratch.
3. Check whether the area, height, and ground bearing capacity of the
installation position meet related requirements.
Step 2 Draw the cabinet installation outline to determine the installation position.
1. Check the engineering drawings to determine the positions for installing the
cabinet. Align the measuring tape with the upper edge of the installation
position, and mark the upper edge by using a marker.
2. Use the powder marker to outline the positions for installing the cabinet.
Figure 4-4 shows the outline of the positions for installing a single cabinet.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-4 Outline for installing a single cabinet

Figure 4-5 shows the outline of the positions for installing combined cabinets.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-5 Outline for installing combined cabinets

Step 3 Roll a cabinet on its castors to the installation position.

1. Roll the cabinet to the outlined installation position.
2. Use a right angle to compare the cabinet outer edges with the installation
position outline on the ground, and ensure that the outer edges align with
the outline.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-6 Placing a cabinet

NOTE

When using a right angle to determine the cabinet position, ensure that the left or right
side of the cabinet and the outer edge of the rear door are aligned with the outline on the
floor.

Step 4 Secure a cabinet to the floor at its leveling feet.

1. Open the front and rear doors. See (1) in Figure 4-7.
2. Loosen the four leveling feet clockwise by using a Phillips screwdriver. See (2)
in Figure 4-7.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

3. Rotate the M12 bolts at the bottom of the leveling feet clockwise by using an
adjustable wrench to ensure that the leveling feet contact the ground and the
castors hang in the air. See (3) in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Securing a cabinet

NOTE

– Spin the castors by using a Phillips screwdriver. If the castors rotate freely, they are
hanging in the air.
– H indicates the height from the top of the cabinet to the ground. The value of H
ranges from 1995 mm to 2005 mm and can be changed by adjusting the support
feet.
4. Make sure that the heights measured from the front, rear, right, and left of
the cabinet are the same.
Step 5 Adjust the levelness and verticality of a cabinet by raising or lowering its leveling
feet.
1. Use a level and plumb line to check the levelness and verticality respectively.
2. If the cabinet is not level, use an adjustable wrench to adjust the support feet.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-8 Leveling a cabinet

NOTE

● Check the levelness in the front of the cabinet and at the rear of the cabinet.
● To check the levelness, lay a level. If the bubbles are in the middle of the level when
they are static, the position you want to check is level.

Step 6 (Optional) After securing and leveling two or more adjacent cabinets, combine the
cabinets.
1. Remove the screws from the connection plates on the front and rear doors
using a Phillips screwdriver. See (1) in Figure 4-9.
NOTE

– The cabinet in the middle provides four connection points on the front and rear
doors respectively.
– A cabinet on the leftmost or rightmost side provides two connection points on the
front and rear doors respectively.
– Ensure that the vertical deviation and the distance between cabinets are not
greater than 3 mm after the cabinets are combined.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

2. Pass the connection plate through the gap on the cabinet door and secure it
using the removed screws. See (2) in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9 Combining adjacent cabinets

3. Check the combined cabinets. See (3) in Figure 4-9.

Step 7 Install a PDU.
A power distribution unit (PDU) provides power for components in a cabinet.
Install the PDU vertically on the PDU installation plate on both sides at the back
of the cabinet.
1. Fit the upper and lower round tabs on the PDU rear panel into pear-shaped
holes on the PDU installation plate and push them downwards to lock the
PDU.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-10 Installing a PDU

NOTE

To ensure that PDU tabs can be easily oriented to the installation holes, two persons
are recommended for this operation.

2. Use the Phillips screwdriver and M6 screws to fix the PDU.

3. Repeat Step 7.1 and Step 7.2 to install the PDU on the other side of the
cabinet.
Step 8 Install PGND cables and power cables for a cabinet.
For details about how to install the PGND cables and power cables for the
FR42612L cabinet, see 4.2.2.2 Installing PGND Cables and Power Cables.
Step 9 (Optional) Remove filler panels.
If the planned installation positions in a cabinet are covered with filler panels,
remove them before installation. If the planned installation positions are not
covered with filler panels, skip this step.
1. Use a M6 Phillips screwdriver to remove M6 screws from the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel from the cabinet.
3. Use a floating nut mounting bar to remove floating nuts.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

CAUTION

If a floating nut mounting bar is unavailable, you can remove the floating
nuts by using a flat-head screwdriver. When using a flat-head screwdriver to
remove floating nuts, do not apply excessive force and pay attention not to
injure your hands or damage storage devices.

a. Use the floating nut mounting bar to pull one foot of the floating nut
downward, and then take the floating nut out.

Figure 4-11 Removing a floating nut

b. Repeat Step 9.3.a to remove other floating nuts.

----End

4.2.2.2 Installing PGND Cables and Power Cables

Install PGND cables and power cables to provide power for components in
cabinets.

Prerequisites
● Cabinets have been installed.
● The power switches of output terminals on the power distribution cabinet
(PDC) are set to OFF.
● All circuit breakers on the PDUs are set to OFF.
● Required materials have been prepared, including power cables, PGND cables,
cable ties, wax strings, and PVC insulation tapes.
● Required tools have been prepared, including diagonal pliers, cable cutters,
Phillips screwdrivers, multimeters, and ladders.

Context
A PDU connector is the IEC60309-32A-compliant standard plug and socket, as
shown in Figure 4-12. The connector used to connect to the PDU is a male plug

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

that has been connected to the PDU power cable before delivery. The connector
used to connect to a PDC is a female socket. At the installation site, you need to
connect the AC power cable of the PDC to the female socket and then connect the
male plug to the female socket.

Figure 4-12 PDU connector

Procedure
Step 1 Route PGND cables and power cables.
1. Read the Site Survey Report to determine the layout, routing, and length of
PGND cables and power cables.
NOTE

A cabinet supports both overhead and underfloor cabling. This section uses overhead
cabling as an example to illustrate how to route cables.
2. Use a cable cutter to cut off a piece of cable, and reserve a proper length, as
shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 Cutting a cable

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

3. Attach temporary labels to both ends of the cable for identification.

The content on temporary labels can be either customized or be the same as
that on engineering labels.
4. Route PGND cables and power cables neatly along a cable tray, and keep
them a proper distance from terminals to which they are to be connected.

Step 2 Install terminals for PGND cables and power cables.

NOTE

For details about how to prepare terminals for PGND cables and power cables, see 7.10
Preparing Cables and Connectors.

Step 3 Install PGND cables.

1. On the ground bar of a PDC, use a Phillips screwdriver to remove screws from
ground terminals. Then, fix PGND cables, as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Fixing PGND cables on the ground bar

NOTE

The tightening torque must match with the OT terminal specifications.

2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to unfasten the terminal screw on the top or
bottom of the cabinet mounting bar and fasten the other end of the PGND
cable to the mounting bar.
– In overhead cabling, fasten the other end of the PGND cable to the
ground terminal on the top of the cabinet mounting bar.
– In underfloor cabling, fasten the other end of the PGND cable to the
ground terminal at the bottom of the cabinet mounting bar.

Step 4 Lift the cabinet cover to an angle of approximately 30 degrees and take out the
PDU connectors.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

NOTICE

The recommended number of persons to complete the preceding step is two.

1. Pull the positioning pins on the cover of the rear cabinet door slightly and
push the cabinet cover upwards to an angle of approximately 30 degrees. See
(1) in Figure 4-15.
2. Lead the two PDU connectors out of the two cable outlets on the cabinet
cover. See (2) in Figure 4-15.
3. Restore the cabinet cover.

Figure 4-15 Taking out PDU connectors

Step 5 Connect a power cable to the PDU female socket.

DANGER

The power switch of the PDC for providing power for the cabinet must remain off
to prevent fatal personal injury.

1. Separate the male plug from the female socket. See (1) in Figure 4-16.
2. Unlock the buckle in the middle of the female socket and disassemble the
female socket by spinning it counterclockwise. See (2) in Figure 4-16.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

3. Route the power cable through the PDU female socket and connect a live line
(brown), PGND cable (yellow and green), and neutral wire (blue) respectively

to the L/+ jack, jack, and unidentified jack. Use a Phillips screwdriver to
fasten the screws on the female socket to secure those cables. See (3) in
Figure 4-16.
4. Assemble the two parts of the female socket and insert the male plug to the
female socket. See (4) in Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 Connecting a power cable to the PDU female socket

Step 6 Connect the other end of the power cable to the wiring terminal of the
uninterruptible power system (UPS), AC PDC, or AC distribution box, as shown in
Figure 4-17.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-17 Connecting power cables to a PDC

----End

4.2.3 Determining Installation Positions

Before installing controller enclosures and disk enclosures, determine their
installation positions in a cabinet. This greatly improves installation efficiency.

Prerequisites
The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:

● 2 U/4 U installation template (available in the accessory box)

● Marker

Context
● To facilitate the operation and maintenance of a controller enclosure, you are
advised to install a controller enclosure between the 19th U and the 24th U in
a cabinet. This section uses the recommended installation positions in a 42 U
cabinet as an example. You can plan device installation positions based on
site requirements.
● You are advised to install disk enclosures from the bottom up in descending
order of weight.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Procedure
Step 1 See 3.1.2.2 Cabinet Layout to locate the installation positions of controller
enclosures and disk enclosures in a cabinet.
NOTE

Each three square holes correspond to 1 U height. Each 1 U height is lined out with a scale
mark. If no 1 U scale mark is lined out on the front and rear columns of the cabinet, line
out scale marks to facilitate locating installation positions.

Step 2 Align the bottom of an installation template with the integer U mark on the
mounting bars of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-18, Figure 4-19, and Figure
4-20.

Figure 4-18 Determining the installation positions of a 4 U disk enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-19 Determining the installation positions of a 4 U controller enclosure

Figure 4-20 Determining the installation positions of a 2 U device

Step 3 Use a marker to mark the positions of the screw holes where devices will be
fastened on the mounting bars. Then, you have finished locating the installation
positions of the controller enclosure and disk enclosures.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

4.2.4 Installing Controller Enclosures and Standard Disk

Enclosures
This section describes how to slide and secure controller enclosures and standard
(non-high density) disk enclosures into cabinets, and then check the installation.
You are advised to deploy a cable tray for each 4 U controller enclosure.

4.2.4.1 (Optional) Installing U-shaped Brackets and Adjustable Guide Rails

Adjustable guide rails are used to support storage devices in the cabinets of
varying depths. If adjustable guide rails have been installed in the cabinet before
delivery and U-shaped brackets are not needed, skip this section.

NOTE

● By default, adjustable guide rails are not included in the accessories of a storage device
to be installed in a third-party cabinet. You must purchase them separately when
placing POs if needed.
● If U-shaped brackets are required, install them with adjustable guide rails together.
There are three types of U-shaped brackets (25 mm, 50 mm, and 75 mm), and a pair of
each type is provided in the auxiliary material package. You do not need to purchase
them separately. Use the measuring scale in the auxiliary material package to determine
the type of U-shaped bracket for your storage device. Follow the instructions on the
measuring scale. For more information about the U-shaped brackets, see U-shaped
brackets.

Prerequisites
● The installation positions of enclosures in the cabinet have been determined.
● The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
– Phillips screwdriver (M3 to M6)
– Marker
– M6 screws
– Square-hole positioning pins (for square-hole mounting bars)
– Round-hole positioning pins (for round-hole mounting bars)
– U-shaped brackets

Precautions

CAUTION

● Storage devices must be installed on adjustable guide rails. Stacking devices

may damage devices.
● The guide rails must be installed horizontally.

NOTE

Before performing the installation, you are advised to count several U scales upward from
the position of the first scale at the bottom of the mounting bar, and then mark the
position. This can ensure that the front and rear heights of the adjustable guide rails are
the same.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Context
● You are advised to install storage devices in a cabinet from the bottom up.
● A pair of adjustable guide rails is included with each storage device.
● The length of the adjustable guide rail ranges from 600 mm to 900 mm.
● The square-hole positioning pins come installed on the adjustable guide rails
before delivery. If the installation holes of the screws are round, change the
square-hole positioning pins to round-hole positioning pins before installing
the adjustable guide rails.
NOTE

You can find round-hole positioning pins in the accessory bag delivered with the devices.

The following is a recommended method for installing adjustable guide rails

(using square-hole positioning pins as an example).

Procedure (Without U-shaped Brackets)

Step 1 On the front of the cabinet, align the bottom margin of the adjustable guide rail
with an integer U scale mark on the mounting bar, and fully insert the front
positioning pin into the square hole.
Step 2 Stretch the adjustable guide rail and thread the positioning pins through the rear
square holes on the mounting bar.
Step 3 Secure the adjustable guide rails with M6 screws.

NOTICE

When securing an adjustable guide rail, attach M6 screws to the specified

positions at the front side of the rail, as shown in Figure 4-21, Figure 4-22, and
Figure 4-23. Using extra M6 screws or attaching the screw to other positions will
cause collision with the device, resulting in device damage.

● Secure the adjustable guide rails for a 4 U disk enclosure with M6 screws.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-21 Attaching the adjustable guide rails for a 4 U disk enclosure

● Secure the adjustable guide rails for a 4 U controller enclosure with M6

screws.

Figure 4-22 Attaching the adjustable guide rails for a 4 U controller enclosure

● Secure the adjustable guide rails for a 2 U storage device with M6 screws.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-23 Attaching the adjustable guide rails for a 2 U device

----End

Procedure (with U-shaped Brackets)

Step 1 On the front of the cabinet, align the bottom margin of the adjustable guide rail
with an integer U scale mark on the mounting bar, and fully insert the front
positioning pin into the square hole.
Step 2 Stretch the adjustable guide rail and thread the positioning pins through the rear
square holes on the mounting bar.
Step 3 Align the U-shaped brackets with the adjustable guide rails, and then use M6
screws to secure the U-shaped brackets and the adjustable guide rails, as shown in
Figure 4-24.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-24 Securing the U-shaped brackets and adjustable guide rails

Step 4 (Optional) Install floating nuts on the U-shaped brackets.

NOTE

Floating nuts have been installed on U-shaped brackets before delivery. If no floating nuts
have been installed, install a floating nut into the third hole on each U-shaped bracket.

Insert and clamp one foot of the floating nut into the square hole. Pull the other
foot of the floating nut by using the floating nut mounting bar to clamp it in the
square hole.

Figure 4-25 Installing a floating nut

CAUTION

If no floating nut mounting bar is available, a flat-head screwdriver can be used

instead. When using a flat-head screwdriver to install floating nuts, do not exert
excessive force to prevent personal injury or damage to storage devices.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Follow-up Procedure
● After the U-shaped brackets are fixed to the front mounting bar and the
floating nuts are installed, install the storage device onto the U-shaped
brackets, as shown in Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-26 U-shaped bracket and adjustable guide rail

Figure 4-27 Securing the storage device onto the U-shaped bracket

● U-shaped brackets can be stacked. When stacking the U-shaped brackets,

comply with the following rules:
– Stack two U-shaped brackets at most on each side.
– Install the wide U-shaped bracket onto the adjustable guide rail and
stack the other on it.
– Install floating nuts in the first and fifth holes to connect two U-shaped
brackets.
Figure 4-28 shows how to stack two U-shaped brackets.

Figure 4-28 Stacking two U-shaped brackets on the adjustable guide rail

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

4.2.4.2 Installing Enclosures

This section describes how to slide and secure controller enclosures and disk
enclosures into cabinets, and then check the installation. If disks and interface
modules have not been installed in the storage devices, install them in the correct
slots after checking the installation.

Prerequisites
● Guide rails have been properly installed.
● The following installation tools and materials are ready:
– Phillips screwdriver (M3 to M6)
– ESD gloves
– ESD clothes
– ESD wrist strap

Precautions
● To avoid personal injury or device damage, arrange for three persons to carry
and install a 2 U enclosure and four persons for a 4 U enclosure.
● If you remove disks and interface modules to facilitate the movement and
installation of the device, record the mapping between each disk (or interface
module) and it slot in advance, so you can easily insert each disk or interface
module back to its correct slot.
● Storage devices must be installed on adjustable guide rails. Stacking devices
may damage them.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, and ESD clothes.

Step 2 Remove the protective cover of the controller enclosure.

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the M3 screws on the left of the
protective cover for the controller enclosure, as shown in Figure 4-29 and
Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-29 Removing four M3 screws from a 2 U controller enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-30 Removing six M3 screws from a 4 U controller enclosure

2. Repeat Step 2.1 to remove the M3 screws on the right of the protective cover,
and place the removed M3 screws and protective cover into an ESD bag.
Step 3 Slide the controller enclosure or disk enclosure into the cabinet and tighten the
captive screws to secure it to the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-31 and Figure
4-32.
NOTE

The controller enclosure and disk enclosure are installed in the same way. The following
uses the controller enclosure as an example.

Figure 4-31 Installing a 2 U controller enclosure into a cabinet (using the

enclosure with 25 x 2.5-inch disks as an example)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-32 Installing a 4 U controller enclosure into a cabinet

Step 4 (Optional) If disks have not been installed, install the disks into empty slots in
sequence and then close the disk handles, as shown in Figure 4-33.

NOTICE

● Before installing a disk, fully open its handle to ensure proper installation.
● Insert the disk module into the slot by pushing the middle area of the disk
module (as shown in arrow 1 in Figure 4-33) to ensure that the disk module is
properly inserted into its position.

Figure 4-33 Installing a disk (using a 2.5-inch disk in a 25-slot enclosure as an

example)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

NOTE

Follow the following rules when installing disk modules in SAS and smart SAS disk
enclosures:
● Coffer disks must be configured in slot 0 to slot 3. Their types and capacities must be
the same, and caution labels must be attached to them. The recommended priority for
choosing the type of coffer disks is SSD > SAS > NL-SAS.
● Non-coffer disks are installed from slot 4. The recommended sequence for installing
non-coffer disks by type is as follows: SSD > SAS > NL-SAS.
– When disk modules are of the same type but different capacities, you are advised
to install those with smaller capacities in first slots.
– When disk modules are of the same type and capacity, you are advised to install
those with smaller rotating speeds in first slots.
● The V5 F series storage systems support only SSDs.

Step 5 (Optional) If interface modules have not been installed, install them according to
the plan, as shown in Figure 4-34 and Figure 4-35.
NOTE

The procedure for installing interface modules of 2 U controller enclosures is the same for
different storage models. The following uses the 2 U controller enclosure of OceanStor
5300 V5 as an example.

Figure 4-34 Installing an interface module into a 2 U controller enclosure

Figure 4-35 Installing an interface module into a 4 U controller enclosure

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Follow-up Procedure

NOTICE

If there are vacant disk slots after all disks have been installed, install filler panels
into the vacant slots for proper heat dissipation.

4.2.4.3 (Optional) Installing the Cable Tray for a 4 U Disk Enclosure

Cable trays are used to facilitate maintenance and cabling of interface modules.
One 4 U controller enclosure requires one cable tray.

Prerequisites
The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
● M3 and M6 screws
● Phillips screwdriver (M3 to M6)
● Marker
● Protective gloves
● Cable trays and trays
● Square-hole positioning pins (for square-hole mounting bars)
● Round-hole positioning pins (for round-hole mounting bars)

Context
● If each controller is equipped with more than three interface modules, install
a cable tray to facilitate maintenance and cabling of interface modules.
● You are advised to install a cable tray 1 U (1 U = 44.45 mm) under the
controller enclosure.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the position for a cable tray. If the position is covered by a filler panel,
mark the position.
Step 2 Extend the adjustable guide rail of the cable tray until positioning pins are inserted
into the rear column.
Step 3 Use M6 screws to secure the adjustable guide rail, as shown in Figure 4-36.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-36 Installing a cable tray

Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to fasten the M3 screws to secure the tray in place, as
shown in Figure 4-37.

Figure 4-37 Installing a tray

NOTE

If the tray is too close to the controller enclosure, perform Step 5 and Step 6 to adjust the
length of the cable tray for convenient cable trimming.

Step 5 (Optional) Loosen the M3 screws on the cable tray and adjust the position of the
guide rail for convenient cable trimming, as shown in Figure 4-38.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-38 Adjusting the position of a cable tray

Step 6 (Optional) Fasten the M3 screws to secure the guide rail in place, as shown in
Figure 4-39.

Figure 4-39 Securing a guide rail in place

----End

4.2.5 Installing a High-Density Disk Enclosure (Applicable to

the OceanStor 2000, 5000, and 6000 V5 Series)
The high-density disk enclosure provides high-performance data storage and high-
speed data transmission. Install the high-density disk enclosure into the cabinet,
install the cable tray, and install the disk modules.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

4.2.5.1 Installing Ball Bearing Guide Rails (for High-Density Disk Enclosures)
After determining installation positions of storage devices in the cabinet, install
ball bearing guide rails for supporting the high-density disk enclosures. If you do
not need to install high-density disk enclosures, skip this section.

Prerequisites
The following installation tools and materials are ready:

● M3 to M6 Phillips screwdriver
● Marker
● M6 screw
● M4 screw
● M3 screw
● Installation templates
● Ball bearing guide rail components (including ball bearing guide rails, M3
screws, M4 screws, M6 screws, and installation templates)

Context

NOTICE

● High-density disk enclosures must be installed on ball bearing guide rails.

Stacking the enclosures will cause damage.
● Ball bearing guide rails must be installed horizontally.

NOTE

Before performing the installation, you are advised to count several U scales upward from
the position of the first scale at the bottom of the mounting bar, and then mark the
position to ensure that the front and rear heights of the ball bearing guide rails are the
same.
● You are advised to install storage devices in the cabinet from bottom up.
● Configure a pair of ball bearing guide rails for each high-density disk
enclosure.
● The ball bearing guide rails can be extended from 600 mm to 915 mm.

Procedure
Step 1 Pull out the inner rail of the ball bearing guide rails, as shown in Figure 4-40.
1. Pull out the inner rail until the buckle is exposed.
2. Press the buckle and pull out the inner rail from the ball bearing guide rail.
See step (2) in Figure 4-40.

Put the removed inner rail into an ESD bag. The inner rail will be used in installing
a high-density disk enclosure.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-40 Pulling out an inner rail

NOTE

For the right ball bearing guide rail, press the buckle downward. For the left ball bearing
guide rail, press the buckle upward.

Step 2 Pull out the rail bracket of a ball bearing guide rail, as shown in Figure 4-41.
1. Loosen the four M3 screws on the ball bearing guide rails shown in (1) of
Figure 4-41.
2. Remove the rail bracket, as shown in (2) of Figure 4-41.
The rail bracket will be used to fix the cable tray.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-41 Removing a rail bracket

Step 3 Install the left inner rail (identified by L) of the ball bearing guide rails.
1. Loosen the two M4 screws on the external rail of the ball bearing guide rail,
adjust the length of ball bearing guide rail.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-42 Loosening screws

NOTE

Align the ball bearing guide rails with the mounting bar of the cabinet in advance. If
the distance is not longer than 10 mm between the front and rear brackets of the ball
bearing guide rails and the front and rear ends of the mounting bar, loosen the two
M4 screws on the external rail of the ball bearing guide rail (pull out the middle guide
rail to expose the two M4 screws on the ball bearing guide rail), as shown in Figure
4-42. If the distance is longer than 10 mm, remove the two M4 screws and align the
distance.
2. Align the bottom edge of the ball bearing guide rail with the integer U scales
on the front mounting bar, and insert the front positioning pins of the ball
bearing guide rail into the square holes. Use M6 screws to fix the front
bracket of the ball bearing guide rail, as shown in Figure 4-43.
3. Stretch the rear bracket of the ball bearing guide rail and insert the rear
positioning pins into the square holes of the rear mounting bar. Use M6
screws to secure the guide rail in place, as shown in Figure 4-43.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-43 Installing a ball bearing guide rail

4. Fasten the two M4 screws on the ball bearing guide rail, as shown in Figure
4-44.

Figure 4-44 Fastening screws

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Step 4 Install the right inner rail (identified by R) of the ball bearing guide rails.
The installation method of the right inner rail is similar to Step 3.
Step 5 Install the ball bearing guide rail bracket, as shown in Figure 4-45.
1. Install the rail bracket and slide the bracket to the ball bearing guide rail. See
step (1) in Figure 4-45.
2. Fasten the four M3 screws on the ball bearing guide rail. See step (2) in
Figure 4-45.

NOTE

Fasten two screws at the top and bottom of the bracket of the ball bearing guide rail,
respectively.

Figure 4-45 Installing a ball bearing guide rail bracket

Step 6 After the installation, use the installation templates to check the distance between
the left and right guide rails, and ensure that the template can snatch into the ball
bearing guide rails, as shown in Figure 4-46.
NOTE

If the installation templates cannot snatch into the guide rails, loosen the M6 screws on the
guide rails and mounting bars, and slightly adjust the distance between the left and right
guide rails. After the installation templates successfully snatch into the guide rails, fix the
M6 screws.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-46 Inserting installation templates

Step 7 Check the installation of the ball bearing guide rails.

1. In front of the cabinet, check whether the ball of the ball bearing guide rail is
placed at the most front end of the middle rail. If not, slide it to the most
front end of the middle rail, as shown in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47 Sliding the ball to the most front end of the middle rail

2. Check whether the middle rail of the ball bearing guide rail is completed
inserted, that is, the edges of the middle rail and external rail are at the same
vertical plane, as shown in Figure 4-48.
NOTE

If the middle guide rail is not in place, high-density disk enclosures may fail to be pushed in
or pulled out smoothly later. Release the inner rail latch to push the rail into the guide rail.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-48 Sliding the middle rail to align it with the edges of the external rail

----End

4.2.5.2 Installing a High-Density Disk Enclosure into a Cabinet

Install the high-density disk enclosure by sliding it into the cabinet, securing it,
and checking the installation.

Prerequisites
● Ensure that the following conditions are met before installing a high-density
disk enclosure:
– The installation environment meets requirements.
– Ball bearing guide rails used for sliding a high-density disk enclosure into
a cabinet have been installed.
● The following installation tools and materials are ready:
– Phillips screwdrivers
– M6 screws
– M4 screws
– M3 screws
– Protective gloves
– High-density disk enclosures

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Precautions

WARNING

To prevent personal injury and device damage, arrange for at least three persons
to carry and install an unloaded enclosure into the cabinet and install disk
modules into the enclosure.

If you remove disks to facilitate the movement and installation of the device,
record the mapping between each disk and its slot in advance. This helps you
insert each disk back to its correct slot after the movement and installation.

● Install components into a cabinet from bottom to top to prevent the cabinet
from falling over.
● If a high-density disk enclosure is installed in the top 4 U space, disks cannot
be inserted.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear protective gloves.

Step 2 Install the inner rail to the right of the high-density disk enclosure.
1. Install the inner rail onto the high-density disk enclosure. See step (1) in
Figure 4-49.

Figure 4-49 Installing the inner rail

2. Use two M4 screws to secure the inner rail. See step (2) in Figure 4-49.

Step 3 Install the inner rail to the left of the high-density disk enclosure.

Repeat Step 2 to install the left inner rail.

Step 4 Remove the two M3 screws from the upper panel, as shown in Figure 4-50.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-50 Removing screws

Step 5 Place the side step at the rear of the high-density disk enclosure on the front
bracket of the ball bearing guide rails, and slide the disk enclosure into the cabinet
along the ball bearing guide rails (no manual alignment is required because the
inner rail automatically connects to the middle rail), as shown in Figure 4-51.

NOTICE

● Do not pull out the middle guide rails when sliding the high-density disk
enclosure into the cabinet. Otherwise, the guide rails may misalign.
● Before you install disk modules, install the high-density disk enclosure into the
cabinet.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-51 Sliding the high-density disk enclosure into a cabinet

Step 6 Check the high-density disk enclosure installation.

● After sliding the high-density disk enclosure into the cabinet, pull out the
high-density disk enclosure from the cabinet and slide the high-density disk
enclosure into the cabinet for two times respectively to check that the ball
bearing guide rails are correctly installed.
● If you cannot push or pull out a high-density disk enclosure smoothly, check
whether inner rails are fully inserted into middle rails. If the inner rails are not
fully inserted into middle rails, disassemble the high-density disk enclosure
and check whether ball bearing guide rails meet the following conditions
according to the section of 4.2.5.1 Installing Ball Bearing Guide Rails (for
High-Density Disk Enclosures):
– Check whether ball bearing guide rails are installed horizontally (whether
front and back brackets of ball bearing guide rails are on the same level).
– Check whether the installation templates of ball bearing guide rails can
be inserted.
– Check whether the ball of the ball bearing guide rail is placed at the most
front end of the middle rail.
– Check whether the middle rails of ball bearing guide rails are completed
inserted.
Step 7 Install a cover.
1. Pull out the enclosure slowly. See step (1) in Figure 4-52.
2. Push the upper cover backward until the upper cover touches the mounting
bars. See step (2) in Figure 4-52.
3. Fasten the two captive screws on the cover. See step (3) in Figure 4-52.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-52 Installing a cover

Step 8 Install the high-density disk enclosure.

1. Slide the enclosure into the cabinet slowly. See step (1) in Figure 4-53.
2. Fasten the two captive screws on the panel. See step (2) in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53 Fastening the two screws on the panel

Step 9 Repeat Step 2 to Step 8 to install other high-density disk enclosures into the
cabinet.

----End

4.2.5.3 Installing a Cable Tray

Cable trays are used for housing cables of the high-density disk enclosure. Each
high-density disk enclosure has one cable tray.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Prerequisites
● All high-density disk enclosures have been installed.
● The following installation tools and materials are ready:
– M3 screws
– Phillips screwdrivers
– Protective gloves
– Cable trays

Procedure
Step 1 Arrange cable trays so that both ends of each cable tray are on the same side, as
shown in Figure 4-54.

Figure 4-54 Arranging cable trays

Step 2 Insert the two sides of the left cable tray to the same side of the ball bearing
guide rail and the high-density disk enclosure.
1. Insert the upper left of the cable tray into the high-density disk enclosure. See
step (1) in Figure 4-55.
2. Insert the lower left of the cable tray into the bracket of the ball bearing
guide rail. See step (2) in Figure 4-55.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

NOTE

● In Figure 4-55, the "L" in a cable tray indicates that the cable tray must be installed on
the left side of the high-density disk enclosure from the rear view.
● In Figure 4-55, the "R" in a ball bearing guide rail indicates the right side of the cabinet
from the front view.

Figure 4-55 Inserting the left cable tray

Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to fasten M3 screws to secure the left cable tray.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver and M3 screws to secure the lower left of the cable
tray. See step (1) in Figure 4-56.
2. Adjust the lower left of the cable tray so that the bottom of the cable tray is
against the limiting latch. See step (2) in Figure 4-56.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver and M3 screws to secure the upper left of the cable
tray. See step (3) in Figure 4-56.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-56 Installing a left cable tray

Step 4 Insert the two sides of the right cable tray to the same side of the ball bearing
guide rail and the high-density disk enclosure.
1. Insert the upper right of the cable tray into the high-density disk enclosure.
See step (1) in Figure 4-57.
2. Insert the lower right of the cable tray into the bracket of the ball bearing
guide rail. See step (2) in Figure 4-57.

NOTE

● In Figure 4-57, the "R" in a cable tray indicates that the cable tray must be installed on
the right side of the high-density disk enclosure from the rear view.
● In Figure 4-57, the "L" in a ball bearing guide rail indicates the left side of the cabinet
from the front view.

Figure 4-57 Inserting the right cable tray

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to fasten M3 screws to secure the right cable tray.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver and M3 screws to secure the lower right of the
cable tray. See step (1) in Figure 4-58.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver and M3 screws to secure the upper right of the
cable tray. See step (2) in Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58 Installing a right cable tray

Step 6 Route and bind the cables on the cable tray.

1. Bind all the mini SAS HD electrical cables on the right, as indicated by 1 in
Figure 4-59.
2. Bind all the power cables on the right to the handle of the fan module, as
indicated by 2 in Figure 4-59.
3. Bind all the cables on the right (including mini SAS HD electrical cables,
power cables, and PGND cables) to the front of the cable tray, as indicated by
3 in Figure 4-59.
4. Route cables along the trough of the cable tray and bind the cables, as
indicated by 4 in Figure 4-59.
5. Route cables out of the trough of the cable tray and bind the cables, as
indicated by 5 in Figure 4-59.

Repeat the previous steps to route and bind cables onto the left cable tray.

NOTE

● Evenly divide the cables connected to the storage device into two groups. Place the left
group of cables into the troughs of the left cable tray, and the right group into those of
the right.
● To route a 5 m mini SAS HD electrical cable across three cabinets, use the underfloor
and side cabling methods, and do not use the overhead cabling method.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-59 Routing cables on the cable trays

Step 7 Install the spring pins to the left and right cable trays to secure them.
1. Pull up the spring pin, as shown in step (1) in Figure 4-60.
2. Adjust the cable trays to allow the stretchable guide rail of one cable tray to
insert into the support of the other cable tray, as shown in step (2) in Figure
4-60.
When the spring pin aligns with the hole in the support, the spring pin can
automatically disconnect, and the installation of the spring pin is completed.

Figure 4-60 Installing the spring pin

Step 8 Check the cable tray installation.

● Loosen the captive screws on the front panel of a high-density disk enclosure.
Pull the high-density disk enclosure out of the cabinet and slide the high-
density disk enclosure into the cabinet several times and check whether the
cable trays extend correctly.
● If yes, the cable trays are installed correctly. If no, slightly adjust screws that
secure the cable trays.
----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

4.2.5.4 Installing a Disk Module

After the high-density disk enclosure is installed into a cabinet, install the disk
module.

Prerequisites
The following installation tools and materials are ready:

● ESD wrist strap

● ESD clothing
● ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdrivers
● M6 screws
● Disk modules
● (Optional) Caution labels for the coffer disks (required only when the caution
labels have not been attached on the coffer disks)

Procedure
Step 1 Loosen the two screws on the panel and pull out the high-density disk enclosure,
as shown in Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61 Pulling out a high-density disk enclosure

Step 2 Open the high-density disk enclosure. Insert disks to coffer disk slots A0, A1, A2,
and A3. Then insert disks from left to right (0 to 14) and from inside to outside (E
to A). After disk modules are inserted into the vacant slots according to the arrow
direction, buckle up the handle, as shown in Figure 4-63.

Disk slots of high-density disk enclosures are numbered from 0 to 14 from left to
right and from E to A from inward to outward, as shown in Figure 4-62.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-62 Disk slot numbering of high-density disk enclosures

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-63 Installing a disk module

Step 3 (Optional) Attach the caution labels to the coffer disks. The caution labels of
coffer disks of a high-density disk enclosure are attached on slots A0, A1, A2 and
A3.
NOTE

If the caution labels have been attached to the coffer disks, skip this step.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

NOTICE

To ensure well heat dissipation, insert disks into a system subrack from the rear to
front, and install filler panels into the vacant slots if there are any.

4.2.6 (Optional) Installing a Data Switch

Install CE8850-32CQ-EI switches when a storage system is configured with two or
more controller enclosures and uses switches for networking. If data switches are
not used for multi-controller networking, skip this section.

Prerequisites
The following installation tools and materials are ready:

● Phillips screwdriver (M3 to M6)

● M4 screws
● M6 screws
● Floating nut

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

● Front mounting ears (two)

● Rear mounting brackets (Two pairs of rear mounting brackets are delivered
with each switch. Select an appropriate pair according to the installation
scenario of the switch.)
● Rear mounting bracket guide rails (Two pairs of rear mounting bracket guide
rails are delivered with each switch. Select an appropriate pair according to
the installation scenario of the switch.)
● ESD wrist strap
● ESD bag
● ESD table

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap.
Step 2 Take the replacement data switch out of its ESD bag and place it on the ESD
table.
Step 3 Install grounding wires and mounting ears on the replacement data switch, as
shown in Figure 4-64.
1. Use the Phillips screwdriver to install the ground cable on the side panel of
the data switch.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to install mounting ears on the left and right
panels of the data switch.

Figure 4-64 Installing the ground cable and mounting ears

Step 4 Install the floating nut to the mounting bar of the cabinet.
1. Install four floating nuts on the front mounting bar, two on each side.
2. Install four floating nuts on the rear mounting bar, two on each side.
Step 5 Install the data switch to the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-65.
1. Push the data switch into the cabinet.
2. Use M6 screws to fix the data switch on the cabinet.
3. Verify that the data switch is horizontally installed and firmly secured.

NOTE

To facilitate future maintenance, attach labels to data switches 0 and 1 to distinguish them
after the networking is complete.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-65 Installing a data switch

----End

4.2.7 (Optional) Installing Filler Panels

Cover the vacant slots in the cabinet with filler panels to ensure good ventilation
and a neat appearance.

Prerequisites
● Before installing a filler panel, ensure that the floating nuts are properly
installed on the mounting bar.
● The following installation tools have been prepared:
– M6 screws
– M3 to M6 Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Install the filler panel on the cabinet with M6 screws, as shown in Figure 4-66.

Figure 4-66 Installing the filler panel on the cabinet

Step 2 Check that all filler panels are installed.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

4.3 Connecting Cables

Storage devices involve ground cables, power cables, network cables, optical
fibers, mini SAS HD electrical and optical cables, RDMA cables, and serial cables.

NOTE

If the operation space is limited, you can use a fiber extractor to remove and insert LC
optical fibers, pluggable optical modules, and unshielded network cables. For details about
how to connect cables, see 7.12 Replacing an Optical Fiber, Optical Module, Electrical
Module, or Network Cable Using a Fiber Extractor.

4.3.1 Connecting Ground Cables

Devices installed in the cabinet should be grounded to prevent damage caused by
ESD or unexpected creepage.

Prerequisites
The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
● Ground cable
● Phillips screwdriver (M3 to M6)
● M5 screw
● Diagonal pliers

Context
● If AC power is supplied, 2 U controller enclosures, 4 U controller enclosures, 2
U disk enclosures, and 4 U disk enclosures do not need to be grounded. If DC
power is supplied, disk enclosures and controller enclosures must be
grounded.
● If high-density disk enclosures are used, they must be grounded.
● Figure 4-67, Figure 4-68, Figure 4-69, Figure 4-70, Figure 4-71, and Figure
4-72 show the ground screw holes of a 2 U controller enclosure, smart disk
enclosure, and SAS disk enclosure.

Figure 4-67 Ground screw holes of a 2 U controller enclosure for OceanStor

5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-68 Ground screw holes of a 2 U controller enclosure for OceanStor

5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)

Figure 4-69 Ground screw holes of a smart disk enclosure

Figure 4-70 Ground screw holes of a 2 U SAS disk enclosure

Figure 4-71 Ground screw holes of a 4 U SAS disk enclosure

Figure 4-72 Ground screw hole of a high-density disk enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Procedure
Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground screw next to the power module.

Step 2 Fasten one OT terminal of the ground cable to the ground screw hole on the
device using a ground screw, as shown in Figure 4-73 and Figure 4-74.

Figure 4-73 Connecting a ground cable (for a SAS disk enclosure or a high-density
disk enclosure)

Figure 4-74 Connecting a ground cable (for a controller enclosure or a smart disk
enclosure)

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to connect the other OT terminals of the ground cables
to the ground terminals on the cabinet.

Step 4 Route ground cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

NOTE

For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

4.3.2 Connecting Mini SAS HD Cables

You can connect additional disk enclosures to a controller enclosure to expand
storage capacity. Before connecting disk enclosures, observe the rules for
connecting disk enclosures. For details, see 3.1.2.3 Disk Enclosure Connection
Planning.

Prerequisites
● The disk enclosure connection plan has been worked out.
● The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
– Mini SAS HD electrical cables or mini SAS HD optical fibers
– Diagonal pliers
– Cable ties
NOTE

Electrical and optical cables of mini SAS HD are removed and inserted in the same manner.
The following uses mini SAS electrical HD cables as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach labels to mini SAS HD cables.
1. Prepare the mini SAS HD cables for connecting controller enclosures to disk
enclosures.
Mini SAS HD cables shipped with the device have been coiled. Uncoil the
cables based on site requirements to prevent unnecessary cable arrangement
and binding.
2. Prepare labels for guiding cable connections based on the disk enclosure
connection planning.
– The label for connections between a 2 U controller enclosure and a
standard disk enclosure is CTEx-A/Bx-Px TO DAExxx-A/B-Px.
– That between a 2 U controller enclosure and a high-density disk
enclosure is CTEx-A/Bx-Px TO DAExxx-A/B-PRIx.
– That between a 4 U controller enclosure and a disk enclosure is CTEx-
H/Lx-Px TO DAExxx-A/B-Px.
– That between standard disk enclosures is DAExxx-A/B-Px TO DAExxx-A/B-
Px.
– That between high-density disk enclosures is DAExxx-A/B-EXPx TO
DAExxx-A/B-PRIx.
The following table explains the label.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Table 4-2 Label naming rules

Item Description Example Description

CTEx Controller enclosure ID CTE0 Controller enclosure 0

A/Bx Slot ID of controller A A or B1 Onboard expansion

or controller B in the 2 module on controller A
U controller enclosure or slot IOM 1 on
where the expansion controller B
module resides. If the
onboard expansion
module is used, x is not
needed.

Hx/Lx Slot ID of the H or L H5 or L6 Slot IOM 5 on the H

plane of the 4 U plane of the controller
controller enclosure enclosure or slot IOM 6
where the expansion on the L plane of the
module resides controller enclosure

DAExxx Disk enclosure ID DAE000 Disk enclosure 0

Px Port ID of the P0 Port P0 on the

expansion module on a expansion module of a
standard disk enclosure standard disk enclosure

PRIx/EX Port ID of the PRI0 or EXP0 Port PRI0 or EXP0 on

Px expansion module on a the expansion module
high-density disk of a high-density disk
enclosure enclosure

For example: CTE0-A-P0 TO DAE000-A-P0 indicates that one end of the cable
connects to port P0 on the onboard expansion module of controller A in a 2 U
controller enclosure (ID: 0), and the other end connects to port P0 on
expansion module A in disk enclosure 0. CTE0-B1-P0 TO DAE000-B-P0
indicates that one end of the cable connects to port P0 on the expansion
module in slot IOM1 of controller B in a 2 U controller enclosure (ID: 0), and
the other end connects to port P0 on expansion module B in disk enclosure 0.
CTE0-H6-P0 TO DAE000-A-P0 indicates that one end of the cable connects to
port P0 of the expansion module in slot IOM6 on the H plane of a 4 U
controller enclosure (ID: 0), and the other end connects to port P0 on
expansion module A in disk enclosure 0.
Figure 4-75 shows an example of filling in a label.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-75 Example of filling in a label

3. Attach a pair of labels to both ends of a mini SAS HD cable. For details about
how to attach a label, see 7.11 Engineering Label Specifications for Cables.
Step 2 Connect disk enclosures following the connection plan, as shown in Figure 4-76 or
Figure 4-77.

NOTICE

● When connecting a mini SAS HD cable to a 4 U controller enclosure, ensure

that the plastic ring of the cable is on the right side of the cable.
● When connecting a mini SAS HD cable to a 2 U controller enclosure or disk
enclosure, ensure that the plastic ring of the cable is on the upper side of the
cable.

Figure 4-76 Connecting mini SAS HD cables to a 4 U controller enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-77 Connecting mini SAS HD cables to a 2 U controller enclosure or disk

enclosure

Step 3 Adjust the length of the mini SAS HD cables by wrapping them into circles
according to the distance away from the system bay, and use a cable tie to bind
them and use diagonal pliers to trim off the excess of cable ties, as shown in
Figure 4-78.
NOTE

After mini SAS HD cables are connected, fix extra cables onto the cable tray at the rear of
the system bay by using fiber binding tapes.

Figure 4-78 Laying out and binding mini SAS HD cables

NOTE

● For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing
Principles and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.
● When connecting cables of a high-density disk enclosure, lay out the cables along the
cable tray and guide rails neatly.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

4.3.3 Connecting RDMA Cables

You can connect additional disk enclosures to a controller enclosure to expand
storage capacity. Before connecting disk enclosures, observe the rules for
connecting disk enclosures. For details, see 3.1.2.3 Disk Enclosure Connection
Planning.

Prerequisites
● The disk enclosure connection plan has been worked out.
● The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
– RDMA cables
– Diagonal pliers
– Cable ties

Procedure
Step 1 Attach labels to RDMA cables.
1. Prepare the RDMA cables for connecting controller enclosures to disk
enclosures.
RDMA cables shipped with the device have been coiled. Uncoil the cables
based on site requirements to prevent unnecessary cable arrangement and
binding.
2. Prepare labels for guiding cable connections based on the disk enclosure
connection planning.
The label for connections between a 2 U controller enclosure and a disk
enclosure is CTEx-A/Bx-Px TO DAExxx-A/B-Px, that for connections between a
4 U controller enclosure and a disk enclosure is CTEx-H/Lx-Px TO DAExxx-A/B-
Px, and that for connections between disk enclosures is DAExxx-A/B-Px TO
DAExxx-A/B-Px. The following table explains the label.

Table 4-3 Label naming rules

Item Description Example Description

CTEx Controller enclosure ID CTE0 Controller enclosure 0

A/Bx Slot ID of controller A A or B1 Onboard expansion

or controller B in the 2 module on controller A
U controller enclosure or slot IOM 1 on
where the expansion controller B
module resides. If the
onboard expansion
module is used, x is not
needed.

H/Lx Slot ID of the H or L H5 or L6 Slot IOM 5 on the H

plane of the 4 U plane of the controller
controller enclosure enclosure or slot IOM 6
where the expansion on the L plane of the
module resides controller enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Item Description Example Description

DAExxx Disk enclosure ID DAE000 Disk enclosure 0

Px Port ID on the P0 Port P0 on the

expansion module expansion module

For example: CTE0-A-P0 TO DAE000-A-P0 indicates that one end of the cable
connects to port P0 on the onboard expansion module of controller A in a 2 U
controller enclosure (ID: 0), and the other end connects to port P0 on
expansion module A in disk enclosure 0. CTE0-B1-P0 TO DAE000-B-P0
indicates that one end of the cable connects to port P0 on the expansion
module in slot IOM1 of controller B in a 2 U controller enclosure (ID: 0), and
the other end connects to port P0 on expansion module B in disk enclosure 0.
CTE0-H6-P0 TO DAE000-A-P0 indicates that one end of the cable connects to
port P0 of the expansion module in slot IOM6 on the H plane of a 4 U
controller enclosure (ID: 0), and the other end connects to port P0 on
expansion module A in disk enclosure 0.
Figure 4-79 shows an example of filling in a label.

Figure 4-79 Example of filling in a label

3. Attach a pair of labels to both ends of an RDMA cable. For details about how
to attach a label, see 7.11 Engineering Label Specifications for Cables.
Step 2 Connect disk enclosures following the connection plan, as shown in Figure 4-80,
Figure 4-81, Figure 4-82, and Figure 4-83.

NOTICE

● When connecting an RDMA cable to a 4 U controller enclosure, ensure that the

plastic ring of the cable or the optical module handle is on the right side of the
cable.
● When connecting an RDMA cable to a 2 U controller enclosure or disk
enclosure, ensure that the plastic ring of the cable or the optical module
handle is on the upper side of the cable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-80 Connecting RDMA electrical cables to a 4 U controller enclosure

Figure 4-81 Connecting RDMA optical cables to a 4 U controller enclosure

Figure 4-82 Connecting RDMA electrical cables to a 2 U controller enclosure or

disk enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-83 Connecting RDMA optical cables to a 2 U controller enclosure or disk

enclosure

Step 3 Adjust the length of the RDMA cables by wrapping them into circles according to
the distance away from the system bay, and use a cable tie to bind them and use
diagonal pliers to trim off the excess of cable ties, as shown in Figure 4-84.
NOTE

After RDMA cables are connected, fix extra cables onto the cable tray at the rear of the
system bay by using fiber binding tapes.

Figure 4-84 Laying out and binding RDMA cables

NOTE

For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

4.3.4 (Optional) Connecting Controller Enclosures

This section describes how to connect two controller enclosures through SO 25
Gbit/s RDMA interface modules or SO 100 Gbit/s RDMA interface modules.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Prerequisites
● You have developed a plan for connection between multiple controller
enclosures. For details on how to develop a connection plan, see 3.1.2.4
(Optional) Connection Planning for Multiple Controller Enclosures.
● The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
– RDMA cables
– Diagonal pliers
– Cable ties

Procedure
Step 1 Connect controller enclosures following the connection plan, as shown in Figure
4-85, Figure 4-86, Figure 4-87, and Figure 4-88.

NOTICE

● When connecting an RDMA cable to a 4 U controller enclosure, ensure that the

plastic ring of the cable or the optical module handle is on the right side of the
cable.
● When connecting an RDMA cable to a 2 U controller enclosure, ensure that the
plastic ring of the cable or the optical module handle is on the upper side of
the cable.

NOTE

It takes 2 minutes for the storage system to identify a new cable. Do not remove the cable
during this period. If the storage system fails to identify the cable after 2 minutes, verify
that the cable is in good shape and properly connected, and then reinstall the cable.

Figure 4-85 Connecting RDMA electrical cables to a 4 U controller enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-86 Connecting RDMA optical cables to a 4 U controller enclosure

Figure 4-87 Connecting RDMA electrical cables to a 2 U controller enclosure

Figure 4-88 Connecting RDMA optical cables to a 2 U controller enclosure

Step 2 Route the RDMA cables.

NOTE

For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

4.3.5 Connecting Controller Enclosures to Application Servers

Connect front-end ports on a controller enclosure to ports on an application server
through cables to establish service channels for communication between the
storage system and the application server.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Prerequisites
● The connection between the controller enclosure and the application server
has been completed. For details about the connection solution design, see
3.1.2.5 Connection Planning Between Controller Enclosures and
Application Servers.
● If Fibre Channel switches are used, the NPIV function of these switches has
been enabled. For details about how to query and set the NPIV function of a
switch, see 6.2 How Do I Query and Configure the NPIV Function of
Switches?
● The ports on the storage device are set to the autonegotiation mode. To keep
a smooth link, the rates of the ports on the storage device and the application
server (or the switch) must be consistent. If the rates are inconsistent,
perform the following:
– Set the rate of a front-end port. See "Modifying an Ethernet Port" and
"Modifying a Fibre Channel Front-End Port" in the Basic Storage Service
Configuration Guide (Block Service) specific to your product model and
version.
– To set the rate of the ports on the application server (or the switch), see
the documents of the application server (or the switch).
● The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
– In the event of Ethernet networking:

NOTICE

If GE electrical ports on a GE electrical interface module or network ports

on an application server (or a switch) are not in autonegotiation mode,
you must use crossover cables to connect the controller enclosure to the
application server (or switch). Otherwise, the controller enclosure may
fail to communicate with the application server (or switch).

▪ Network cable

▪ Cable tie

▪ Diagonal pliers
– In the event of Fibre Channel networking:

▪ Optical module

▪ Optical fiber

▪ Fiber binding tape

▪ Diagonal pliers

Connecting GE or 10GE Electrical Interface Modules

Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, and ESD clothes.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Step 2 Connect one end of a network cable to a GE or 10GE electrical port.

For the GE electrical interface module, connect the network cable directly to the
electrical port on the interface module. For the 10GE electrical interface module,
you must first install an electrical module (see Figure 4-89) and then connect the
network cable.

Figure 4-89 Installing an electrical module

Step 3 Set up a connection to a network port on the application server.

● Direct connection: Connect the other end of the network cable to a network
port on the application server.
● Switch-based connection: Connect the other end of the network cable to a
switch. Then connect the switch to the application server using a network
cable.
Step 4 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 to connect another GE or 10GE electrical port to the
application server.
Step 5 Lay out and bind the network cables.
NOTE

For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

Connecting SmartIO Interface Modules

DANGER

When installing an optical fiber, do not look into the optical port without eye
protection.

Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, and ESD clothes.
Step 2 (Optional) Install an optical module to the ports on the SmartIO interface module
of the storage system.
NOTE

If ports on the SmartIO interface module are already equipped with optical modules, go to
Step 3.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

1. Remove the protective cap from the optical module. See (1) in Figure 4-90.
2. Insert the optical module into the port on the SmartIO interface module. See
(2) in Figure 4-90.
NOTE

Insert an optical module horizontally. Otherwise, it may be damaged.

Figure 4-90 Inserting an optical module

Step 3 Remove the protective cap from the optical fiber connector. See (1) in Figure
4-91.

NOTICE

Precautions about connecting optical fibers are as follows:

● An optical module is electrostatic sensitive and must be placed in an ESD-
resistant and dust-proof environment during transportation, storage, and use.
● When connecting cables, select proper cables according to site requirements
and label information.
● An optical fiber connector must be kept clean and free from scratches.
● Cover optical fibers and optical modules that are not in use with protective
caps.
● The bend radius of an optical fiber must be larger than 5 cm.

Step 4 Connect one end of the optical fiber to the port on the SmartIO interface module.
See (2) in Figure 4-91.
NOTE

Insert the optical fiber connector until it clicks into place.

Figure 4-91 Connecting an optical fiber

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Step 5 Set up a connection to the application server.

● Direct connection: Connect the other end of the optical fiber to a network
port on the application server.
● Switch-based connection: Connect the other end of the optical fiber to a
switch. Then connect the switch to the application server.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 and Step 5 to connect another front-end port to the application
server.
Step 7 Lay out and bind the optical fibers.
NOTE

For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

Connecting 40GE or 100GE Interface Modules

Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, and ESD clothes.
Step 2 (Optional) Install an optical module to an ETH port on the storage system.
NOTE

If ETH ports on the storage system are already equipped with optical modules, go to Step
3.

1. Remove the protective cap from the optical module. See (1) in Figure 4-92.
2. Insert the optical module into the ETH port. See (2) in Figure 4-92.

NOTE

Insert an optical module horizontally. Otherwise, it may be damaged.

Figure 4-92 Inserting an optical module

Step 3 Connect the optical fiber.

1. Remove the protective cap from the optical fiber connector. See (1) in Figure
4-93.
2. Connect one end of the optical fiber to the optical module on the ETH port.
See (2) in Figure 4-93.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-93 Connecting an optical fiber

Step 4 Set up a connection to an ETH port on the application server.

● Direct connection: Connect the other end of the optical fiber to an ETH port
on the application server.
● Switch-based connection: Connect the other end of the optical fiber to a
switch. Then connect the switch to the application server.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 and Step 4 to connect another host port to the application server.
Step 6 Lay out and bind the optical fibers.
NOTE

For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

4.3.6 Connecting a Management Network Port to the

Network
Connect management network ports on a controller enclosure to network ports
on maintenance terminals through a LAN so that management channels are set
up for maintenance terminals to manage and maintain the storage device.

NOTE

The management network port, maintenance network port, and serial port of the smart
disk enclosure are reserved and do not need cable connection.

Prerequisites
The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
● Network cable
● Cable tie
● Diagonal pliers

Context
● For a 2 U controller enclosure, each controller is configured with a
management network port and a maintenance network port. For a 4 U

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

controller enclosure, each controller is configured with two management

network ports and one maintenance network port. In normal cases, the
management network port is used to configure and manage a storage device.
The maintenance network port is designed for special maintenance in
emergency.
NOTE

● For a 2 U controller enclosure, the default management network port IP addresses

of controllers A and B are 192.168.128.101 and 192.168.128.102, respectively. The
default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
● For a 4 U controller enclosure, the default IP address of network port 0 on
management module 0 is 192.168.128.101 and that of network port 0 on
management module 1 is 192.168.128.102. The default subnet mask is
255.255.0.0.
● The default IP address of the maintenance network port is 172.31.128.101 or
172.31.128.102, and the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.

NOTICE

● Do not connect the management network port and maintenance network port
to the same LAN or switch to prevent network loops.
● If multiple controller enclosures are deployed, you only need to connect the
management network ports of controller enclosure 0 to the management
network. For details, see 3.1.2.4 (Optional) Connection Planning for Multiple
Controller Enclosures.

● The management network port and the maintenance terminal can correctly
communicate with each other (the management network port and the
maintenance terminal reside on the same network segment or reside on
different network segments but are connected via a route).

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, and ESD clothes.

Step 2 Prepare a network cable for connecting the management network port on the
controller enclosure to the network port on the maintenance terminal, and label
the cable. For details about how to prepare and attach labels, see 7.11
Engineering Label Specifications for Cables.

Step 3 Locate the network cables that are used to connect the management network
ports (MGMT) on the controller enclosure.

Figure 4-94 Locating network cables

Step 4 Connect the network cables to the management network ports, as shown in
Figure 4-95, Figure 4-96, Figure 4-97, Figure 4-98, Figure 4-99, and Figure
4-100.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-95 Connecting network cables to management network ports for

OceanStor 2200 V5

A B

NOTE

Ensure that the management network ports of the two controllers in the controller
enclosure are connected to the LAN.

Figure 4-96 Connecting network cables to management network ports for

OceanStor 2600 V5

A B

NOTE

Ensure that the management network ports of the two controllers in the controller
enclosure are connected to the LAN.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-97 Connecting network cables to management network ports for

OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)

A B

NOTE

Ensure that the management network ports of the two controllers in the controller
enclosure are connected to the LAN.

Figure 4-98 Connecting network cables to management network ports for

OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)

A B

NOTE

Ensure that the management network ports of the two controllers in the controller
enclosure are connected to the LAN.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-99 Connecting network cables to management network ports for

OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and 5800F V5

A B

NOTE

Ensure that the management network ports of the two controllers in the controller
enclosure are connected to the LAN.

Figure 4-100 Connecting network cables to management network ports for

OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5

NOTE

● Ensure that the management network ports of the two management modules are
connected to the LAN.
● For a 4 U controller enclosure, connect only management network port 0 of the two
management modules to the LAN.

Step 5 Lay out and bind the network cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

NOTE

For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

4.3.7 Connecting a Serial Port to a Maintenance Terminal

After connecting a serial port to a maintenance terminal through a serial cable,
you can manage and maintain the storage system through the serial port.

NOTICE

Only serial cables can be inserted into the serial port. Do not insert network cables
into the serial port position.

NOTE

The management network port, maintenance network port, and serial port of the smart
disk enclosure are reserved and do not need cable connection.

Context
There are two types of serial cables: RJ-45 to DB9 serial cable and double RJ-45
serial cable. The type of serial cable to be used depends on the type of the serial
port on the maintenance terminal. Typically, the storage system is connected to a
maintenance terminal through an RJ-45 to DB9 serial cable, as shown in Figure
4-101, Figure 4-102, Figure 4-103, Figure 4-104, Figure 4-105, and Figure
4-106.

NOTE

If you use an RJ-45 to DB9 serial cable, connect the RJ-45 connector to the storage system,
and connect the DB9 connector to the maintenance terminal.

Figure 4-101 Connecting a serial port to a maintenance terminal for OceanStor

2200 V5

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-102 Connecting a serial port to a maintenance terminal for OceanStor

2600 V5

Figure 4-103 Connecting a serial port to a maintenance terminal for OceanStor

5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)

Figure 4-104 Connecting a serial port to a maintenance terminal for OceanStor

5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-105 Connecting a serial port to a maintenance terminal for OceanStor

5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and 5800F V5

Figure 4-106 Connecting a serial port to a maintenance terminal for OceanStor

6800 V5 and 6800F V5

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, and ESD clothes.
Step 2 Prepare a serial cable used to connect the serial port on the controller enclosure
and a network port on the maintenance terminal, and label the cable. For details
about how to prepare and attach labels, see 7.11 Engineering Label
Specifications for Cables.
Step 3 Connect the RJ-45 end of an RJ-45 to DB9 serial cable to a serial port on the
controller enclosure.
Step 4 Connect the DB9 end of the RJ-45 to DB9 serial cable to the serial port on the
maintenance terminal.

----End

4.3.8 Connecting Power Cables

This section details the connection methods for both types of power supplies.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Context
NOTE

● AC devices can only be connected to AC power supplies, and DC devices can only be
connected to DC power supplies.
● Both AC and DC power modules can connect to two power supply routes. To ensure
high availability and avoid unexpected power supply failure caused by external power
supply faults, connect to two separate power supply routes.
● To prevent the power supply failure of a storage device from causing other devices
connected to the circuit breaker to abnormally power off, see Table 7-11 for details
about the current specifications for the circuit breaker of external power supplies to
which the storage system is connected.

4.3.8.1 Connecting AC Power Cables

Connect AC power cables of the controller enclosures and disk enclosures of the
storage system.

Prerequisites
The storage system is disconnected from the external power supply.

Context
● Generally, PDUs are divided into groups. Power of each group is determined
by the specifications of protection components configured for each group.
When power cables of storage devices are connected to PDUs, the power of
the devices connected to each group should not exceed the maximum power
of the group, avoiding overload caused by excessive power on one PDU.
● The AC power module of the storage system supports dual power supplies. To
ensure high availability and avoid unexpected power supply failure caused by
external power supply faults, connect to two separate power supply routes. In
this way, if one power supply fails, the other provides power for the device to
ensure power stability.
● The input AC voltage must range from 100 V to 127 V or 200 V to 240 V.
● To avoid unexpected power loss of storage systems connected to the same
circuit breaker when a storage system has failed, the AC of the circuit breaker
must be no less than 10 A.

Procedure
Step 1 Unpack and take out power cables.
Step 2 Connect the controller enclosure to the power sockets on the cabinet through AC
power cables.
Step 3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to connect disk enclosures to the power sockets on the
cabinet through AC power cables.
Step 4 Check whether the AC power cables of the controller enclosure and disk
enclosures are correctly connected to the AC power supply.
● Figure 4-107, Figure 4-108, Figure 4-109, Figure 4-110, Figure 4-111, and
Figure 4-112 show how to connect AC power cables of a controller enclosure.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-107 Connecting AC power cables of a controller enclosure for

OceanStor 2200 V5

Figure 4-108 Connecting AC power cables of a controller enclosure for

OceanStor 2600 V5

Figure 4-109 Connecting AC power cables of a controller enclosure for

OceanStor 5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-110 Connecting AC power cables of a controller enclosure for

OceanStor 5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)

Figure 4-111 Connecting AC power cables of a controller enclosure for

OceanStor 5500 V5, 5500F V5, 5600 V5, 5600F V5, 5800 V5, and 5800F V5

Figure 4-112 Connecting AC power cables of a controller enclosure for

OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5

● Figure 4-113, Figure 4-114, Figure 4-115, and Figure 4-116 show how to
connect AC power cables of a disk enclosure.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-113 Connecting AC power cables of a 2 U SAS disk enclosure

Figure 4-114 Connecting AC power cables of a 4 U SAS disk enclosure

Figure 4-115 Connecting AC power cables of a smart disk enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-116 Connecting AC power cables of a high-density disk enclosure

Step 5 Secure AC power cables.

● For SAS disk enclosures and high-density disk enclosures, secure AC power
cables with retention clips.
a. Open the locker of the retention clip (see a of step 1 in Figure 4-117),
and slide the retention clip to the connection part of the AC power cable
(see b of step 1 in Figure 4-117).

Figure 4-117 Securing an AC power cable using a retention clip

b. Loosen the retention clip. See (2) in Figure 4-117.

c. Close the retention clip to secure the connection part of the AC power
cable. See (3) in Figure 4-117.
NOTE

Before fully closing the retention clip, slide it into a position where it will tightly
secure the power cable.
d. Repeat Step 5.a to Step 5.c to secure other AC power cables.
● For controller enclosures and smart disk enclosures, use velcro tapes to secure
AC power cables.
a. Connect the power cable to the cable port on the AC power module. See
(1) in Figure 4-118.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-118 Use a velcro strap to secure the AC power cable.

b. Secure the power cable using a velcro strap. See (2) in Figure 4-118.
c. Repeat Step 5.a and Step 5.b to secure other AC power cables.
NOTE

Adjust the position of the velcro strap to ensure that the velcro strap can fasten the AC
power cable and the connector of the AC power cable is secure.

Step 6 Lay out and bind AC power cables.

NOTE

For details about how to lay out and bind cables, see 7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

4.3.8.2 Connecting DC Power Cables

When a DC power supply is used to supply power for the storage system, connect
the DC power cables correctly before powering on the device.

Prerequisites
● The storage system is disconnected from the external power supply.
● The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
– DC power cables
– Diagonal pliers
– Phillips screwdriver

Context
● To ensure power reliability, you need to connect the power cables on two
sides of the storage system to two independent power supplies. When one
fails, the other can supply power.
● The input DC voltage ranges from -48 V to -60 V.
● Using DC power helps prolong the service life of devices. DC power is viewed
as the standard power supply in many industries.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the controller enclosure to the smart disk enclosure through DC power
cables.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

1. Remove the plastic insulation tubes on the cord end terminals of the DC
power cables using the diagonal pliers.
2. Install the power cables on the wiring terminals on the power module until
the cables are secured by the spring and cannot be removed. See Figure
4-119.
– Connect the cord end terminal on the negative power cable (blue) to the
NEG(-) wiring terminal on the power module.
– Connect the cord end terminal on the positive power cable (black) to the
RTN(+) wiring terminal on the power module.

Figure 4-119 Connecting the DC power cables of the smart disk enclosure

NOTE

The colors of DC power cables that connect to the anode and cathode of the DC
power supply are subject to the colors of the DC power cables actually configured in
users' equipment rooms.

Step 2 Connect the DC power cables of the SAS disk enclosure.

1. Remove the plastic insulation tubes on the OT terminals of the DC power
cables using the diagonal pliers.
2. Remove the protective cover on the DC power module. See step (1) in Figure
4-120.

Figure 4-120 Connecting the DC power cables

3. Unfasten the screws of the DC power cable using the Phillips screwdriver and
put the screws through the shock absorption sheets, washers, and OT
terminal round holes. Connect the OT terminal of the black cable to the RTN
(+) end, and the OT terminal of the blue cable to the NEG (-) end, and then
fasten the screws. See step (2) in Figure 4-120.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

NOTE

– When unfastening the screws from the DC power cable, prevent the shock
absorption sheets and washers from sliding off.
– The colors of DC power cables that connect to the anode and cathode of the DC
power supply are subject to the colors of the DC power cables actually configured
in users' equipment rooms.
4. Install the protective cover on the DC power module. See step (3) in Figure
4-120.
Step 3 Check whether the DC power cables of the controller enclosure and disk
enclosures are correctly connected to the DC power supply. Figure 4-121, Figure
4-122, Figure 4-123, Figure 4-124, and Figure 4-125 show how to connect DC
power cables.

Figure 4-121 Connecting DC power cables of a controller enclosure for OceanStor

5300 V5 (SAS) and 5300F V5 (SAS)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-122 Connecting DC power cables of a controller enclosure for OceanStor

5300 V5 (NVMe) and 5300F V5 (NVMe)

Figure 4-123 Connecting DC power cables of a smart disk enclosure

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-124 Connecting DC power cables of a 2 U SAS disk enclosure

Figure 4-125 Connecting DC power cables of a 4 U SAS disk enclosure

Step 4 Lay out and bind DC power cables. For details, see 7.8 General Cable Routing
Principles and 7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics.

----End

4.4 Checking Hardware Installation

To ensure proper operation of the storage system, check the hardware installation
after all devices are installed and all cables are routed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Procedure
Step 1 Check the overall operating status of the storage system.

Table 4-4 lists the check items for device installation.

Table 4-4 Device installation checklist

Check Normal Abnormal

Item

● Contro ● Stably installed on the guide ● Devices are slanted.

ller rails without displacement. ● The screws are loose or
enclos ● Tightly screwed. lost.
ure
● Use Huawei-certified disk ● Disk modules for controller
● Disk modules that match the product enclosures or disk
enclos model for controller enclosures enclosures do not pass
ure and disk enclosures. Huawei certification and
● High- ● Ensure that all coffer disk slots do not match the product
densit (slots 0 to 3) in the 2 U model.
y disk controller enclosure have disks. ● Coffer disk slots do not
enclos have disks.
ure ● Ensure that all coffer disk slots
(slots 0 to 3) in the disk ● The type of the four coffer
enclosure that connects to the 4 disks is not the same.
U controller enclosure have ● The vacant disk module
disks. slots of disk enclosures and
● The type of the four coffer disks 2 U controller enclosures
must be the same. have not been equipped
● If disk modules of disk with filler panels.
enclosures and 2 U controller ● The vacant interface
enclosures are not fully module slots of disk
configured, ensure that the enclosures and controller
vacant slots have been equipped enclosures have not been
with filler panels. equipped with filler panels.
● If interface modules of disk
enclosures and controller
enclosures are not fully
configured, ensure that the
vacant slots have been equipped
with filler panels.

Filler The vacant slots in the cabinet are The vacant slots in the
panel covered with filler panels. cabinet are not covered with
filler panels.

Overall ● All devices are stably installed ● One or more devices are
effect without displacement. displaced.
● All devices are tightly screwed. ● One or more devices are
slanted.
● The screws are loose or
lost.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Step 2 Check the cable routing.

Table 4-5 describes the check items for cable routing.

Table 4-5 Cable routing checklist

No. Item

1 The labels of the cables are properly pasted.

2 All cables are arranged smoothly, with no roundabout twists and turns.

3 Cables shall be secured on the beam of the cable ladder.

4 The trough is needed for cabling outside the cabinet. Do not make the
cables overflow the trough.

5 The radius of the routed optical fibers must be greater than or equal to
50 mm.

6 The power cable and the ground cable are bent smoothly.

7 The power cable and the ground cable are connected correctly and
firmly.

8 The ground cable of the cabinet door should be connected correctly and
reliably.

9 The diameters of the power cable and the ground cable meet the
power distribution requirements.

10 The external power cable and ground cable are arranged separately
from signal cables, with a space of larger than 30 mm.

11 If there are many cables, they should be bound neatly in rectangle

shape (or in circular shape for single-core cables).

12 Bend the cables in a radius (larger than 60 mm) as large as possible.

The cables cannot be bound where they are bent.

13 The fiber should not be routed by force or bent unnaturally. The fibers
should not be compressed by other cables after fiber routing.

14 When the power cable or ground cable is connected to an OT terminal

onsite, solder or firm it.

15 Use protection tubes or insulating adhesive plasters to wrap power

cables, naked cables, and OT terminal stems. There should be no bare
copper wires in OT terminals. Spring washers and flat washers should
be installed properly.

16 Properly ground all cabinets and enclosures with metal or partially

metal shells.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

No. Item

17 All cables are properly bound. The space between the cable ties is even,
and the remaining parts of the cable ties are cut off neatly. All cable
ties face the same direction. The overall appearance is neat.

18 Power cables and ground cables use the entire copper core and contain
no joint.

19 Power cables and ground cables should be labeled neatly toward the
same direction for convenient view.

20 The DC power cables are blue and black, whereas the ground cable is
olive or yellow.

----End

4.5 Powering On the Storage System

After hardware installation is complete, power on storage devices and check that
they are working correctly.

NOTE

● In V500R007C70 Kunpeng and later versions, after the first power-on and initialization,
the controller enclosures support remote power-on in later operations. For the first
power-on and initialization, you must use the power button on the controller enclosures.
● To remotely power on multiple controller enclosures of a storage system, ensure that
you have connected the controller enclosures according to the diagrams in 3.1.2.4
(Optional) Connection Planning for Multiple Controller Enclosures.
● For details on remote power-on, see "Powering On the Storage System (Remotely on
the CLI, Applicable to V500R007C70 and Later Versions)" in the Administrator Guide
specific to your product model.

Prerequisites
Ensure that all devices are properly installed and device installation check is
completed. Otherwise, power on storage devices only after they are correctly
installed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Context

NOTICE

● Before powering on a 2 U controller enclosure, ensure that slots 0 to 3 where

coffer disks reside are fully populated with disks.
● Before powering on a 4 U controller enclosure, ensure that it has been
connected to a configuration disk enclosure (the enclosure with coffer disk
identifiers) and slots 0 to 3 where coffer disks reside are fully populated with
disks. The configuration disk enclosure must be a new device that has never
been connected to any controller enclosure.
● Before powering on a storage system, ensure that all expansion cables have
been properly connected. If expansion cable connections are adjusted after a
storage system is powered on, the storage system may malfunction.
● During the power-on, do not remove or insert optical fibers, network cables,
coffer disks, or interface modules to avoid system data loss.
● To avoid electric shocks, do not wear an ESD wrist strap when powering on the
storage device.

If the power of a backup battery unit (BBU) is insufficient, the BBU automatically
charges when the storage system is powered on for the first time, and the
Running/Alarm indicator on the BBU is blinking green. When a BBU is fully
charged, its Running indicator is steady green.
Typically, an AC power distribution box (PDB) is configured on the top of a
cabinet. If an AC PDB is not configured, skip the information related to PDBs.
Figure 4-126 shows an AC PDB.

Figure 4-126 AC PDB

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

NOTE

Correct power-on sequence:

1. Turn on the external power switches corresponding to all the devices.
2. Press the Power button on any controller.
3. Power on switches (if any switch is deployed but not powered on).
4. Power on application servers.

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) If a PDB is configured, check the labels on power cables and match the
power cables with power switches in the PDB.
For example, if the label on the AC power cable connected to a controller
enclosure says PowerBox Output B_8, it indicates that the power cable of the
controller enclosure corresponds to power switch SW8 on module Output B. You
can turn on that power switch to power on the controller enclosure.
Step 2 (Optional) If a PDB is configured, turn on the power switches corresponding to all
the devices in sequence.
Step 3 Press the power button of the controller enclosure.
NOTE

● Install filler panels to the vacant slots, if any, to ensure proper heat dissipation.
● To power on the storage system, press the power button. If the power indicator of the
controller enclosure is blinking green, the storage system is being powered on. Do not
hold down the power button for more than five seconds; otherwise, the storage system
will be powered off.
● The power-on of the storage system takes 15 to 30 minutes.
● After the controller enclosure is powered on, other disk enclosures connected will be
automatically powered on.
● After system power-on, the disk initialization process automatically starts. The time
required for the process is dependent on the quantity of the disks to be initialized.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
NOTE

The following figures and indicators are used only to check whether the system is powered
on properly. For details about indicators, see sections about indicators on components in
the Product Description.

Figure 4-127, Figure 4-128, Figure 4-129, Figure 4-130, Figure 4-131, Figure
4-132, Figure 4-133, and Figure 4-134 show the indicator status after the system
is powered on.

Figure 4-127 Indicators on a controller enclosure (front view)

Controller enclosure/ Alarm/Location Power indicator of the
Smart SAS disk enclosure indicator of the controller enclosure:
disk module: off steady green

Alarm indicator of the

controller enclosure: off

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-128 Indicators on a controller enclosure or smart SAS disk enclosure

(front view)
Controller enclosure/ Alarm/Location indicator Power indicator of the
Smart SAS disk enclosure of the disk module: off controller enclosure:
steady green

Alarm indicator of the

controller enclosure: off

Figure 4-129 Indicators on a controller enclosure or smart SAS disk enclosure

(front view)
Controller enclosure/ Alarm/Location indicator Power indicator of the
Smart SAS disk enclosure of the disk module: off controller enclosure:
steady green

Alarm indicator of the

controller enclosure: off

Figure 4-130 Indicators on a controller enclosure or smart NVMe disk enclosure

(front view)
Controller enclosure/ Alarm/Location indicator Power indicator of the
Smart NVMe disk enclosure of the disk module: off controller enclosure:
steady green

Alarm indicator of the

controller enclosure: off

Figure 4-131 Indicators on a 2 U SAS disk enclosure (front view)

2 U SAS disk Alarm/Location indicator Power indicator of the disk
enclosure of the disk module: off enclosure: steady green

Alarm indicator of the

disk enclosure: off

Figure 4-132 Indicators on a 4 U SAS disk enclosure (front view)

4 U SAS disk Alarm/Location indicator Power indicator of the disk
enclosure of the disk module: off enclosure: steady green

Alarm indicator of the

controller enclosure: off

Figure 4-133 Indicators on a 4 U controller enclosure (front view)

Controller Power indicator of the
enclosure controller enclosure:
steady green

Alarm indicator of the

controller enclosure: off

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-134 Indicators on a high-density disk enclosure (front view)

High-density disk Location indicator of the disk
enclosure enclosure: off
Alarm indicator of the disk
module: off
Power indicator of the disk
module: steady green
Overtemperature alarm
indicator of the disk module: off
Alarm indicator of the disk
enclosure's internal module: off
Alarm indicator of the disk
enclosure's rear module: off

Ensure that the system has been correctly powered on and is working correctly:

NOTE

If data switches are configured, check the status of the indicators on the data switches too.
● The Power indicators on controllers, controller enclosures, and disk enclosures
are steady green.
● The Alarm indicators on controllers, controller enclosures, and disk enclosures
are off.
● The Running indicators on coffer disks are steady green, and the Alarm/
Location indicators are off.
– Disks with coffer disk labels are coffer disks.
– Before services are configured, the Running indicators on the first three
coffer disks are blinking green, and the Alarm/Location indicators are off.
If any Alarm indicator is on, the device is faulty and you need to rectify the fault.
For details about how to rectify faults, see the Troubleshooting Guide of the
storage system. If a power indicator is not steady green, contact Huawei technical
support engineers.

4.6 Installing Filler Panels

After the storage system has been installed, powered on, and is running properly,
install the filler panels for a neat appearance.

Prerequisites
The storage system is correctly powered on, and the status of device indicators are
normal.
The following installation tools and materials have been prepared:
● Filler panels for 2 U devices
● Filler panels for 4 U devices

Procedure
Step 1 Take out a filler panel. Align the upper side of the panel with that of the device.
Step 2 Use the panel to cover the front side of the device, as shown in Figure 4-135 and
Figure 4-136. Then, release the handles.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 4 Hardware Installation

Figure 4-135 Installing a 2 U filler panel for a 2 U device

Figure 4-136 Installing a 4 U filler panel for a 4 U device

Step 3 Verify that the filler panels are properly installed.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

5 Operations After Installation

After hardware installation is complete, initialize the storage system. If multiple

controller enclosures are installed, use SmartKit to expand controllers. If external
key management servers are installed, connect the external key management
servers to the storage system.
5.1 Initializing the Storage System
5.2 (Optional) Deploying Multi-Controller Storage Systems
This section describes how to deploy a storage system that has two or more
controller enclosures.
5.3 (Optional) Installing and Configuring a Key Management Server
5.4 (Optional) Installing Other Software on an Application Server
5.5 Using SmartKit for Deployment Inspection

5.1 Initializing the Storage System

After checking that the storage system is correctly powered on, initialize the
storage system.

5.1.1 Logging In to the Storage System

This section describes how to log in to the storage system.

5.1.1.1 Changing the Initial IP Address of the Management Network Port

over a Serial Port
Modifying IP addresses of management network ports using a serial port is
simpler than using DeviceManager. You can directly log in to a storage device
through serial ports to modify the IP addresses, and are not required to configure
connectivity between the storage device and the temporary maintenance terminal
used for initial configuration.

Prerequisites
The maintenance terminal has been connected to the serial port on the storage
device through a serial cable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Context
● For a 2 U controller enclosure, the default IP addresses of the management
network ports on controller A and controller B are 192.168.128.101 and
192.168.128.102, respectively. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
● For a 4 U controller enclosure, the default IP address of network port 0 on
management module 0 is 192.168.128.101 and that of network port 0 on
management module 1 is 192.168.128.102. The default subnet mask is
255.255.0.0.
● When a single controller enclosure is deployed, the default internal heartbeat
IP addresses are 127.127.127.10 and 127.127.127.11 for a dual-controller
storage system, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0; the default internal
heartbeat IP addresses are 127.127.127.10, 127.127.127.11, 127.127.127.12,
and 127.127.127.13 for a four-controller storage system, and the subnet
mask is 255.255.255.0.
NOTE

When multiple controller enclosures are deployed, the default internal heartbeat IP
addresses of each controller enclosure are the same as those when a single controller
enclosure is deployed.
● The default IP address of the maintenance network port is 172.31.128.101 or
172.31.128.102, and the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
After the controller enclosure is connected to the maintenance terminal using a
serial cable, you can log in to the CLI of the storage device using a terminal
program (such as PuTTY).

NOTE

● This document uses PuTTY as an example. You can download PuTTY from the chiark
website.
● To ensure successful login to the storage system, you are advised to use PuTTY of the
latest version.

Precautions
● After the IP addresses of the management network ports are modified,
communication between the maintenance terminal and the storage device
will be lost. Therefore, you are advised to first modify the IP addresses of
controllers' management network ports that are not directly connected to the
maintenance terminal.
● The IP addresses of management network ports and internal heartbeat IP
addresses must be on different network segments. When a single controller
enclosure is deployed, for a dual-controller system, you cannot use IP
addresses that belong to the 127.127.127.XXX network segment; for a four-
controller storage system, you cannot set IP addresses that belong to the
127.127.127.XXX, 172.16.126.XXX, 172.16.127.XXX, and 172.16.128.XXX
network segments.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● Heartbeats are packets transmitted between two devices for them to judge the
availability of the peer device. Heartbeats do not require acknowledgement. They are
usually used for node communication, fault diagnosis, and event triggering in an HA
system.
● Internal heartbeat links are established between controllers for these controllers to
detect each other's working status. You do not need to separately connect cables. In
addition, internal heartbeat IP addresses are configured before delivery, and cannot be
modified.
● When multiple controller enclosures are deployed, the default internal heartbeat IP
addresses of each controller enclosure are the same as those when a single controller
enclosure is deployed.
● The IP addresses of both management network ports and those of
maintenance network ports must be on different network segments. You
cannot use IP addresses that belong to the 172.31.XXX.XXX. Otherwise, route
conflicts may occur. You are advised to connect only the management
network port to the network.
● By default, IP addresses of the management network ports and those of the
service network ports are on different network segments. If they are in the
same network segment, some functions of the storage system may be
unavailable. It is strongly recommended that you do not set them on the
same network segment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run PuTTY.
The PuTTY Configuration dialog box is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-1 PuTTY Configuration dialog box

Step 2 Set Connection type to Serial. In the Serial line text box, enter the name of the
serial port that connects the maintenance terminal to the storage system, for
example, COM1. In Speed, enter 115200.

You can query the serial port that connects the maintenance terminal to the
storage system as follows (Windows 7 is used as an example):

1. Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the maintenance terminal

and choose Manage from the shortcut menu.
2. In the navigation tree of the Computer Manager dialog box, choose System
Tools > Device Manager.
3. Click Ports. The serial port that connects the maintenance terminal to the
storage system, for example, COM1.
There may be multiple serial port names, such as COM1, COM2, and COM3,
on the maintenance terminal. Try these ports until you can successfully log in
to the storage system.

Step 3 Log in to the serial port.

1. Click Open.
If the connectivity between the maintenance terminal and controller is
normal, information similar to Figure 5-2 is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-2 Successful connection between the controller and the maintenance
terminal

2. Enter the username and password for logging in to the storage device.

NOTE

● The default user name is admin. For the default password, refer to the OceanStor
V500R007 Account List.
● You are advised to change the default login password immediately after you log in to
the storage system for the first time and periodically change the password since then.
For details about how to change the login password, see the Administrator Guide.
● For security reasons, the entered password is not displayed.

If the login is successful, the following message is displayed:

Authorized users only. All activity may be monitored and reported.

WARNING: You have accessed the system.

You are required to have a personal authorisation from the system administrator before you use this
computer. Unauthorised access to or misuse of this system is prohibited.

System Name : xxxx

Health Status : Normal
Running Status : Normal
Total Capacity : 20.241TB
SN : xxxx
Location :
Product Model : xxxx
Product Version : xxxx
Time : xxxx-xx-xx/16:13:47 UTC+08:00
Patch Version :

NOTE

Values of System Name, Product Model, and Product Version vary according to the login
device. If the login fails and the system enters the minisystem mode, continue by following
the prompts that appear.

Step 4 Change the IP addresses of management network ports.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTICE

Ensure that the IP addresses of the two management network ports are modified.

Run the change system management_ip command to change the IP address of

the management network port. Table 5-1 describes the parameter settings of the
command.

Table 5-1 Command syntax and parameters

Syntax Parameters

change system ● eth_port_id

management_ipeth_port_i Indicates the port ID. To obtain the value, run
dip_typemask [gateway] show system management_ip.
● ip_type
Specifies the IP address type. The value can be
ipv4_address or ipv6_address.
● mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the management
network port.
● gateway
Gateway of the management network port.

For example:
Set the IPv4 address of the management network port on management module 0
to 172.16.190.2, subnet mask to 255.255.0.0, and gateway address to 172.16.0.1.
admin:/>change system management_ip eth_port_id=CTE0.SMM0.MGMT0 ip_type=ipv4_address
ipv4_address=172.16.190.2 mask=255.255.0.0 gateway_ipv4=172.16.0.1
WARNING: You are going to modify the network address of network port. If you enter an unavailable
network address, the O&M interface of the storage system is inaccessible.
Suggestion: Before you perform this operation, ensure that you have entered an available network address.

Have you read warning message carefully?(y/n)y

Command executed successfully.

NOTE

● After changing the IP address of the management network port, run the show system
management_ip command to verify the IP address information about the management
network port.
● Modifying the IP address of a management port may disconnect the maintenance
terminal from the storage system. Do not modify the IP address of a management
network port unless necessary.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

5.1.1.2 Logging In to DeviceManager

DeviceManager is a piece of device management software developed by Huawei
and has been loaded to storage systems before delivery. To log in to
DeviceManager, choose either of the two ways: through the web or using a tablet.

5.1.1.2.1 Logging In to DeviceManager Through Web

DeviceManager is a device management program developed by Huawei.
DeviceManager has been loaded to storage systems before factory delivery. You
can log in to DeviceManager through a browser on any maintenance terminal
connected to the storage system by using the management network port IP
address of the storage system and the local or domain user name.

Prerequisites
The temporary maintenance terminal used for initial configuration has been
connected to the storage device's management port, and the maintenance
terminal IP address and management port's default IP address are on the same
network segment.
Check that the maintenance terminal meets the requirements of DeviceManager
before using it.
● Operating system and browser versions of the maintenance terminal are
supported.
DeviceManager supports multiple types of operating systems and browsers.
For details, access Huawei Storage Interoperability Navigator to query.
● The maintenance terminal communicates with the storage system properly.
● The super administrator can only log in to the storage system as a local user.
● To use a lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP) domain user account to
log in to DeviceManager, you must configure the LDAP domain server first,
then set the LDAP server parameters and create an LDAP domain user
account on the storage system.
● By default, DeviceManager allows a maximum of 32 users to log in
concurrently.

Context
● DeviceManager only supports TLS protocols 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3.
NOTE

The super administrator can run change devicemanager tls min_version=? to change the
earliest version of TLS supported by DeviceManager. Then, the super administrator must
run reboot storage service service_name=devicemanager to restart DeviceManager for
the change to take effect.
● For a 2 U controller enclosure, the default IP addresses of the management
network ports on controller A and controller B are 192.168.128.101 and
192.168.128.102, respectively. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
● For a 4 U controller enclosure, the default IP address of network port 0 on
management module 0 is 192.168.128.101 and that of network port 0 on
management module 1 is 192.168.128.102. The default subnet mask is
255.255.0.0.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

● The default user name of the super administrator is admin. For the default
password, refer to the OceanStor V500R007 Account List.
● This section uses the Windows operating system as an example to explain
how to log in to DeviceManager. The login operations on other operating
systems are similar.
● If a user does not perform any operations after logging in to the system for a
period longer than the timeout limit (the limit is 30 minutes by default and
modifiable), the system logs out automatically.
● If an account is not used to log in to the system for a certain period of time
(the period is 60 days by default and modifiable), it will be locked and can
only be unlocked by the super administrator.

Procedure
Step 1 Run Internet Explorer on the maintenance terminal.

Step 2 Enter https://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:8088 in the address box and press Enter.

NOTE

● XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX indicates the IP address of the management network port of the

storage system.
● In an environment with a firewall, when the system externally provides web services,
you need to enable port 8088.
● The "This page can't be displayed" error may be displayed if you log in to
DeviceManager using Internet Explorer. In this case, update your Internet Explorer, use
any other browser supported by DeviceManager, or use CLI commands to change the
cipher suite to the compatible mode. For details, see 6.7 What Should I Do If Login to
DeviceManager over Internet Explorer Failed?
● Your web browser may display a message indicating that the website has a security
certificate error. If the IP address is correct, you can neglect the prompt and continue to
access the storage system. If you want to fix this error, you can have the certificate
request file signed by a third-party CA center or use your own CA certificates. For details
about how to use your own CA certificate for signature, see 6.5 How Can I Use Self-
Signed Certificates to Fix the Privacy Error Displayed When I Attempt to Log In to
DeviceManager?
● If you have a usable security certificate, you are advised to use corresponding
commands to import the certificate to improve system security. For details about the
corresponding commands, see the Command Reference.

Step 3 (Optional) Set a login mode and language.

1. Click Advanced.
2. Select a login mode from the Authentication mode list.
– Local user: You will log in to the storage system in local authentication
mode.
NOTE

The super administrator can only log in to the storage system as a local user.
– LDAP user: Log in to the storage system using LDAP domain
authentication.
You can log in to the storage system in LDAP domain authentication
mode only after the LDAP server is properly configured.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

3. Choose a language from the Language list.

NOTE

DeviceManager supports two languages: English and simplified Chinese.

Step 4 Type your user name and password in Username and Password respectively.
NOTE

● If you enter wrong passwords for consecutive two times, you need to enter the
verification code. In Verification Code, enter the correct verification code.
● If LDAP User is selected, enter the domain user name and password as well as the
domain name.
– For a domain user of domain authentication server 0, the user can log in to
DeviceManager of a storage system typing domain or a combination of the dc
field in the domain authentication server's base DN in Domain Name.
– For a domain user of domain authentication server 1, 2, or 3, the user can log in to
DeviceManager of a storage system only typing a combination of the dc field in
the domain authentication server's base DN in Domain Name.
1. If the base DN of the domain authentication server contains only one dc field, the dc
field is used as the combination of the dc field in the domain authentication server's
base DN.
For example, if the base DN of the domain authentication server is
ou=applications,dc=bigcorp, bigcorp is the combination of the dc field in the
domain authentication server's base DN.
2. If the base DN of the domain authentication server contains multiple dc fields, they
are combined and then separated by a period (.) to serve as the combination of the
dc field in the domain authentication server's base DN.
For example, if the base DN of the domain authentication server is
ou=applications,dc=bigcorp,dc=com, bigcorp.com is the combination of the dc
field in the domain authentication server's base DN.
● The default user name of the local super administrator is admin. For the default
password, refer to the OceanStor V500R007 Account List.
● If you forget the password as an administrator or a read-only user, the super
administrator can run change user to reset the password. If you forget the password as
a super administrator (admin by default), the root administrator _super_admin can log
in to the CLI through a serial port and run initpasswd to reset the password. For details,
see "Resetting the Password of an Administrator or a Read-Only User" or "Resetting the
Password of a Super Administrator" in the Administrator Guide.
● If you enter incorrect passwords for a specified number of times (3 by default, equal to
the value specified in Number of Incorrect Passwords on the Login Policy page), the
account is automatically locked for 5 minutes. For details on setting the lock period, see
"Configuring a Security Policy for System User" in the Administrator Guide.
● You are advised to change the default login password immediately after you log in to
the storage system for the first time and periodically change the password since then.
For details about how to change the password, see "Changing Password" in the
Administrator Guide.

Step 5 Click Log In.

The DeviceManager main window is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● To log out of DeviceManager, click in the upper right corner.

● To view online help, click in the upper right corner. The online help provides details
about each step and operation.

Figure 5-3 shows the DeviceManager main window.

Figure 5-3 DeviceManager main window

Table 5-2 describes DeviceManager components.

Table 5-2 DeviceManager components

No. Name Description

1 Function Displays the graphical user interface for completing a

pane specific activity on DeviceManager. The function pane
includes the following parts:
● Basic information: You can check the basic device
information such as the device SN and version.
● Alarms: You can check all current alarms in the system.
● System Capacity Trend: You can check the current free
capacity and used capacity.
● Performance: You can check the performance trend of
controllers.

2 Status bar Shows the name and login time of the currently logged-in
user.

3 Navigation Lists available logical functional modules of the storage

bar device.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

No. Name Description

4 Logout, Provides access to logout, help, and language.

help, and NOTE
language DeviceManager supports two languages: English and simplified
area Chinese.

5 Fault Displays different severities of device alarms, which can be

statistics checked by users to know the running status of the storage
pane device.

----End

5.1.1.2.2 Logging In to DeviceManager Through a Tablet

You can use a tablet to log in to a storage system and conduct basic maintenance
operations, such as checking alarms, performance statistics, and the basic
information of the storage system.

Prerequisites
A Wi-Fi network that is connected to the storage system's management network
is available onsite.

Context
● DeviceManager only supports TLS protocols 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3.
● Customers can use a tablet to log in to the storage system through their
wireless routers. You can use iPad Air (Safari) and HUAWEI MediaPad 10 FHD
(Chrome) to log in to the storage system. This section uses iPad as an
example to describe how to log in to DeviceManager. The login operations on
other operating systems are similar. The login operations on other mobile
terminals are similar.
● For a 2 U controller enclosure, the default IP addresses of the management
network ports on controller A and controller B are 192.168.128.101 and
192.168.128.102, respectively. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
● For a 4 U controller enclosure, the default IP address of network port 0 on
management module 0 is 192.168.128.101 and that of network port 0 on
management module 1 is 192.168.128.102. The default subnet mask is
255.255.0.0.
● The default user name of the super administrator is admin. For the default
password, refer to the OceanStor V500R007 Account List.
● By default, DeviceManager allows a maximum of 32 users to log in
concurrently.
● If a user does not perform any operations after logging in to the system for a
period longer than the timeout limit (the limit is 30 minutes by default and
modifiable), the system logs out automatically.
● If an account is not used to log in to the system for a certain period of time
(the period is 60 days by default and modifiable), it will be locked and can
only be unlocked by the super administrator.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the iPad to the Wi-Fi network.
1. On the iPad desktop, choose Settings > WLAN.
The WLAN page is displayed.
2. In the CHOOSE A NETWORK area, select the Wi-Fi network.
The Enter Password page is displayed.
3. Enter the password of the Wi-Fi network in the Password text box.
4. Click Join.
The iPad is connected to the Wi-Fi network.

Step 2 Log in to DeviceManager.

1. On the iPad desktop, click Safari.
2. Enter https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:8088/ismpad/login.html in Address and click
Go.
NOTE

– XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX indicates the IP address of the management network port of

the storage system.
– In an environment with a firewall, when the system externally provides web
services, you need to enable port 8088.
– Your web browser may display a message indicating that the website has a security
certificate error. If the IP address is correct, you can neglect the prompt and
continue to access the storage system.
– If you have a usable security certificate, you are advised to use corresponding
commands to import the certificate to improve system security. For details about
the corresponding commands, see the Command Reference.
3. (Optional) Select a language from the Language check box.
NOTE

DeviceManager supports two languages: English and simplified Chinese.

4. Type your user name and password in Username and Password respectively.
NOTE

– The default user name is admin. For the default password, refer to the OceanStor
V500R007 Account List.
– If a verification code is required, enter the correct verification code.
– If you forget the password as an administrator or a read-only user, the super
administrator can run change user to reset the password. If you forget the
password as a super administrator (admin by default), the root administrator
_super_admin can log in to the CLI through a serial port and run initpasswd to
reset the password. For details, see "Resetting the Password of an Administrator or
a Read-Only User" or "Resetting the Password of a Super Administrator" in the
Administrator Guide.
– You are advised to change the default login password immediately after you log in
to the storage system for the first time and periodically change the password since
then. For details about how to change the password, see "Changing Password" in
the Administrator Guide.
5. Click Login.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

The DeviceManager main window is displayed.

----End

5.1.1.3 (Optional) Changing IP Addresses of Management Network Ports

Using DeviceManager
If the IP address of the management network port has been configured on the
storage device through the serial port, skip this step.

Prerequisites
The temporary maintenance terminal used for initial configuration has been
connected to the storage device's management port, and the maintenance
terminal IP address and management port's default IP address are on the same
network segment.

Context
● For a 2 U controller enclosure, the default IP addresses of the management
network ports on controller A and controller B are 192.168.128.101 and
192.168.128.102, respectively. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
● For a 4 U controller enclosure, the default IP addresses of the management
network ports on management modules 0 and 1 are 192.168.128.101 and
192.168.128.102, respectively. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.
● When a single controller enclosure is deployed, the default internal heartbeat
IP addresses are 127.127.127.10 and 127.127.127.11 for a dual-controller
storage system, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0; the default internal
heartbeat IP addresses are 127.127.127.10, 127.127.127.11, 127.127.127.12,
and 127.127.127.13 for a four-controller storage system, and the subnet
mask is 255.255.255.0.
NOTE

When multiple controller enclosures are deployed, the default internal heartbeat IP
addresses of each controller enclosure are the same as those when a single controller
enclosure is deployed.
● The default IP address of the maintenance network port is 172.31.128.101 or
172.31.128.102, and the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.

Precautions
● After the IP addresses of the management network ports are modified,
communication between the maintenance terminal and the storage device
will be lost. Therefore, you are advised to first modify the IP addresses of
controllers' management network ports that are not directly connected to the
maintenance terminal.
● The IP addresses of management network ports and internal heartbeat IP
addresses must be on different network segments. When a single controller
enclosure is deployed, for a dual-controller system, you cannot use IP
addresses that belong to the 127.127.127.XXX network segment; for a four-
controller storage system, you cannot set IP addresses that belong to the
127.127.127.XXX, 172.16.126.XXX, 172.16.127.XXX, and 172.16.128.XXX
network segments.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● Heartbeats are packets transmitted between two devices for them to judge the
availability of the peer device. Heartbeats do not require acknowledgement. They are
usually used for node communication, fault diagnosis, and event triggering in an HA
system.
● Internal heartbeat links are established between controllers for these controllers to
detect each other's working status. You do not need to separately connect cables. In
addition, internal heartbeat IP addresses are configured before delivery, and cannot be
modified.
● When multiple controller enclosures are deployed, the default internal heartbeat IP
addresses of each controller enclosure are the same as those when a single controller
enclosure is deployed.
● The IP addresses of both management network ports and those of
maintenance network ports must be on different network segments. You
cannot use IP addresses that belong to the 172.31.XXX.XXX. Otherwise, route
conflicts may occur. You are advised to connect only the management
network port to the network.
● By default, IP addresses of the management network ports and those of the
service network ports are on different network segments. If they are in the
same network segment, some functions of the storage system may be
unavailable. It is strongly recommended that you do not set them on the
same network segment.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 In the navigation pane on the right, click .

Step 3 Click the controller enclosure where the management network port to be modified
resides.

Step 4 Click to switch to the rear view.

Step 5 Click the management network port to be modified.

NOTICE

After the IP addresses of the management network ports are modified,

communication between the maintenance terminal and the storage device will be
lost. Therefore, you are advised to first modify the IP addresses of controllers'
management network ports that are not directly connected to the maintenance
terminal.

The Manage Port dialog box is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 6 Change the IP addresses of management network ports.

1. Click Modify.
2. In IPv4 Address or IPv6 Address, enter the IP address of the management
network port.
3. In Subnet Mask or Prefix, enter the subnet mask or prefix of the
management IP address.
4. In IPv4 Gateway or IPv6 Gateway, enter the gateway of the management IP
address.

Step 7 Confirm IP address modification.

1. Click Apply.
The security alert dialog box is displayed.
2. Confirm the information in the dialog box and select I have read and
understand the consequences associated with performing this operation.
3. Click OK.
The Success dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeded.
4. Click OK.

Step 8 Repeat Step 3 to Step 7 to change the IP addresses of other management

network ports.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

5.1.1.4 Logging In to the CLI

After logging in to the CLI of a storage system, you can query, set, manage, and
maintain the storage system. On any maintenance terminal connected to a
storage system, you can log in to the CLI by using PuTTY to access the IP
addresses of the management network ports on the controllers of the storage
system. Two authentication modes for a CLI login are Username + Password and
Public Key. This section describes how to use the two authentication modes to log
in to the CLI.

5.1.1.4.1 Logging In to the CLI (User Name + Password)

After logging in to the CLI of a storage system, you can query, set, manage, and
maintain the storage system. This document uses Windows Server 2008 as an
example. The operation procedure may vary according to the operating system.

You can log in to the storage system by either of the following methods:

● Through a serial port

After the controller enclosure is connected to the maintenance terminal using
a serial cable, you can log in to the CLI of the storage device using a terminal
program (such as PuTTY).
● Through a management network port
– You can log in to the CLI using an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
– After connecting the controller enclosure to the maintenance terminal by
using a network cable, you can log in to the storage system by using any
type of remote login software that supports the SSH, for example, PuTTY.
– For a 2 U controller enclosure, the default IP addresses of the
management network ports on controller A and controller B are
192.168.128.101 and 192.168.128.102, respectively. The default subnet
mask is 255.255.0.0.
– For a 4 U controller enclosure, the default IP address of network port 0
on management module 0 is 192.168.128.101 and that of network port
0 on management module 1 is 192.168.128.102. The default subnet
mask is 255.255.0.0.
– The IP address of the controller enclosure's management network port
must be in the same network segment as that of the maintenance
terminal. Otherwise, you need to modify the IP address of the
management network port through a serial port by running the change
system management_ip command.

Logging In to the CLI Through a Serial Port

NOTE

● This document uses PuTTY as an example. You can download PuTTY from the chiark
website.
● To ensure successful login to the storage system, you are advised to use PuTTY of the
latest version.

1. Run PuTTY.
The PuTTY Configuration dialog box is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-4 PuTTY Configuration dialog box

2. Select Serial from the Connection type drop-down list box, and enter
115200 in the Speed text box.
3. Click Open. The following information is displayed.
Storage login:

4. Enter the user name and password as prompted. To ensure system security,
you are required to change the password upon your initial login. If the login is
successful, the following information is displayed.
Storage login: admin

Authorized users only. All activity may be monitored and reported.

Using keyboard-interactive authentication.
password:

WARNING: You have accessed the system operated by Huawei.

You are required to have a personal authorisation from the system administrator before you use this
computer. Unauthorised access to or misuse of this system is prohibited.

For security purposes, please change the initial password and log in to the system using the new
password.
Old password:*************
New password:**************
Reenter password:**************

System Name : Huawei.Storage

Health Status : Normal
Running Status : Normal
Total Capacity : 6.240TB
SN : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Location :

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Product Model : XXXXX

Product Version : XXXXX
Time : XXXX-XX-XX/16:38:22 +08:00
admin:/>

NOTE

● The default user name of the super administrator is admin. For the default password,
refer to the OceanStor V500R007 Account List.
● Values of Product Model and Product Version vary according to the login device.
● To ensure system security, you are advised to change your login password periodically by
running the change user_password command.
● If you forget the password as an administrator or a read-only user, the super
administrator can run change user to reset the password. If you forget the password as
a super administrator (admin by default), the root administrator _super_admin can log
in to the CLI through a serial port and run initpasswd to reset the password.
● When use LDAP User:
● For a domain user of domain authentication server 0, the user can log in to the CLI
of a storage system by typing domain/domain user name or a combination of the
dc field in the domain authentication server's base DN/domain user name.
● For a domain user of domain authentication server 1, 2, or 3, the user can log in to
the CLI of a storage system only by typing a combination of the dc field in the
domain authentication server's base DN/domain user name.
1. If the base DN of the domain authentication server contains only one dc field, the dc
field is used as the combination of the dc field in the domain authentication server's
base DN.
For example, if the base DN of the domain authentication server is
ou=applications,dc=bigcorp, bigcorp is the combination of the dc field in the
domain authentication server's base DN.
2. If the base DN of the domain authentication server contains multiple dc fields, they
are combined and then separated by a period (.) to serve as the combination of the
dc field in the domain authentication server's base DN.
For example, if the base DN of the domain authentication server is
ou=applications,dc=bigcorp,dc=com, bigcorp.com is the combination of the dc
field in the domain authentication server's base DN.

Logging In to the CLI Through a Management Network Port

NOTE

● This document uses PuTTY as an example. You can download PuTTY from the chiark
website.
● To ensure successful login to the storage system, you are advised to use PuTTY of the
latest version.

1. Run PuTTY.
The PuTTY Configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-5 PuTTY Configuration dialog box

2. Select Session. In the Specify the destination you want to connect to area,
enter the IP address (for example, 192.168.6.96) of the storage device's
management network port that connects to the maintenance terminal in
Host Name (or IP address) and set Connection type to SSH.
3. Click Open. The following information is displayed.
login as:
4. Enter the user name and password as prompted. To ensure system security,
you are required to change the password upon your initial login. If the login is
successful, the following information is displayed.
login as: admin

Authorized users only. All activity may be monitored and reported.

Using keyboard-interactive authentication.
password:

WARNING: You have accessed the system operated by Huawei.

You are required to have a personal authorisation from the system administrator before you use this
computer. Unauthorised access to or misuse of this system is prohibited.

For security purposes, please change the initial password and log in to the system using the new
password.
Old password:*************
New password:**************
Reenter password:**************

System Name : Huawei.Storage

Health Status : Normal
Running Status : Normal
Total Capacity : 6.240TB

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

SN : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Location :
Product Model : XXXXX
Product Version : XXXXX
Time : XXXX-XX-XX/16:38:22 +08:00
admin:/>

NOTE

● The default user name of the super administrator is admin. For the default password,
refer to the OceanStor V500R007 Account List.
● Values of Product Model and Product Version vary according to the login device.
● To ensure system security, you are advised to change your login password periodically by
running the change user_password command.
● If you forget the password as an administrator or a read-only user, the super
administrator can run change user to reset the password. If you forget the password as
a super administrator (admin by default), the root administrator _super_admin can log
in to the CLI through a serial port and run initpasswd to reset the password.
● When LDAP User is used:
● For a domain user of domain authentication server 0, the user can log in to the CLI
of a storage system by typing domain/domain user name or a combination of the
dc field in the domain authentication server's base DN/domain user name.
● For a domain user of domain authentication server 1, 2, or 3, the user can log in to
the CLI of a storage system only by typing a combination of the dc field in the
domain authentication server's base DN/domain user name.
1. If the base DN of the domain authentication server contains only one dc field, the dc
field is used as the combination of the dc field in the domain authentication server's
base DN.
For example, if the base DN of the domain authentication server is
ou=applications,dc=bigcorp, bigcorp is the combination of the dc field in the
domain authentication server's base DN.
2. If the base DN of the domain authentication server contains multiple dc fields, they
are combined and then separated by a period (.) to serve as the combination of the
dc field in the domain authentication server's base DN.
For example, if the base DN of the domain authentication server is
ou=applications,dc=bigcorp,dc=com, bigcorp.com is the combination of the dc
field in the domain authentication server's base DN.

5.1.1.4.2 Logging In to the CLI (Public Key)

This section uses PuTTY as an example to describe how to generate public and
private keys as well as configure public key authentication to log in to the CLI.

Prerequisites
● Only a super administrator has the permission to modify users' authentication
mode for logging to the CLI.
● Public key authentication for logging to the CLI is configured for local users
only, not for domain users.

Precautions
● After a private key is generated, keep it secure.
● Change the public key periodically. Use the new private-public key pair for
login authentication to improve system security.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Procedure
Step 1 Generate a private-public key pair for a local user.
1. Run the puttygen.exe file.
Go to the PuTTY Key Generator main window, as shown in Figure 5-6.

Figure 5-6 PuTTY Key Generator main window

2. In the Parameters area, set Type of key to generate to SSH-2 RSA or SSH-2
DSA, and set Number of bits in a generated key to an integer from 2048 to
8192.
3. Click Generate and move the cursor over the blank area in the lower part of
the Key area to generate a public key.
The public key will be displayed in the area, as shown in Figure 5-7.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-7 Generating the public key

4. Copy and save the public key to a local path.

5. (Optional) In Key passphrase, enter a password to encrypt the private key. In
Confirm passphrase, enter the password again.
NOTE

For security of the private key file, you are advised to configure a secure password to
encrypt the file.
6. Select an appropriate method to generate the private key file. The method
varies according to the tools used to log in to the CLI.
– If you use PuTTY to log in to the CLI, click Save private key and save the
private key file to a local path, as shown in Figure 5-8.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-8 Generating the private key

– If you use other tools to log in to the CLI, choose Conversions > Export
OpenSSH key and save the private key file to a local path, as shown in
Figure 5-9.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-9 Generating the private key using other tools

Step 2 Modify the login authentication mode of local users.

1. Log in to the CLI of a storage system as the super administrator.
2. Run the change user_ssh_auth_info general user_name=test123
auth_mode=publickey command to change the authentication mode to
public key. In the command, user_name indicates the user whose login
authentication mode is to be modified.
3. Copy the locally saved public key to Public key on the CLI as instructed, and
press Enter.
After successful command execution, the user's private key can successfully
match the public key for logging to the CLI.

admin:/>change user_ssh_auth_info general user_name=test123 auth_mode=publickey

CAUTION:Only public keys generated using the SSH-2 RSA/DSA encryption algorithm and using keys
whose lengths range from 2048 to 8192 bits are supported.
Public key:ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQPLuhb/
KuHbyZi1n7yX6N3v5KG0JX8XdDnX0dfhN4yP7V
+WXeqRt93YGepnsxIuvve1QCms3jxT8uy2kDMwRY6opLRV2qh5QCk1M54owpdnjwphs1g2oKyddt5iZ7xl
0svZU7gfR2qP4WgGI8lBa9rA8bQlZWOd
+mW6OJ80Wey37FcyZwNJpRNciTWfg2ju2sQuuvmtmum8hALQu930LbRWmTTtP33IAW/
a1LMXjeEj49yhAAfL5OXVvyGMvDi3UfZJmWUZMF6eAG8joSiM50K8QuW7YUzW43t1LAXfGa7wBsp2u6
HvckMXxzyr/3tanHkc1nuGZ55+Byw9mbnNn2Z root@Storage
Command executed successfully.

Step 3 Configure PuTTY and log in to the storage system.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

1. Start PuTTY.
The PuTTY Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Session. In the right pane, type the IP address of a storage system's
management network port in the Host Name (or IP address) text box. Set
Port and Connection type to 22 and SSH respectively.
3. Choose Connection > Data. In the Login details text box in the right pane,
type the user name of the login authentication mode to be modified.
4. Choose Connection > SSH > Auth. In the right pane, click Browse. Select and
open the locally saved private key file.
5. Click Open to log in to the CLI.

NOTE

If the password of the private key is encrypted in Step 1.5, type the password when logging
in to the CLI, and then press Enter.
Using username "test123".

Authorized users only. All activities may be monitored and reported.

Authenticating with public key "imported-openssh-key"
Passphrase for key "imported-openssh-key":
Last login: XX XX XX XX:XX:XX XXXX from 192.168.18.158

WARNING: You have accessed the system.

You are required to have a personal authorisation from the system administrator before you use this
computer. Unauthorised access to or misuse of this system is prohibited.

System Name : Huawei.Storage

Health Status : Normal
Running Status : Normal
Total Capacity : 4.247TB
SN : XXXXXXXXXX
Location :
Product Model : XXXX
Product Version : VX00R00XC00
Time : XXXX-XX-XX/XX:XX:XX UTC+08:00
Patch Version :
test123:/>

----End

Follow-up Procedure
To change a user's login authentication mode to Username + Password, run the
change user_ssh_auth_info general user_name=test123 auth_mode=password
command and use the original password to log in to the CLI of a storage system.

5.1.2 Initializing a Storage Device

Use the initial configuration wizard to initialize a storage device, that is, configure
the basic information, device time, disk domains, and alarm notification for the
storage device as well as manage license files of the storage device.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Initial Configuration.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 3 On the Basic Information page, configure basic information for the storage
device.
1. In Device Name, type a name for the storage device.
– The name contains 1 to 127 characters.
– The name can contain only letters, digits, periods (.), underscores (_), and
hyphens (-).
2. In Device Location, type a geographical location for the device.
The location contains 1 to 511 characters.
3. (Optional) Change the password of the login user.
a. Click Modify.
b. In Old Password, type the current password for logging in to the device.
c. Type a new password in New Password and Confirm Password.

NOTE

The password must meet the following complexity requirements:

– Contains 8 to 16 characters.
– Contains special characters, including !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^`{_|}~ and spaces.
– Contains any two types of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, and digits.
– Cannot contain more than three same consecutive characters.
– Cannot be the same as the user name or reverse user name.
You can modify the password policy in Configuring Security Policy.

Step 4 Click Next and configure the device time on the Device Time page.

Use one of the following methods to configure the time:

● Select Synchronize client time to synchronize the device time with the
existing client.
● Select Set NTP automatic synchronization to synchronize the device time
with the network time protocol (NTP) server.
NOTE

● NTP is an application-layer protocol that is used to synchronize time between a

distributed time server and a client. Its implementation is based on Internet Protocol
(IP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
● For detailed operations of configuring automatic synchronization of the NTP server
time, see section 5.1.9 (Optional) Configuring the NTP Service.
● Select Manual to modify the time and time zone of the storage device.
a. Click Modify.
The Modify Time dialog box is displayed.
b. Modify Date, Time, and Current Time Zone as required, and click OK.
A security alert is displayed.
c. Select I have read and understand the consequences associated with
performing this operation, and click OK.
The Success dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
succeeded.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

Select Do not adjust the current time on the device if you do not want to modify the
device time.

Step 5 Click Next. On the Configure Disk Domain page, configure the disk domain.
You can configure available disks in the disk domain in either of the following
ways:
● If you select Yes. The system will automatically configure the disk domain,
the system automatically completes disk domain configuration.
NOTE

You can view the number of disks at each layer in the disk domain.
● If you select No. I want to manually configure the disk domain, you need
to manually configure the disk domain.
Step 6 Click Next to configure alarm notification on the Alarm Notification page.
For details about Alarm Notification settings, see 5.1.6 Configuring Alarm and
Event Handling Policies.
Step 7 Click Finish.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the initial configuration is completed.
Step 8 Click OK.

----End

5.1.3 Applying for a License

A license file is a credential that entitles you to use a basic or value-added feature.
Apply for licenses based on your service needs. The license application process is
completed on the Electronic Software Delivery Platform (ESDP). After the
application is successful, import the license to your device.

5.1.3.1 Preparing for License Application

Before applying for a license, make preparations to facilitate the license
application.
Table 5-3 describes the preparations for license application.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-3 Preparations for license application

Item Description

GTS permission for the ESDP Users who have the GTS permission can
(applicable to Huawei service apply for licenses following instructions in
engineers) 5.1.3.2.1 Applying for a License in
Entitlement Activation Mode. If you do
not have GTS permission, click Permission
Application in the left navigation tree of
the ESDP home page and complete the
permission application.

ASP or Guest permission for the Users who have the ASP or Guest
ESDP (applicable to Huawei permission can apply for licenses following
partners or customers) instructions in 5.1.3.2.2 Applying for a
License in Password Activation Mode.
Click Register Now on the ESDP home
page and complete related registration
information. Then you are granted the ASP
or Guest permission.

Equipment serial number (ESN) An ESN is a unique character string that

identifies a device. It ensures that software
is licensed to the specified device. You can
obtain an ESN in the following ways:
● View the ESN on the information plate
on the controller enclosure.
● In the navigation tree on the right, click
Home. In the function pane, view SN
in the Basic Information area.
● Log in to the CLI. Run the show system
general command to view the SN.
For details, see Querying the ESN on the
Information Plate, Querying the ESN on
DeviceManager, and Querying the ESN
on the CLI.
NOTE
For a multi-controller storage system that
contains two or more controller enclosures, the
ESN of controller enclosure 0 is used as the ESN
of the storage system. The ESN of the multi-
controller storage system queried on
DeviceManager or CLI through the
management network port of any controller
enclosure is always the ESN of controller
enclosure 0. You are advised to use
DeviceManager or CLI to query the ESN. If you
want to query the ESN on the information
plate, obtain the position of controller enclosure
0 on the system networking diagram used for
controller expansion and then check the ESN on
the information plate of controller enclosure 0.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

The license file contains all features purchased by the customer.

Querying the ESN on the Information Plate

The information plate is located on the right side of the front panel of a controller
enclosure, as shown in Figure 5-10, Figure 5-11, Figure 5-12, and Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-10 Information plate position of a 2 U controller enclosure (12 disk slots)

Figure 5-11 Information plate position of a 2 U controller enclosure (25 disk slots)

Figure 5-12 Information plate position of a 2 U controller enclosure (36 disk slots)

Figure 5-13 Information plate position of a 4 U controller enclosure

Querying the ESN on DeviceManager

Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 2 In the navigation tree on the right, click Home.

Step 3 In the function pane, view SN in the Basic Information area.

----End

Querying the ESN on the CLI

Step 1 Log in to the CLI.

Step 2 Run the show system general command to view the ESN, namely, the SN field in
the command output.
admin:/>showsystemgeneral
System Name : XXX.Storage
Health Status : Normal
Running Status : Normal
Total Capacity : 3.186TB
SN : 2102XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Location :
Product Model : XXXX
Product Version : VX00R00XCXX
High Water Level(%) : 80
Low Water Level(%) : 30
WWN : XXXX
Time : 2018-07-07/15:34:05 UTC+08:00
Patch Version : SPCXXX SPHXXX
Description :

----End

5.1.3.2 Applying for a License File

There are two ways to apply for a license file: entitlement activation and password
activation. Select the application method based on your permission on the ESDP.

5.1.3.2.1 Applying for a License in Entitlement Activation Mode

If you have GTS permissions, apply for a license in entitlement activation mode.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Prerequisites
You have the GTS permission and access permissions to the ESDP platform
(website: http://app.huawei.com/isdp).

NOTE

If you have only the ASP or Guest permission, apply for a license in password activation
mode. For details, see 5.1.3.2.2 Applying for a License in Password Activation Mode.

Context
1. When applying for a license, you need to know the following concepts:
– Entitlement
Entitlement is a form of agreement between a software provider and a
customer, which entitles the customer to the scope, functions, validity
period of the product purchased or sold.
– Entitlement ID
An entitlement ID is a unique ID that identifies entitlement.
– Entitlement Line
An entitlement line is a unit of entitlement that can be activated.
Entitlement contains one or multiple entitlement lines.
– Activation ID
An activation ID is a unique ID that identifies an entitlement line.
– Equipment (node)
A piece of equipment or node is a system device, entity, or node.
2. On the ESDP, entitlement management and license application are based on
equipment (node).

Procedure
Step 1 Select entitlement.
1. On the ESDP home page, choose License Activation > Entitlement
Activation.
The Step 1: Select Entitlement page is displayed.
2. In the Status field, select Ready and click Search.
The matching entitlements are displayed, as shown in Figure 5-14.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-14 Searching entitlement information

NOTE

The ESDP supports fuzzy match. To improve search accuracy, you can input customer
PO, product name, version, and contract No.
3. Select one or more entitlements from the list. Click Next. The Step 2: Binding
Of ESN page is displayed.

Step 2 Bind the ESN.

1. Set ESN and Equipment (Node) Name, as shown in Figure 5-15.

NOTICE

If the specified ESN is incorrect, the license you obtain will be invalid.

Figure 5-15 Entering equipment (node) information

2. Select one or more entitlements you want to activate, and click Next.
If the entitlement information differs from the equipment (node) information,
the system displays an error and asks you to reset the information. If the
entitlement information is correct, the Step 3: Confirm Activation page is
displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 3 Confirm all the information you have set.

If you find any information incorrect, click Back and correct the information. If all
information is correct, click Activate License. The Step 4: Download The License
page is displayed.
Step 4 Download the license.
The information displayed depends on the number of the entitlements.
● If only one entitlement is activated, the system displays Activate successfully.
You can click Download to download the license.
● If multiple entitlements are activated, the system generates an activation task
and displays Volume activation process. You can click To view tasks to
check the status of the task. If the task status is Success, you can download
the license.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After applying for a license, keep your license file secure because it will be used in
subsequent operations.

5.1.3.2.2 Applying for a License in Password Activation Mode

Apply for a license in password activation mode if you have the ASP or Guest
permission.

Prerequisites
You have the ASP or Guest permission and access permissions to the ESDP
platform (website: http://app.huawei.com/isdp). In addition, you have a valid
license certificate that contains the activation password.

NOTE

If you do not have a valid license certificate, you can send the contract No. to your agent to
obtain the license certificate.

Context
1. When applying for a license, you need to know the following concepts:
– Entitlement
Entitlement is a form of agreement between a software provider and a
customer, which entitles the customer to the scope, functions, validity
period of the product purchased or sold.
– Entitlement ID
An entitlement ID is a unique ID that identifies entitlement.
– Entitlement Line
An entitlement line is a unit of entitlement that can be activated.
Entitlement contains one or multiple entitlement lines.
– Activation ID

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

An activation ID is a unique ID that identifies an entitlement line.

– Equipment (Node)
A piece of equipment or node is a system device, entity, or node.
2. On the ESDP, entitlement management and license application are based on
equipment (node).

Procedure
Step 1 Enter your password for activation.
1. On the home page of the ESDP, choose License Activation > Password
Activation. The Step 1: Input Activation Password page is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-16.

Figure 5-16 Entering your password

2. Confirm the information and select I have read the above carefully.
3. In the Activation Password field, enter the activation password.
NOTE

– An activation password can be bound with an ESN only once. If the specified
password is incorrect, the license you obtain will be invalid.
– To enter more activation passwords, click Add.
4. Select the activation password you want to bind, and click Next. The Step 2:
Input ESN page is displayed.

Step 2 Bind the ESN.

1. In the ESN field, enter the ESN.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTICE

If the specified ESN is incorrect, the license you obtain will be invalid.

2. Click Next. The Step 3: Confirm Activation page is displayed.

Step 3 Confirm all the information you have set.

1. If you find any information incorrect, click Back and correct the information. If
all information is correct, enter a company name in the Company Name field
for the system to record and identify user information.
2. Click Activate to submit the activation task. The system displays the
Operation Record page.
The name of a password activation task is Activate License By Password.

Step 4 Download the license.

Use either of the following methods:

● If the status of a task is Success, click Download to download the license.
● After the task is successfully completed, the system automatically sends an
email carrying the license file to your registered email account. Download the
license file from the email.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After applying for a license, keep your license file secure because it will be used in
subsequent operations.

5.1.3.3 Importing a License File

A license file is a credential that entitles you to use a basic or value-added feature.
Before using the basic or value-added features, import their license files.

Context
● After being imported to the storage system, the license file is in inactive state.
You can determine whether to activate it based on your service requirements.
● The file name extension of license files is *.dat.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > License Management.

Step 3 Import a license file.

1. Click Import and Activate.
2. Select the license file that you want to import and click Open.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

The dialog boxes vary according to the web browsers that you use.
3. Click Upload.

----End

5.1.3.4 Activating a License File

To enable a basic or value-added feature, import its license file to the storage
device and activate the file.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > License Management.

Step 3 Click Import and Activate.

Step 4 Select a license file to be activated, and click Activate.

The Warning dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Confirm the activation of the license file.

1. Select I have read and understand the consequences associated with
performing this operation, and click OK.
The Success dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeded.
2. Click OK.

----End

5.1.4 Configuring Domain Authentication for a Storage

System
Configure domain authentication for a storage system using a Windows AD
domain server or an LDAP domain server.

5.1.4.1 Preparing Windows AD Domain Configuration Data

Before adding a storage system to an AD domain, collect configuration data of a
Windows AD domain server. The section uses Windows Server 2008 R2 as an
example. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Log in to the Windows AD domain server. Choose Start > Administrative Tools >
Active Directory Users and Computers. In the Active Directory Users and
Computers window, view and record related parameters.

Step 2 Obtain the Base DN information. As shown in the figure, icp.com maps to Base
DN on the configuration page of the storage system, that is, dc=icp,dc=com.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 3 Obtain the Bind DN information.

1. On the menu bar of the Active Directory Users and Computers software,
click View, and select Advanced Features to display advanced features of the
AD domain server.

2. Select the Users folder under icp.com.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

3. The Administrator is used as an example. Right-click Users and choose

Properties.

4. In the Administrator Properties dialog box, click Attribute Editor, select

distinguishedName, and click View to obtain the Bind DN information. The
queried Bind DN record is cn=Administrator,cn=Users,dc=icp,dc=com.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

The Attribute Editor option is available only after you select the Advanced Features
in Step 3.1.

Step 4 Obtain the User Directory information. (This information is required when you
create an LDAP user.)
1. Administrator under Users is used as an example. Right-click the Users
folder under icp.com, and choose Properties.

2. In the Users Properties dialog box, click Attribute Editor, select the
distinguishedName property, and click View to obtain the User Directory
information. The queried User Directory record is cn=Users,dc=icp,dc=com.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 5 Obtain the Group Directory information. (This information is required when you
create an LDAP user group.)
1. The Domain Admins user group under Users is used as an example. Right-
click the Domain Admins user group and choose Properties.

2. In the Domain Admins Properties dialog box, click Attribute Editor, select
the distinguishedName property, and click View to obtain the Group
Directory information. The queried Group Directory record is cn=Domain
Admins,cn=Users,dc=icp,dc=com.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 6 Contact the Windows AD domain server administrator to obtain IP Address and
Bind Password of the AD domain server.
NOTE

For details about how to create AD domain users and groups on the AD domain controller,
see 6.3 How Do I Create AD Domain Users and Groups on the AD Domain Controller?

----End

5.1.4.2 Preparing LDAP Domain Configuration Data

Before adding a storage system to an LDAP domain, collect configuration data of
the LDAP domain server.

LDAP Domain Parameters

LDAP data is organized in a tree structure that clearly lays out organizational
information. A node on this tree is called as Entry. Each Entry has a distinguished
name (DN). The DN of an Entry is composed of the Base DN and RDN. The Base
DN refers to the position of the parent node where the Entry resides on the tree,
and the RDN refers to an attribute (such as UID or CN) that distinguishes the
Entry from others.

LDAP directories function as file system directories. For example, LDAP directory
dc=redmond,dc=wa,dc=microsoft,dc=com can be considered as the following file
system directory: com\microsoft\wa\redmond. In another example of directory
cn=user1,ou=user,dc=example,dc=com, cn=user1 indicates a user name and
ou=user indicates the organization unit of Active Directory (AD), that is, user1 is
in the user organization unit of the example.com domain.

The following figure shows data structure of an LDAP server:

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-4 describes meanings of acronyms in the LDAP entries.

Table 5-4 Acronyms in LDAP entries

Acronym Meaning

o Organization

ou Organization Unit

c Country Name

dc Domain Component

sn Surname

cn Common Name

Obtaining LDAP Configuration Data in Windows

OpenLDAP is a free and open-source implementation method of the LDAP
developed by the OpenLDAP Project. It is released under the OpenLDAP Public
License. This section uses OpenLDAP as an example to describe how to obtain
LDAP configuration data.

NOTE

The OpenLDAP installation package is available on the Userbooster website, but not the
OpenLDAP website. It can run on the following types of Windows operating systems:
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, and Windows Server 2012.

Step 1 Open the OpenLDAP installation directory.

Step 2 Find the slapd.conf system configuration file.
Step 3 Use the text editing software to open the configuration file and search for the
following fields:
suffix "dc=example,dc=com"
rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com"

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

rootpw XXXXXXXXXXXX

● dc=example,dc=com maps to Base DN on the storage system configuration

page.
● cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com maps to Bind DN on the storage system
configuration page.
● XXXXXXXXXXXX maps to Bind Password on the storage system
configuration page. If the password is in ciphertext, contact LDAP server
administrators to obtain the password.

Step 4 Find configuration files (with .ldif as the file name extension) of users and user
groups that need to access the storage system.
NOTE

LDAP Interchange Format (LDIF) is one of the most common file formats for LDAP
applications. It is a standard mechanism that represents directories in the text format, and
it allows users to import data to and export data from the directory server. LDIF files store
LDAP configurations and directory contents. You can obtain parameter information from
LDIF files.

Step 5 Use the text editing software to open the configuration file and find the DNs that
map to User Directory and Group Directory respectively on the storage system
configuration page.
#root on the top
dn: dc=example,dc=com
dc: example
objectClass: domain
objectClass: top
#First organization unit name: user
dn: ou=user,dc=example,dc=com
ou: user
objectClass: organizationalUnit
objectClass: top
#Second organization unit name: groups
dn: ou=group,dc=example,dc=com
ou: groups
objectClass: organizationalUnit
objectClass: top
#The first user represents user1 that belongs to organization unit user in the organizational structure
topology.
dn: cn=user1,ou=user,dc=example,dc=com
cn: user1
objectClass: posixAccount
objectClass: shadowAccount
objectClass: inetOrgPerson
sn: user1
uid: user1
uidNumber: 2882
gidNumber: 888
homeDirectory: /export/home/ldapuser
loginShell: /bin/bash
userPassword: {ssha}eoWxtWNl8YbqsulnwFwKMw90Cx5BSU9DRA==xxxxxx
#The second user represents user2 that belongs to organization unit user in the organizational structure
topology.
dn: cn=user2,ou=user,dc=example,dc=com
cn: user2
objectClass: posixAccount
objectClass: shadowAccount
objectClass: inetOrgPerson
sn: client
uid: client
uidNumber: 2883
gidNumber: 888

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

homeDirectory: /export/home/client
loginShell: /bin/bash
userPassword: {ssha}eoWxtWNl8YbqsulnwFwKMw90Cx5BSU9DRA==xxxxxx
#The first user group represents group1 that belongs to organization unit group in the organizational
structure topology. The group contains user1 and user2.
dn: cn=group1,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com
cn: group1
gidNumber: 888
memberUid: user1#Belongs to the group.
memberUid: user2#Belongs to the group.
objectClass: posixGroup

----End

Obtaining LDAP Configuration Data in Linux

OpenLDAP Software for LDAP support is included in several common Linux
distributions. This section uses OpenLDAP as an example to describe how to
obtain LDAP configuration data. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Log in to an LDAP server as user root.

Step 2 Run the cd /etc/openldap command to go to the /etc/openldap directory.
linux-ldap:~ # cd /etc/openldap
linux-ldap:/etc/openldap #

Step 3 Run the ls command to view the slapd.conf system configuration file and the
configuration file (with .ldif as the file name extension) of users and user groups
who want to access the storage system.
linux-ldap:/etc/openldap #ls
example.ldif ldap.conf schema slap.conf slap.con slapd.conf

Step 4 Run the cat command to open the slapd.conf system configuration file where you
can view related parameters.
linux-ldap:/etc/openldap #cat slapd.conf

suffix "dc=example,dc=com"
rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com"

rootpw XXXXXXXXXXXX

● dc=example,dc=com maps to Base DN on the storage system configuration

page.
● cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com maps to Bind DN on the storage system
configuration page.
● XXXXXXXXXXXX maps to Bind Password on the storage system
configuration page. If the password is in ciphertext, contact LDAP server
administrators to obtain the password.
Step 5 Run the cat command to open the example.ldif file. Find the DNs that map to
User Directory and Group Directory respectively on the storage system
configuration page. For details about the parameters, see the example LDIF file
in Windows.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

5.1.4.3 Adding a Storage System to an LDAP Domain

To log in to a storage system in domain authentication mode, first add the storage
system to an LDAP domain. A storage system can be added to a maximum of four
LDAP domains.

Prerequisites
The LDAP server or Windows Active Directory (AD) domain server has been
installed and deployed.
When configuring the LDAP server, you can select LDAP Server or Windows AD
Domain Server as the server type.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Permission Settings > Domain Authentication Server
Settings.
Step 3 Configure the LDAP server.
1. Select the ID of the domain authentication server to be configured, and click
Properties.
NOTE

If LDAP is used, go to Step 3.2. If LDAPS is used, ensure that the CA certificate file of
the corresponding domain server has been imported to the storage system.
– If Windows AD domain authentication is used, import the CA certificate of the AD
domain server to the storage system before selecting LDAPS. For details, see 6.4
How Can I Import the Windows AD Domain Server's CA Certificate to the
Storage System?
– If LDAP domain authentication is used, import the CA certificate of the LDAP
domain server to the storage system before selecting LDAPS. Apply for a CA
certificate that matches the LDAP domain server's certificate from a third-party
certificate authority.
– If you select domain authentication server 0, ensure that the CA
certificate file of the domain authentication certificate has been imported
to the storage system.
– If you select domain authentication server 1, ensure that the CA
certificate file of domain authentication extended certificate 1 has been
imported to the storage system.
– If you select domain authentication server 2, ensure that the CA
certificate file of domain authentication extended certificate 2 has been
imported to the storage system.
– If you select domain authentication server 3, ensure that the CA
certificate file of domain authentication extended certificate 3 has been
imported to the storage system.
For details, see contents related to security certificate management in the
Security Configuration Guide specific to your product model and version.
2. Click Add.
The Add IP Address dialog box is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

3. In IP Address, enter the IP address of the LDAP server to be added.

4. Click OK.
The IP address is added to the IP Address list.
NOTE

To remove an IP address, select the IP address from the IP Address list and click
Remove.
5. Set the basic parameters of the LDAP server. Table 5-5 describes the related
parameters.

Table 5-5 LDAP server parameters

Parameter Description Value

Port Port ID of the server. [Value range]

The default port ID of the An integer ranging from
LDAP server is 389, and the 1 to 65535
default port ID of the [Example]
LDAPS server is 636.
636

Server Type Type of a server. [Value range]

Client hierarchy information The value can be
is stored on a domain Windows AD domain
authentication server. Users server or LDAP server.
are authenticated by the [Example]
domain authentication
server when they attempt LDAP server
to access shared resources.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Protocol Encryption protocol used [Value range]

for domain authentication. The value can be LDAP
NOTE or LDAPS.
– LDAP is vulnerable to [Example]
security risks. You are
advised to select the LDAPS
LDAPS protocol.
– Before selecting the LDAPS
protocol, import the CA
certificate file of the LDAP
domain server.

Base DN Root directory of a server. [Example]

Each entry stored in LDAP cn=My
databases requires a unique Application,ou=applicatio
identification. The unique ns,dc=bigcorp,dc=com
identification of each entry
in LDAP databases is called
its Distinguished Name
(DN). The top of the
directory tree is the root,
that is, the base DN.

Bind DN Binding directory of a [Value range]

server. The default access
The LDAP client initiates a account is an
connection request and administrator account. If
attempts to establish a you use another account,
session to the LDAP server. you need to ensure that
This process is also known it has the permissions of
as binding. During the accessing the domain
binding, the client can service of the LDAP
specify users to access server. Account names
directory information on cannot contain spaces.
the server. To access [Example]
contents, you must search
in this directory. cn=My
Application,ou=applicatio
ns,dc=bigcorp,dc=com

Bind Password Password used for accessing [Value range]

the bond directory. A character string
containing 1 to 63
characters
[Example]
password

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Confirm Bind Confirmed password for [Example]

Password accessing the bond password
directory.
NOTE
Confirm Bind Password must
be consistent with Bind
Password.

User Directory Directory for a created [Example]

domain user. ou=Users,dc=bigcorp,dc=c
NOTE om
You can obtain User Directory
using the following methods:
– Obtaining LDAP
Configuration Data in
Windows
– Obtaining LDAP
Configuration Data in
Linux

Group Directory Directory for a created [Example]

domain user group. ou=Groups,dc=bigcorp,dc
=com

6. Click Advanced to set the advanced parameters of the LDAP server. Table 5-6
describes the related parameters.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-6 Advanced parameters of an LDAP server

Parameter Description Value

User ID Properties ID properties of a user. This [Example]

parameter defines the ID of a uidNumber
storage user object and
allows the query of a specific [Default value]
user based on the given ID. ● uidNumber (LDAP
server)
● uSNCreated (AD server)

User Name Name properties of a user. [Example]

Properties This parameter defines the uid
name of a storage user
object and allows the query [Default value]
of a specific user based on ● uid (LDAP server)
the given name. ● sAMAccountName (AD
server)

User Object Type Type of a user object. Each [Example]

entry under the LDAP posixAccount
directory is associated with
one or more object types, [Default value]
including user, group, email, ● posixAccount (LDAP
and maintenance terminal. server)
● User (AD server)

Group ID ID properties of a group. A [Example]

Properties group can be composed of gidNumber
many users. This parameter
defines the ID of a storage [Default value]
group object and allows the ● gidNumber (LDAP
query of a specific group server)
based on the given ID. ● uSNCreated (AD server)

Group Name Name properties of a group. [Example]

Properties This parameter defines the cn
name of a storage group
object and allows the query [Default value]
of a specific group based on ● gidNumber (LDAP
the given name. server)
● sAMAccountName (AD
server)

Group Member Member properties of a [Example]

Properties group. This parameter defines uniqueMember
a member of a storage
group. [Default value]
● uniqueMember (LDAP
server)
● Member (AD server)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Group Object Type Type of a group object. Each [Example]

entry under the LDAP groupOfUniqueNames
directory is associated with
one or more object types, [Default value]
including user, group, email, ● groupOfUniqueNames
and maintenance terminal. (LDAP server)
● Group (AD server)

NOTE

To restore a server to default settings, click Restore Default Settings.

Step 4 Confirm the LDAP server configuration.

1. Click Save.
The Execution Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
succeeded.
2. Click Close. You have completed the server settings.
NOTE

After you configure the LDAP server on the storage system, you need to log in to the
storage system using the LDAP user name or LDAP user group name. Therefore, you need
to create the LDAP user name or LDAP user group name on the storage system.

Step 5 To add the storage system to more domain authentication servers, repeat
operations in Step 3 and Step 4.
NOTE

After the storage system is added to the LDAP domain, you can log in to the storage system
as an LDAP user. For details, see 5.1.1.2 Logging In to DeviceManager or 5.1.1.4 Logging
In to the CLI.

----End

5.1.5 Enabling and Managing the eService

The storage system provides eService to automatically upload alarms and logs to
Huawei technical support center, thereby improving the troubleshooting efficiency.

5.1.5.1 About eService

eService enables a storage system to upload its alarms and logs to the eService
cloud system. The eService cloud system then uses AI technologies to implement
intelligent fault reporting, real-time health analysis, intelligent fault prevention,
and intelligent optimization, minimizing device running risks and reducing
operational costs.

Positioning
Traditionally, alarms and logs are manually collected from storage systems and
cannot be sent to Huawei technical support center in a timely manner. As a result,

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

faults cannot be discovered promptly. eService enables a storage system to

periodically report its alarms and logs. This helps the eService cloud system to
analyze storage system's health status in real time, identify potential risks,
automatically locate faults, and provide troubleshooting solutions, facilitating fault
discovery and shortening troubleshooting time.
eService securely connects a storage system and the eService cloud system
remotely deployed in Huawei technical support center.
● The storage system encrypts alarms and logs and sends them to the eService
cloud system through encrypted channels over Internet. The eService cloud
system can receive alarm and log information from storage systems on a 24/7
basis, create orders within minutes, and automatically notify Huawei technical
support personnel of exceptions in a timely manner.
● Uploading of system logs must be manually configured. After technical
support personnel configure system log collection tasks for a storage system
on the eService cloud system, the storage system periodically sends requests
to the eService cloud system for uploading system logs. If eService is enabled,
the storage system can upload collected system logs.
eService uses the secure HTTPS. It allows a storage system to communicate with
the eService cloud system directly or through an internal HTTP proxy server.
Figure 5-17 and Figure 5-18 illustrate the two types of networking.

Figure 5-17 Direct-connection networking

Customer equipment
Huawei technical support center
room
eService

Huawei technical
Storage support engineer
system Internet
(HTTPS)

TCP: 7448/8448/9448
Firewall Firewall

LAN connection Internet connection

1 The management ports of all controllers have been connected to the network.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-18 Internal HTTP proxy server deployed

Customer equipment room Huawei technical support

center

Proxy server eService

Huawei technical
Storage support engineer
system
Internet
(HTTPS)

TCP: 7448/8448/9448
Firewall Firewall

LAN connection Internet connection

1 The management ports of all controllers have been connected to the network.

NOTE

● If an internal HTTP proxy server is deployed for network access, ensure that the server is
secure and reliable.
● If neither of these two types of networking is supported, the eService Client can be
deployed to upload storage alarms and logs to the eService cloud system. For details,
see the eService V2R2C00 User Guide.

Supported Data Types

After eService is enabled, alarms and logs of storage systems can be uploaded to
Huawei technical support center. Table 5-7 describes the data.

Table 5-7 Supported data types

Data Type Description Uploading Interval

Performance ● A .txt file in the JSON New performance logs are

log format uploaded to the eService
● Performance logs of disks, cloud system every 5 minutes.
controllers, LUNs, front-end
ports, storage pools, and
disk domains

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Data Type Description Uploading Interval

Operation log ● A .txt file in the JSON Operation logs are uploaded
format to the eService cloud system
● Operation logs about every 24 hours.
device status and function
modules. Function modules
include controllers,
enclosures, power supplies,
BBUs, fans, disks,
expansion modules,
interface modules, ports,
disk domains, storage
pools, and LUNs.

Alarm ● A .txt file in the JSON ● File

information format New alarm information is
● HTTP POST request, with uploaded to the eService
the media type being cloud system every 5
application/json minutes.
● Alarm information ● HTTP POST request
including the alarm ID, New alarm information is
serial number, severity, uploaded to the eService
parameters, time, and type cloud system every minute.

System log ● A .tgz file Huawei technical support

● System logs including engineers manually trigger
running data, event the uploading of system logs
information, and debug from the eService cloud
logs about the storage system to Huawei technical
system support center. In the current
version, all system logs and
system logs in the latest one
hour, latest two hours, latest
24 hours, or a specific time
period can be uploaded.

Diagnosis file ● A .tgz file ● If alarms are generated on

● Diagnosis file including a storage system, the
device fault information storage system uploads a
diagnostic file at the
maximum frequency of one
time per hour.
● If no alarm is generated on
a storage system, the
storage system uploads a
diagnostic file every 24
hours.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Data Type Description Uploading Interval

DHA ● A .tgz file New DHA operation logs are

operation log ● DHA operation logs record uploaded to the eService
daily operation information cloud system every 5 minutes.
about disks, including
health statistics, self-
monitoring, analysis, and
reporting technology
(SMART), I/O statistics, and
disk life information.

NOTE

● The performance logs uploaded a time must not exceed 5 MB.

● The DHA operation logs uploaded a time per controller must not exceed 2 MB.
● There is no limit on the size of alarms, operation logs, system logs, and diagnosis logs to
be uploaded.

5.1.5.2 Preparations
The following table describes preparations that you are advised to make before
configuring eService.

Item Description

Obtaining the When configuring eService on DeviceManager, you

Equipment Serial need to enter the ESN and site name of the storage
Number (ESN) and device.
site name of a storage You can obtain the ESN based on either of the
device following procedures:
● On the navigation bar of DeviceManager, click
Home. In the function pane, locate SN in the Basic
information area.
● Log in to the command-line interface (CLI). Run the
show system general command and locate SN.

Preparing the network The network bandwidth is greater than or equal to 10

Mbit/s.

Enabling ports 7448/ The eService cloud system uses server ports 7448/TCP,
TCP, 8448/TCP, and 8448/TCP, and 9448/TCP. Enable the three ports on the
9448/TCP on the firewall to allow storage systems to send HTTP
firewall to allow requests to the eService cloud system.
outgoing traffic from For details about how to check whether the ports are
the firewall to the enabled, see 6.6 How Do I Check Whether Network
Internet Firewall Ports Are Enabled?

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Item Description

(Optional) Obtaining This information is required if an internal HTTP proxy

the address, port, user server is used for network access.
name, and password
of the HTTP proxy
server

Obtaining a Support During eService configuration, a Support account is

account and password required for device authentication. Apply for an
account at the Support website if you do not have one.

Obtaining contact After configuring eService on DeviceManager, contact

details about Huawei Huawei technical support center for eService
technical support authentication so that a ticket is automatically created
center for an alarm.
To obtain contact details about Huawei technical
support center:
● Carrier users: https://support.huawei.com/carrier/
docview!docview?
nid=IN0000034614&path=NN-000005#click=myA
pply
● Enterprise users: https://e.huawei.com/en/service-
hotline

Customer code When performing eService authentication, technical

support center personnel need to enter the customer
code.

5.1.5.3 Configuring eService

This section describes how to prepare and configure eService.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > eService Settings.

NOTE

If it is the first time to enter the eService Settings page, the Sign Authorization Letter
dialog box is displayed. Read the authorization letter carefully, select I have a clear
understanding of the data collection scope and data processing method of Huawei
eService system, and agree to connect to Huawei eService system, and click OK. If you
click Close or , the eService parameter settings cannot be modified or saved. In addition,
the Sign Authorization Letter dialog box will be displayed again when you enter the
eService Settings page the next time.

Step 3 Select the I agree to upload information to eService check box.

Step 4 Select the eService site where storage device data is sent back. Table 5-8 describes
the site types.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-8 eService sites

Site Name Application Scenario

Carrier in Chinese mainland Carriers in the Chinese mainland.

NOTE
If you select this site, the device information collected
by eService will be sent to the cloud in China.

Carrier outside Chinese Carriers outside the Chinese mainland.

mainland NOTE
● If you select this site, the device information
collected by eService will be sent to the cloud in
Germany.
● For carriers in Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan
regions, select this site.

Enterprise in Chinese Enterprises in the Chinese mainland.

mainland NOTE
If you select this site, the device information collected
by eService will be sent to the cloud in China.

Enterprise outside Chinese Enterprises outside the Chinese mainland.

mainland NOTE
● If you select this site, the device information
collected by eService will be sent to the cloud in
Germany.
● For enterprises in Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan
regions, select this site.

Step 5 Configure the connectivity between the storage system and external networks.
1. Click Network Configurations.
The Network Configurations dialog box is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

2. (Optional) Configure a proxy server.

If storage systems access Internet through internal HTTP proxy, a proxy server
must be configured. Table 5-9 describes the proxy server parameters.

Table 5-9 Proxy server parameters

Parameter Description Value

Enable Specifies whether to [Value range]

enable or disable the Select or deselect the Enable check
proxy server. box.
[Example]
Select Enable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

HTTP Proxy Specifies the HTTP [Value range]

Server proxy server address. Only IPv4 addresses and domain
Address names are supported.
– An IPv4 address has the
following requirements:

▪ The 32-bit address is evenly

divided into four fields. Each
8-bit field is expressed in
dotted-decimal notation.

▪ Each field of the IP address

cannot be blank and must be
an integer.

▪ The value of the first field

ranges from 1 to 223.

▪ The values of other fields

range from 0 to 255.

▪ The IP address cannot be a

special address such as the
broadcast address.
– The domain name has the
following requirements:

▪ A domain name is not case-

sensitive and must be an
English domain name.

▪ An English domain name

contains 1 to 255 characters.

▪ An English domain name can

only contain letters (a to z, A
to Z), digits (0 to 9), dots (.),
and hyphens (-). It cannot
start or end with a hyphen
(-).
[Example]
192.168.0.1
test.com

Port Specifies the HTTP [Value range]

proxy server port. 1 to 65535
[Example]
80

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Username Specifies the [Value range]

username. – The username must contain 1 to
63 characters.
– The username cannot contain
single quotation marks (').
[Example]
files

Password Specifies the user [Value range]

password. The password must contain 1 to 63
characters.
[Example]
123456

3. (Optional) Configure the DNS server.

After the DNS service is configured, the storage system can resolve and access
external domain names.
NOTE

– If a direct-connection network is used (namely an internal HTTP proxy server is not

used), configure the DNS service and use the IP address 8.8.8.8 or 114.114.114.114
of the external DNS server.
– If an internal HTTP proxy server is deployed and the proxy server address is a
domain name, configure the DNS service.
– If an internal HTTP proxy server is deployed and the proxy server address is an IP
address, you do not need to configure the DNS service.
– Ensure that the configured DNS server can resolve the extranet domain name.
a. Set Active DNS IP Address.
b. (Optional) Set Standby DNS IP Address 1.
c. (Optional) Set Standby DNS IP Address 2.
NOTE

Configure the standby DNS IP address 1 first and then the standby DNS IP
address 2.
d. (Optional) Test the connection between the DNS server and storage
system.
You can click Test of each DNS IP address to test its availability.
4. Click OK.
The network configuration is complete.
Step 6 Enter a site name.
NOTE

● The site name contains 1 to 127 characters.

● The site name contains only letters, digits, underscores (_), hyphens (-), periods (.), or
spaces.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 7 (Optional) Obtain, import, and activate the authorization letter.

NOTE

● The authorization letter will be uploaded to eService for centralized archiving.

● If the scanned copy of the authorization letter cannot be uploaded through
DeviceManager, send the authorization letter to the eService mailbox
([email protected]) for archiving after the authorization letter is signed.

1. Click Obtain Template.

The Authorization Letter for Deploying eService and Processing
[Customer]'s Data page is displayed.
2. Download the authorization letter, fill in it, and then save it in the *.jpg
format by photographing or scanning.
3. Click Select, select the authorization letter in the *.jpg format, and click Open.
4. Click Import.
The Success dialog box is displayed.
5. Click OK.

Step 8 Set a contact person.

NOTE

The contact person is the administrator of the storage device in the eService system. After
being added successfully, the administrator receives messages from eService.

1. Click Add.
The Add Contact dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the contact person information. Table 5-10 describes the related
parameters.

Table 5-10 Contact person parameters

Parameter Description

Last Name – The name length contains 1 to 63 characters.

– The name contains only letters, digits, underscores (_),
hyphens (-), and periods (.).

First Name – The name length contains 1 to 63 characters.

– The name contains only letters, digits, underscores (_),
hyphens (-), and periods (.).

Email Indicates the email address for receiving messages from

eService.

Country Code – Indicates the international area code of the country

where the phone number that receives messages from
eService is located.
– The value contains only digits, asterisk (*), pound sign
(#), plus sign (+), left parenthesis ((), right parenthesis
()), or hyphens (-).

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description

Telephone – Indicates the phone number used to receive messages

from eService.
– The value contains only digits, asterisk (*), pound sign
(#), plus sign (+), left parenthesis ((), right parenthesis
()), or hyphens (-).

Step 9 (Optional) Enable the audit log function for eService.

1. Select Enable.
2. Set the parameters of audit logs.

Click . The Audit Log dialog box is displayed. Table 5-11 describes related
parameters.

NOTE

If the Syslog notification function has been enabled and configured for the storage
system, parameters related to audit logs have been set.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-11 Audit log parameters

Parame Description Value
ter

Port Indicates the port number of [Description]

the Syslog notification. The The value of the port number
default value is 514. ranges from 1 to 65535.
NOTE
[Example]
The port number configured on
the storage system must be the 3
same as that configured on the
Syslog server.

Protocol Indicates the protocol over [Example]

which the Syslog notification TCP+SSL/TLS
is sent. Possible values
include UDP, TCP, and TCP
+SSL/TLS. The default value
is TCP+SSL/TLS.
NOTE
– Ensure that the UDP, TCP,
and TCP+SSL/TLS protocols
have been configured on the
Syslog server. Security risks
arise if the protocol is UDP
or TCP. Therefore, you are
advised to select TCP+SSL/
TLS.
– The protocol configured on
the storage system must be
the same as that configured
on the Syslog server.
– If you select UDP, ensure
that the syslog server can
respond to ping packets
normally. Otherwise, Syslog
notifications of the storage
system cannot be sent to the
receiving server.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parame Description Value

ter

Receiver Indicates the server IP address [Value range]

Server or domain name address. – An IPv4 address has the
Address following requirements:

▪ The 32-bit address is

evenly divided into four
fields. Each 8-bit field is
expressed in dotted-
decimal notation.

▪ Each field of the IP

address cannot be blank
and must be an integer.

▪ The value of the first field

ranges from 1 to 223
(excluding 127).

▪ The values of other fields

range from 0 to 255.

▪ The IP address cannot be

a special address such as
the broadcast address.
– An IPv6 address has the
following requirements:

▪ The 128-bit address is

evenly divided into eight
fields. Each 16-bit field is
expressed in four
hexadecimal numbers and
separated with colons.

▪ In each 16-bit field, zeros

before integers can be
removed. However, at
least one digit must be
reserved in each field.

▪ If the IP address contains

a long string of zeros, you
can represent the
neighboring zeros with
double colons (::) in the
colon-separated
hexadecimal field. Each IP
address contains only one
double-colon (::). The
double-colon (::) can also

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parame Description Value

ter

be used to represent
neighboring zeros of the
IP address.

▪ The IP address cannot be

a special address such as
a network address, loop
address, or multicast
address.
– The domain name has the
following requirements:

▪ A domain name is not

case-sensitive and must
be an English domain
name.

▪ An English domain name

contains 1 to 255
characters.

▪ An English domain name

can only contain letters (a
to z, A to Z), digits (0 to
9), dots (.), and hyphens
(-). It cannot start or end
with a hyphen (-).
[Example]
192.168.1.100
fc00::1234
www.test.com

3. Click Test to test the connectivity between the storage system and server that
receives audit logs.
Step 10 Save and authenticate eService.
1. Click Save and Authenticate.
The Execution Result dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Close.
The Authenticate Device dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the device authentication account and password.
NOTE

The device authentication account refers to the Huawei Support account. Apply for an
account at the Support website if you do not have one.
4. Click OK.
The Success dialog box is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

5. Click OK.
After the device authentication is complete, the Access Authentication status
changes to Authenticated.
NOTE

After eService is enabled, if Access Authentication is Unauthenticated, this function

will continuously collect logs and alarms, which consumes system resources. In this
case, disable eService or perform device authentication.
6. (Optional) Click Network Test to check whether eService can be used
properly.
NOTE

Device authentication is required only when eService is enabled. The eService

availability test can be performed only after the device authentication is complete.

Step 11 Contact Huawei technical support center for site authentication.

1. The installation engineer calls Huawei technical support center for site
authentication.
2. Maintenance personnel of Huawei technical support center authenticate
eService on the eService cloud system.
3. Upon successful authentication, maintenance personnel of Huawei technical
support center notify the installation engineer of the result.

Step 12 After the configuration is successful, log in to the eService cloud management
device. For details, see the eService Intelligent Cloud Management System User
Guide.

----End

5.1.5.4 Exporting a Data Package to Be Uploaded

If eService becomes unavailable, you can manually export data packages to be
uploaded to Huawei technical support center.

Context
● If eService becomes unavailable, the eService client saves data uploaded in
the last 24 hours. After eService recovers, the eService client continues
receiving data. Before eService recovers, you can manually export data
packages to be uploaded.
● Exported data packages include performance, running, and alarm data.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the CLI as an administrator or a super administrator.

Step 2 Run the export event event_type=call_home ip=? user=? password=? path=?
command to export data packages to be exported.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-12 Parameters

Parameter Description Value

ip=? IP address of a File Transfer -

Protocol (FTP) or Secure File
Transfer Protocol (SFTP)
server.
NOTE
To export log files, an FTP or
SFTP server must be available
and accessible to the storage
system.

user=? Name of a user for logging in The value contains 1 to 64

to an FTP or SFTP server. characters without colons (:).

password=? Password for logging in to an The value contains 1 to 64

FTP or SFTP server. characters.

path=? Path and file for saving The path must start with /. The
events or logs on an FTP or file is a package.
SFTP server. ● /test/ indicates that events
or logs are saved in the test
folder on the FTP/SFTP
server. The file name is
automatically generated.
● /test indicates that events or
logs are saved in the test
file.
● If you specify the file name,
we recommend you add the
file name extension .tgz. If
you do not specify the file
name extension, the CLI will
add it automatically.

port=? ID of the port used on an FTP The value is an integer between

or SFTP server. 1 and 65535.
● If protocol is set to FTP, the
default value is 21.
● If protocol is set to SFTP, the
default value is 22.

----End

Example
Export certain eService data to an FTP server, where the IP address of the FTP
server is 192.168.8.211, the user name for logging in to the FTP server is admin,
the password is admin, the exported eService data will be stored in the root
directory of the FTP server, and the exported eService data will be saved with the
default file name.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

admin:/>export event event_type=call_home ip=192.168.8.211 user=admin password=***** path=/

protocol=FTP
WARNING: It will take several minutes to collect and export the information.
Have you read warning message carefully?(y/n)y
Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y
Controller ID: 0A
Package Path: /collector_chs_file_0A.tgz
Controller ID: 0B
Package Path: /collector_chs_file_0B.tgz
Command executed successfully.

5.1.6 Configuring Alarm and Event Handling Policies

Configure alarm and event handling policies, covering email notification, SMS
notification, and alarm dump.

5.1.6.1 Enabling Email Notification

After you enable the email notification function, alarms of the specified severity
and events are sent to a preset email box.

Prerequisites
● The connections between each Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server
and all primary and secondary controllers are working properly.
● The email notification function is available only when the SMTP server is
running properly. Otherwise, the specified email address cannot receive alarm
and event emails.
● The alarm and event email notification function supports PLAIN and LOGIN
authentication mechanisms. Therefore, when you configure the email server,
ensure that at least one of the two authentication mechanisms is supported.
● You have logged in to DeviceManager as an administrator that has the
permission of one of the following:
– Super administrator
– Administrator
● The storage system sends only the alarms and events generated after email
notification is enabled to the SMTP server.
● Before configuring a domain name for the server, ensure that the DNS server
properly communicates with the storage system or third-party server.

Precautions
● To ensure that email notifications can be sent properly, the sender email
address must match the SMTP server address and can send emails to the
recipient email address.
For example, if a Gmail SMTP server is used, the sender email address must
be a Gmail address.
● When two SMTP servers are configured, the sender email address must match
the two SMTP server addresses and can send emails to the recipient email
address.
For example, if the sender email address is a Gmail address, the two SMTP
server addresses must be SMTP server addresses provided by the Gmail
supplier.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.
Step 2 Choose Settings > Alarm Settings > Email Notification.
Step 3 Set the email address for receiving alarms and events.
1. Select Enable.
2. Set email notification parameters. Table 5-13 describes the related
parameters.

Table 5-13 Email notification parameters

Parameter Description Value

Sender Email Indicates the email address [Example]

of the sender. [email protected]
NOTE
The sender email address
must match the SMTP server
address.
For example, if a Gmail SMTP
server is used, the sender
email address must be a
Gmail address.

SMTP Server Indicates the IP address or [Note]

domain name of the SMTP Set this parameter
server. This is an SMTP- based on the standard
compliant email-sending configuration of the
server. The emails SMTP server.
containing alarm
information can be sent to [Example]
the recipient email box 192.168.1.100
through the SMTP server.
NOTE
A maximum of two SMTP
servers can be added. If one
of the SMTP servers cannot
send notification emails, the
other SMTP server will be
used to send notification
emails again.

SMTP Port Indicates an SMTP port ID. Description

The default value is 25. The value ranges from
NOTE 1 to 65535.
The SMTP port ID configured
on a storage system must be [Example]
consistent with that 3
configured on the SMTP
server.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Encryption mode Indicates whether to [Example]

encrypt the communication STARTTLS
between the system and
the email server.
– Not encrypted: Data is
not encrypted during
transmission.
NOTE
Security risks may arise if
encryption is not enabled.
– SSL/TLS: SSL and TLS
are used to ensure
network communication
security and data
integrity. After this
mode is enabled, the
system will
automatically select an
encryption mode
according to your email
server.
– STARTTLS: TLS
encryption is
implemented after the
STARTTLS command is
executed. The data
transferred before the
command execution is
not encrypted.
NOTE
The encryption mode
configured on a storage
system must be consistent
with that configured on the
SMTP server.

SMTP Server Specifies whether the SMTP [Example]

Authentication server verifies the Specify this parameter
identification of the email only if the SMTP server
sender. If SMTP server ID requires ID
authentication is not authentication.
selected, Username and
Password are unavailable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Username Indicates a sender's SMTP [Note]

user name. When the The value cannot be
sender sends emails empty and must
through the SMTP server, contain 1 to 63
the sender is required by characters excluding
the SMTP server to enter single quotation marks
the SMTP user name and (').
password for
authentication. [Example]
testuser

Password Indicates a sender's SMTP [Note]

user password. When the – The value cannot be
sender sends emails empty and must
through the SMTP server, contain 1 to 63
the sender is required by characters.
the SMTP server to enter
the SMTP user name and – The password
password for cannot contain
authentication. extended ASCII or
Unicode characters.
Otherwise, the
password cannot be
used normally. It is
recommended that
the password
contain characters
from the following
categories:

▪ Digits (0-9)

▪ Uppercase
characters (A-Z)

▪ Lowercase
characters (a-z)

▪ Space

▪ Special characters
such as
[\]^_{|}~`@!"#$
%&'()*+-./:;<=>?
[Example]
aJ1p23dySQ

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Email Title Prefix Indicates the email title [Note]

defined by the sender. If The length ranges from
there are too many emails, 0 to 511 bytes and
users can search for desired cannot contain single
emails using the email title. quotation marks (').
[Example]
-

Add alarm If this function is enabled, [Example]

severities the alarm severity is Add alarm severities
included in the title of an
alarm notification email.
Possible values are Critical,
Major, and Warning.

3. Add a recipient email address.

a. Click Add.
The Add Recipient Information dialog box is displayed.
b. Specify Recipient Email and Notification Type.
NOTE

▪ Notification Type can be set to Alarm or Event.

▪ When Notification Type is set to Alarm, you also need to set Alarm
Severity. The alarm severity can be Critical, Major, and Warning.

▪ After event notification is enabled, you can enable or disable event

notification by following instructions in Managing Event Notification Modes in
the Administrator Guide specific to your product model and version.
c. Click OK.
Step 4 (Optional) Click Test to verify the connectivity between the storage system and
the SMTP server.
Step 5 Click Save.
The Execution Result dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click Close.
----End

5.1.6.2 Enabling SMS Notification

After you enable the SMS notification function, alarms of the specified severity
and events are sent to a preset mobile phone by SMS.

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to DeviceManager as an administrator that has the
permission of one of the following:

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

– Super administrator
– Administrator
● A short messaging service (SMS) modem has been installed on the system or
maintenance terminal. The COM port of the SM modem has been configured
to send short messages. For details about how to set the SMS modem, see
5.1.8 (Optional) Setting a GSM Modem.
● The storage system sends only the alarms and events generated after email
notification is enabled to the GSM modem.

Context
The SM notification function is not available to read-only users.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Alarm Settings > SMS Notification.

Step 3 Set a mobile phone number to receive short messages.

1. Select Enable.
2. Specify the phone number of the SMS center.
NOTE

The phone number of the SMS service center must be prefixed with a plus sign (+)
and a country code.
3. Add a recipient mobile phone number.
a. Click Add.
The Add Recipient Information dialog box is displayed.
b. Set Recipient Number and Notification Type.
NOTE

▪ Notification Type can be set to Alarm or Event.

▪ When Notification Type is set to Alarm, you also need to set Alarm
Severity. The alarm severity can be Critical, Major, and Warning.

▪ After event notification is enabled, you can enable or disable event

notification by following instructions in Managing Event Notification Modes in
the Administrator Guide specific to your product model and version.
c. Click OK.

Step 4 (Optional) Click Test to check whether the storage system has sent a notification.

Step 5 Click Save.

The Execution Result dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

5.1.6.3 Enabling Alarm Dump

After you enable the alarm dump function, alarm messages will be dumped
automatically to the specified FTP or SFTP server when the alarm message
number exceeds the preset threshold.

Prerequisites
● When the FTP server is used to save alarm information, the FTP server
communicates with the storage system properly. To improve communication
reliability, you are advised to configure the FTP server and storage system on
the same LAN and configure their IP addresses on the same network
segment.
● When the SFTP server is used to save alarm information, the SFTP server
communicates with the storage system properly. To improve communication
reliability, you are advised to configure the SFTP server and storage system on
the same LAN and configure their IP addresses on the same network
segment.
● If alarm information is stored on an FTP server and a firewall is configured on
the network, port 21 is enabled.
● If alarm information is stored on an SFTP server and a firewall is configured
on the network, port 22 is enabled.

Context
● If alarm dump is not configured for the storage system, when the number of
generated events reaches 45,000, alarm "The Space That Stores Event Logs Is
To Be Used Up" is triggered. When the number of generated events reaches
50,000 (the upper limit), the system automatically deletes the earliest 10,000
events.
● If alarm dump is configured for the storage system, when the number of
generated events reaches 45,000, alarm "The Space That Stores Event Logs Is
To Be Used Up" is not triggered. When the number of generated events
reaches the 50,000 (the upper limit), the system automatically dumps and
deletes the earliest 10,000 events to the specified FTP or SFTP server. When
the number of generated login and logout events reaches the 20,000 (the
upper limit), the system automatically dumps and deletes the earliest 10,000
login and logout events.
NOTE

To ensure that all events generated by the storage system are not lost, you are advised to
enable alarm dump.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.
Step 2 Choose Settings > Alarm Settings.
Step 3 Modify parameters for alarm dump.
1. In the navigation pane, choose Alarm Dump.
2. Table 5-14 describes the related parameters.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-14 Alarm dump parameters

Parame Description Value
ter

Transpor Specifies the transport [Example]

t protocol for alarm dump, FTP
Protocol including SFTP and FTP.
NOTE
The storage systems support FTP
for compatibility concerns. You
are advised to use SFTP to
ensure data transmission
security.

Userna Specifies the user name of [Value range]

me the server that stores alarm – A character string of 1 to 63
information. characters.
– The user name cannot
contain single quotation
marks (').
[Example]
files

Passwor Specifies the password for [Value range]

d logging in to the server. – A character string of 1 to 63
characters.
– The password cannot contain
extended ASCII or Unicode
characters. Otherwise, the
password cannot be used
normally. It is recommended
that the password contain
characters from the following
categories:

▪ Digits (0-9)

▪ Uppercase characters (A-

Z)

▪ Lowercase characters (a-

z)

▪ Space

▪ Special characters such as

[\]^_{|}~`@!"#$%&'()*
+-./:;<=>?
[Example]
123456

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parame Description Value

ter

Server Indicates the server IP address [Value range]

or domain name address. – An IPv4 address has the
following requirements:

▪ The 32-bit address is

evenly divided into four
fields. Each 8-bit field is
expressed in dotted-
decimal.

▪ Each field of the IPv4

address must be an
integer.

▪ The value of the first field

ranges from 1 to 223
(excluding 127).

▪ The values of other fields

range from 0 to 255.

▪ An IPv4 address cannot be

set to a special address
such as a broadcast
address.
– An IPv6 address has the
following requirements:

▪ The 128-bit address is

evenly divided into eight
fields. Each 16-bit field is
expressed as four
hexadecimal digits. The
fields are separated by
colons.

▪ In each 16-bit field,

leading zeros can be
omitted for simplicity.
However, at least one
digit must be reserved in
each field.

▪ For further simplicity, if

the IP address contains a
long string of zeros, you
can represent the
neighboring zeros with
double colons (::) in the
colon-separated

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parame Description Value

ter

hexadecimal field. Each IP

address contains only one
double-colon (::). The
double-colon (::) can also
be used to represent
neighboring zeros of the
IP address.

▪ The IP address cannot be

a special address such as
a network address, loop
address, or multicast
address.
– The domain name has the
following requirements:

▪ A domain name is case-

insensitive.

▪ A domain name contains

1 to 255 characters.

▪ A domain name can

contain only English
letters (a to z and A to Z),
digits (0 to 9), periods (.),
and hyphens (-), and
cannot start or end with a
hyphen (-).
[Example]
192.168.1.100
fc00::1234
www.test.com

File Save Specifies the path where [Value range]

Path alarm information is dumped. The path consists of 1 to 255
To enable this parameter, characters.
create a path with a folder
under it, and type the name [Example]
of the folder in File Save If you set the path to G:\ and
Path on DeviceManager. create a folder named alarm on
the FTP server, type alarm in
File Save Path.

3. (Optional) Click Test to verify parameter values.

● If an error dialog box is displayed, at least one parameter value is incorrect.
Modify the parameter and retry.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

● If a success dialog box is displayed, the alarm dump parameters have been
configured correctly.
Step 4 Confirm the parameter configuration for the alarm dump.
1. Click Save.
The Execution Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
succeeded.
2. Click Close.

----End

5.1.6.4 Configuring SNMP

After configuring SNMP, you can query and configure storage system information
and receive alarm information about the storage system. There are SNMPv1,
SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3 protocols. The configuration procedure varies depending
on the protocol types.
A third-party network management tool must meet the following configuration
requirements:
● If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is used, the community strings used by the tool must
be the same as those configured on the storage system.
● If SNMPv3 is used, the SNMPv3 user name, authentication protocol, and
encryption protocol used by the tool must be the same as those configured
on the storage system.

5.1.6.4.1 SNMP Configuration Process

Figure 5-19 shows the SNMP configuration flowchart.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-19 SNMP configuration flowchart

Start

Configure a port for the

SNMP service.

SNMPv1 or
SNMPv3
SNMPv2c

Enable the SNMP function. Add a USM user.

Configure SNMP
community strings.

Add a trap server address.

End

5.1.6.4.2 Configuring a Port for the SNMP Service

Configure a port for the SNMP service. The default port ID of the SNMP service is
161. If you use the default port ID, skip this section.

Prerequisites
The storage system is running properly.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the CLI of the storage system. For details, see 5.1.1.4.1 Logging In to
the CLI (User Name + Password).

Step 2 Run the change snmp port port_number=port number command to configure a
port ID for the SNMP service.

For example, the following command configures port ID 20000 for the SNMP
service:

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

admin:/>change snmp port port_number=20000

WARNING: You are about to change the listening port of the SNMP service. This operation may cause the
restart of the SNMP service and use the newly configured listening port.
Suggestion: Before you perform this operation, disconnect the network management software and SNMP
service. After the configuration is successful, use the new port to connect to SNMP service.
Have you read warning message carefully?(y/n)y

Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y

Command executed successfully.
admin:/>

NOTE

The default value of port number is 161, and the value ranges from 20000 to 20100.

Step 3 Run the show snmp port command to query the port ID.
The command output is as follows:
admin:/>show snmp port

SNMP Listening Port : 20000

admin:/>

----End

5.1.6.4.3 Enabling the SNMP Function (Applicable to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c)

Before using SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, enable the SNMP function. If you want to use
SNMPv3, skip this section.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the CLI of the storage system.

Context
There are SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3 protocols. The storage system
supports SNMPv3 by default. SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c are disabled because of their
low security.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the change snmp version v1v2c_switch=On command to enable SNMPv1
and SNMPv2c.
The command output is as follows:
admin:/>change snmp version v1v2c_switch=On
CAUTION: You are about to enable SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c. But you are advised to use the secure SNMPv3
protocol only.
Do you wish to continue?(y/n)y
Command executed successfully.
admin:/>

Step 2 Run the show snmp version command to check whether the change takes effect.
The command output is as follows:
admin:/>show snmp version

SNMP V1V2C Switch : On

admin:/>

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

If SNMP V1V2C Switch is On in the command output, the storage system

supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.

----End

5.1.6.4.4 Configuring SNMP Community Strings (Applicable to SNMPv1 and

SNMPv2c)
If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is used, you must configure SNMP community strings on
the storage system for interworking with a third-party network management tool.
If you use the default SNMP community strings, skip this section.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the CLI of the storage system.

Context
If you use SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, you must configure community strings. A third-
party network management tool uses community strings to interwork with the
SNMP service of the storage system.

On a storage system, the default SNMP read community string is storage_public

and the default write community string is storage_private.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the change snmp community read_community=*********
write_community=********* command to configure community strings.
NOTE

When you enter a community string, asterisk signs (*) are displayed. Remember or record
the community string.

Parameter Description Usage

read_commu Read-only To ensure system security, change the

nity community string community strings when you log in to the
that is used for system for the first time.
reading device ● The default read-only community string
information. To is storage_public, and the read-write
obtain the community string is storage_private.
security policy of
● The community string is subject to the
the password, run
following conditions:
the show snmp
safe_strategy – The community string consists of 4 to
command. 32 characters and is case sensitive. Its
length can be changed running the
change snmp safe_strategy
command.
– The community string must comply
the password complexity
requirements:

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Usage

write_comm Read-write When password complexity is

unity community string Normal, the community string must
that is used for contain special characters and at least
reading or writing two types of the following characters:
device uppercase letters, lowercase letters,
information. To and digits.
obtain the When password complexity is High,
security policy of the community string must contain
the password, run special characters, uppercase letters,
the show snmp lowercase letters, and digits.
safe_strategy
When password complexity is low, the
command.
community string must contain any
types of the following characters:
special characters, uppercase letters,
lowercase letters, and digits.
– The read-only community string must
be different from the read-write
community.
NOTE
● To ensure compatibility, the system is
downward compatible with SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2c. To ensure data security, SNMPv3 is
recommended.
● You can run the change snmp safe_strategy
command to change the policies of
community strings.
● The special characters including `~!@#$
%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:'",<.>/? and space.

Step 2 Use the third-party network management tool to verify that the community
strings can be used to interwork with the storage system.

----End

5.1.6.4.5 Adding a USM User (Applicable to SNMPv3)

This section describes how to add a USM user.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Alarm Settings > USM User Management.

Step 3 Click Add.

The Add USM User dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set USM user parameters. For related parameters, see Table 5-15.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-15 USM user parameters

Parameter Description Value

Username Name of a USM user [Rules]

The user name is a 4 to
32 character string, can
contain only letters,
digits, underscores (_),
and hyphens (-), and
must start with a letter.
[Example]
usm001

User authentication Whether to enable user [Default Value]

authentication Enable

Authentication Protocol Authentication protocols [Default Value]

of a USM user including SHA
MD5 and SHA

Authentication Password Authentication password [Default Rules]

of a USM user The password must meet
the following complexity
requirements:
● Contains 6 to 32
characters.
● Contains special
characters. Special
characters include !"#
$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?
@[\]^`{_|}~ and
spaces.
● Contains any two
types of uppercase
letters, lowercase
letters, and digits.
● Cannot be the same
as the user name or
reverse user name.
NOTE
You can run the change
snmp safe_strategy
command on the CLI to
change the default rules.
[Example]
usmuser@123

Confirm Authentication Confirming [Example]

Password authentication password usmuser@123
of a USM user

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Data encryption Whether to enable data [Default Value]

encryption Enable

Encryption Protocol Encryption protocols of a [Default Value]

USM user, including DES, AES
3DES and AES
NOTE
The security performance
order of the three
encryption protocols is as
follows: AES > 3DES > DES.
For security purposes, you
are advised to select AES.

Data encryption Password used by a USM [Default Rules]

password user to encrypt data The password must meet
the following complexity
requirements:
● Contains 6 to 32
characters.
● Contains a special
character, such as a
space or one of the
following: !"#$%&'()*
+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^`{_|}~.
● Contains any two
types of uppercase
letters, lowercase
letters, and digits.
● Cannot be the same
as the user name or
reverse user name.
NOTE
You can run the change
snmp safe_strategy
command on the CLI to
change the default rules.
[Example]
dataencrypt@123

Confirm data encryption Confirming the password [Example]

password used by a USM user to dataencrypt@123
encrypt data

User level User level of a USM user, [Default Value]

including Read-write Read-write
and Read-only

Step 5 Click OK.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 6 Click Save.

The Execution Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
succeeded.

Step 7 Click Close.

----End

5.1.6.4.6 Adding a Trap Server Address

To report alarm and event messages to specific network management systems or
storage devices, add server addresses for those systems or devices.

Prerequisites
● The SNMP service has been enabled on the storage system. If the service has
not been enabled, run the change snmp status command in the developer
view to enable it. For details about how to use the command, see the
Advanced O&M Command Reference specific to your product model and
version.
● The SNMP service has been enabled on the server.
● A USM user has been created. For details about how to create a USM user,
see 5.1.6.4.5 Adding a USM User (Applicable to SNMPv3).
● A storage system only sends the alarms and events generated after the trap
server is configured and does not send alarms or events generated before the
configuration.
● Before configuring a domain name for the server, ensure that the DNS server
communicates properly with the storage system or third-party server.

Context
Trap is a type of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) message that
indicates the occurrence of an event. These types of messages are sent using User
Datagram Protocol (UDP) and are not reliable.

DeviceManager provides the trap function to send the alarm and event messages
of managed storage devices to another network management system or to a
device at a specific server address. If alarm and event messages are reported in
SNMP mode, you must configure trap server addresses.

NOTE

To enable the trap function, install the associated software on application servers. For
example, you must install MIB interface software on the application servers that run
Windows Server 2003. To download the software, click (here) and identify the required
software as instructed in MIB_Interface_File_Usage_Guide.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Alarm Settings.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 3 Add trap server addresses.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Trap Server Address Management.
2. Click Add.
The Add Server IP Address dialog box is displayed.
3. Set parameters for creating trap server addresses. Table 5-16 lists related
parameters.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-16 Server address parameters

Parameter Description Value

Server IP Address of a network [Value range]

Address management system – An IPv4 address has the following
or storage device for requirements:
receiving alarm and
event messages. ▪ The 32-bit address is evenly
divided into four fields. Each
8-bit field is expressed in
dotted-decimal.

▪ Each field of the IP address

cannot be blank and must be
an integer.

▪ The value of the first field

ranges from 1 to 223
(excluding 127).

▪ The values of other fields

range from 0 to 255.

▪ The IP address cannot be a

special address such as the
broadcast address.
– An IPv6 address has the following
requirements:

▪ The 128-bit address is evenly

divided into eight fields. Each
16-bit field is expressed as
four hexadecimal digits. The
fields are separated by colons.

▪ In each 16-bit field, zeros

before integers can be
removed. However, at least
one digit must be reserved in
each field.

▪ If the IP address contains a

long string of zeros, you can
represent the neighboring
zeros with double colons (::) in
the colon-separated
hexadecimal field. Each IP
address contains only one
double-colon (::). The double-
colon (::) can also be used to
represent neighboring zeros of
the IP address.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

▪ The IP address cannot be a

special address such as a
network address, loop address,
or multicast address.
[Example]
192.168.100.11
fc00::1234

Port Port for receiving [Value range]

alarm and event 1 to 65535
messages on the
network [Example]
management system 2234
or storage device.

Version SNMP version of a [Example]

network SNMPv3
management system
or storage device.
The possible value
can be SNMPv1,
SNMPv2c, or
SNMPv3.
NOTE
To ensure the data
security, you are
advised to use
SNMPv3.

USM User The user report [Example]

alarms and events usm001
from SNMP.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

Type Type of an alarm or [Example]

event sent by a Parsed
storage device to the
trap server.
– Parsed: parsed
alarms and events
of which IDs
correspond to the
same object
identifier (OID).
– Original: alarms
and events that
have not been
parsed.
– Parsed alarm oid:
parsed alarms and
events of which
IDs correspond to
different OIDs.
– Parsed time string:
parsed alarms and
events of which
IDs correspond to
the same OID. The
data type of the
event fields
generated by
alarms and events
is OCTET STRING.
– Original time
string: original
alarms and events
that have not
been parsed. The
data type of alarm
and event
occurring time
(character string)
and clearing time
(character string)
is OCTET STRING.
– All: alarms and
events including
the Parsed,
Original, and
Parsed alarm oid
ones.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Description Value

NOTE
– Parsed and original
are two forms of
one alarm or event.
An alarm or event
in the original form
carries only original
alarm or event
parameters,
whereas an alarm
or event in the
parsed form is
readable and
processed based on
the original form.
– When the value of
Version is
SNMPv1, the value
of Type cannot be
Parsed alarm oid.

4. Click OK.

Step 4 Confirm the creation of trap server addresses.

1. Click Save.
The Execution Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
succeeded.
2. Click Close.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
A storage device can send multiple types of alarms or events to the trap server
and each alarm or event has its own push format. For details, click (here) and
identify the required software as instructed in MIB_Interface_File_Usage_Guide.

5.1.6.5 Enabling Syslog Notification

To view storage system logs on a Syslog server, enable the Syslog notification
function.

5.1.6.5.1 Configuration Process

The Syslog notification supports the UDP, TCP and TCP+SSL/TLS protocols. When
alarms are reported using UDP and TCP protocols, certificate verification is not
required. When alarms are reported using the TCP+SSL/TLS protocol, the
certificate verification mode is used to enhance the security of storage system
logs. Figure 5-20 shows how to configure the Syslog notification.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-20 Configuring the Syslog notification

5.1.6.5.2 Generating and Exporting a Certificate on the Storage System

Before using the Syslog notification function on the storage system, generate and
export a Syslog certificate.

Context
● The certificate generated on the storage system is not signed and requires to
be signed on the signature server.
● For versions earlier than V500R007C70 Kunpeng, if you use a third-party tool
to export certificate request files, save the exported private key file as well.
These files, together with the signed certificate and CA certificate, are
exported to the storage system when the certificates are verified on the

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

storage system. For V500R007C70 Kunpeng and later versions, you do not
need to export the private key file.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Storage Settings > Value-added Service Settings >
Credential Management.

Step 3 Generate and export a Syslog certificate.

1. Set Certificate Type to Certificate of Syslog.
2. Select Certificate Key Algorithm from RSA 2048, RSA 4096, and ECC 256.
RSA 2048 is the default value and you can select a desired certificate key
algorithm to meet actual service requirements.
3. Click Generate and Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed. Select a path to save the certificate and
click Save.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the Syslog certificate is exported, sign the signature on it.

5.1.6.5.3 Signing the Certificate and Exporting the CA Certificate

After exporting the Syslog certificate, you need to sign the signature to activate it
and export the CA certificate.

Export the Syslog certificate and sign the signature based on actual conditions.
Export the CA certificate at the same time for subsequent operations.

5.1.6.5.4 Importing the Syslog Certificate and CA Certificate

Import and activate the Syslog certificate and CA certificate to the storage system
to enable the Syslog certificate to take effect.

Prerequisites
● The signed certificate and CA certificate exist.
● For versions earlier than V500R007C70 Kunpeng, ensure that the private key
file exists if the certificate file is exported and signed by a third-party tool.

Context
If the certificate file is exported and signed by a third-party tool, import the
private key file when you import the activated certificate and CA certificate.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● For versions earlier than V500R007C70 Kunpeng, a storage system supports

unidirectional and bidirectional authentication. During bidirectional authentication, the
private key file must be imported.
● For V500R007C70 Kunpeng and later versions, a storage system does not support
bidirectional authentication and you do not need to import the private key file.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Storage Settings > Value-added Service Settings >
Credential Management.
Step 3 Import and activate the signed certificate.
1. After the certificate has been signed by the server, click Import and Activate.
The Import Certificate dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the certificate type to Certificate of Syslog and import the signed
certificate and CA certificate. Table 5-17 describes related parameters.

Table 5-17 Certificate parameters

Parameter Description Value

Certificate Type Certificate types. [Example]

Certificate of Syslog

Certificate File Certificate file that has been [Example]

exported and signed. None

CA Certificate Certificate file of a server. [Example]

File None

Private Key File Private key file of a device. [Example]

None

3. Click OK.
The Warning dialog box is displayed.
4. Select I have read and understand the consequences associated with
performing this operation, and click OK.
The Success dialog box is displayed.
5. Click OK.
The certificate has been successfully imported and activated.

----End

5.1.6.5.5 Configuring Syslog Server Certificate and CA Certificate

Configure valid Syslog server certificate and CA certificate on the Syslog server to
use the Syslog notification function.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

You can generate the Syslog server certificate using a third-part device (such as
OpenSSL), sign the certificate using a third-party signature server, and export the
corresponding CA certificate.

NOTE

Ensure that the signature server used on the Syslog server is the same as that on the
storage system.

5.1.6.5.6 Enabling the Syslog Notification Function

Enable Syslog notification for the Syslog server to receive self-defined alarms and
events from devices with specified addresses.

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to DeviceManager as an administrator that has the
operation permission of:
– Super administrator
– Administrator
● Before configuring a domain name for the server, ensure that the DNS server
communicates properly with the storage system or third-party server.
● A storage system has been configured to send only the alarms and events
generated after the Syslog server is configured, but not alarms or events
generated before the configuration.
● Only one Syslog server is configured on a host (recommended). Otherwise,
you may not receive Syslog notification due to port conflicts.
NOTE

● Ensure that the UDP, TCP, and TCP+SSL/TLS protocols have been configured on the
Syslog server. Security risks arise if the protocol is UDP or TCP. You are advised to select
TCP+SSL/TLS.
● The protocol configured on the storage system must be consistent with that configured
on the Syslog server.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Alarm Settings > Syslog Notification.

Step 3 Configure the severity and notification type of alarm as well as address for
receiving Syslog messages.
1. Select Enable.
2. Configure parameters of the Syslog notification. Table 5-18 describes related
parameters.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-18 Parameters for Syslog notification

Parame Description Example
ter

Port Indicates the port ID of the Syslog 3

notification. The default value is 514.
NOTE
– The port ID configured on the storage
system must be the same as that
configured on the Syslog server.
– The value of the port ID ranges from 1 to
65535.

Protocol Indicates channels through which Syslog TCP+SSL/TLS

notifications are sent. The value can be
UDP, TCP, or TCP+SSL/TLS.
NOTE
– If you select UDP, ensure that the syslog
server can respond to ping packets
normally. Otherwise, Syslog notifications
of the storage system cannot be sent to
the receiving server.
– Ensure that the UDP, TCP, and TCP
+SSL/TLS protocols have been configured
on the Syslog server. Security risks arise if
the protocol is UDP or TCP. You are
advised to select the TCP+SSL/TLS
protocol.
– The protocol configured on the storage
system must be the same as that
configured on the Syslog server.

Severity Indicates the lowest severity of a Syslog Warning

alarm that can be sent. The value can
be Informational, Warning, Major, and
Critical.

Notificat Indicates the type of Syslog notification. Event

ion Type The value can be Alarm, Alarm
restoration, Event, eService collection
logs, and Security log.
NOTE
Security log is valid in V500R007C60SPC300
and later.

Send Indicates whether the device name If you want to send

Device should be sent to the Syslog server. the device name,
Name NOTE select the check box.
After Send Device Name is enabled, the Otherwise, deselect it.
system sends device names to the Syslog

notification server. You can choose

Settings > Basic Information > Device
Information to view device names.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parame Description Example

ter

Receiver Indicates the server IP address or 192.168.1.100

Server domain name address for receiving fc00::1234
Address Syslog notifications.
www.test.com
[Value range]
– An IPv4 address has the following
requirements:

▪ The 32-bit address is evenly

divided into four fields. Each 8-bit
field is expressed in dotted-
decimal.

▪ Each field of the IP address

cannot be blank and must be an
integer.

▪ The value of the first field ranges

from 1 to 223 (excluding 127).

▪ The values of other fields range

from 0 to 255.

▪ The IP address cannot be a special

address such as the broadcast
address.
– An IPv6 address has the following
requirements:

▪ The 128-bit address is evenly

divided into eight fields. Each 16-
bit field is expressed as four
hexadecimal digits. The fields are
separated by colons.

▪ In each 16-bit field, zeros before

integers can be removed.
However, at least one digit must
be reserved in each field.

▪ If the IP address contains a long

string of zeros, you can represent
the neighboring zeros with double
colons (::) in the colon-separated
hexadecimal field. Each IP address
contains only one double-colon
(::). The double-colon (::) can also
be used to represent neighboring
zeros of the IP address.

▪ The IP address cannot be a special

address such as a network

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parame Description Example

ter

address, loop address, or multicast

address.
– The domain name has the following
requirements:

▪ A domain name is not case-

sensitive and must be an English
domain name.

▪ An English domain name contains

1 to 255 characters.

▪ An English domain name can only

contain letters (a to z, A to Z),
digits (0 to 9), dots (.), and
hyphens (-). It cannot start or end
with a hyphen (-).

3. Add or remove receiver server addresses.

– Add receiver server addresses.
i. Click Add.
The Add Receiver Server Address dialog box is displayed.
ii. Add receiver server addresses.
iii. Click OK.
– Remove receiver server addresses.
Select receiver server addresses that you want to remove and click
Remove.

Step 4 (Optional) Click Test to test the connectivity between the storage system and
Syslog server.

Step 5 Click Save.

The Success dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After Syslog alarm notification is configured, alarms will be sent to a specified
application server or maintenance terminal. The Syslog alarm format is shown as
follows:
Info Receive Time | Facility | Severity | Info
2013/6/19 10:55:19 | Local7 | Error | alam:<186> 2015-06-19 10:47:10 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 240788 0xF00A000C
Major(1) Hard disk (Controller Enclosure CTE0, slot 2, serial-number XXXXXX) is in single-link state.
2013/6/19 10:58:53 | Local7 | Error | alam:<188> 2015-06-19 10:57:50 2015-06-19 10:57:50 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
241093 0xF0C90001 Warning(2): The Licence feature (xxx) is going to expire on 2015-08-14.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Output description:

Parameter Meaning Description

Info Receive Time Indicates the time when -

the Syslog server receives
the alarm information.

Facility Indicates the information The Facility field indicates the

source. type of an IP address which can
be IPv4 or IPv6. The value of
this field is LOG_LOCAL7 or
LOG_LOCAL6.

Severity Indicates the information The Severity field indicates the

severity level. severity of an alarm, which can
be emergency, error, warning,
or information. The value of
this field is Emerg, Error,
Warn, or Info.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Parameter Meaning Description

Info Indicates the content. The Info fields have a fixed

pattern in content. The first
field is the name of the process
that sends the message. This
field can be left blank when
certain versions of Syslog
protocols are used.
Information in <> represents
the prefix of the Syslog
protocol, which is stipulated by
the Syslog protocol and
indicates the severity level and
source.
Info contains the alarm
information.
● Time when an alarm occurs,
for example, 2015-06-19
10:57:50.
● IP address or device SN. It
represents the IP address or
SN of the storage device
that generates an alarm.
● Alarm SN. It represents the
SN generated within the
storage device. The value
ranges from 1 to
4294967295, for example
240788.
● Alarm ID. It represents a
type of alarm in
hexadecimal format, for
example, 0xF00A000C.
● Alarm severity. Alarm
severity includes info,
warning, major, and critical.
● Alarm type. Alarm types
include event (0), fault (1),
and recovery (2).
● Alarm content. For example:
The license feature (xxx) is
going to expire on
2015-08-14.
NOTE
If the alarm is cleared, the alarm
clearing time will be displayed
following the alarm occurrence
time, for example, 2015-06-19
10:57:50.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

Info Receive Time, Facility, and Severity are defined by the Syslog server. The parsing
result may vary according to tools.

5.1.7 Connecting a Storage System to the DNS Server

After a storage system is connected to a DNS server, you can access the storage
system through the IP address or domain name. This section describes how to
configure a system management IP address for the active or standby DNS.

Prerequisites
● The DNS has been configured and is running properly.
● Port 53 of the TCP/UDP protocol between the storage system and the DNS
server is enabled.

Context
● A DNS server is used to resolve host names in a domain.
● If you want to configure a standby DNS server, keep the domain names of the
active and standby servers consistent.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to DeviceManager.
Step 2 Choose Settings > Basic Information > DNS Service.

Step 3 Set the DNS information.

1. Set Active DNS IP Address.
2. Optional: Set Standby DNS IP Address 1.
3. Optional: Set Standby DNS IP Address 2.
NOTE

Configure the standby DNS IP address 1 first and then the standby DNS IP address 2.
4. Optional: Test the connection between the DNS server and storage system.
– You can click Test of each DNS IP address to test its availability.
– You can click Test All to test the connection between the DNS server and
storage system.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 4 Click Save.

The Success dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeded.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

5.1.8 (Optional) Setting a GSM Modem

After setting a GSM modem, you can configure short message notification in
management software. The storage system will send alarm information to a
specified mobile phone for you to know storage system exceptions and solve them
in a timely manner.

Prerequisites
A GSM modem has been installed and connected to the storage device.

Context

NOTICE

● If the GSM modem is not hot-swappable, do not insert or remove it when it is

running.
● If the storage system is enabled with short message notification, the serial port
on the controller enclosure serves only as the GSM modem.
● For a storage system with eight or more controllers, GSM modems can only be
configured for the first eight controllers.
● For a 2 U controller enclosure, you are advised to connect the GSM modem to
the serial port of controller A. If the serial port of controller A fails, connect the
GSM modem to the serial port of controller B.
● For a 4 U controller enclosure, you are advised to connect the GSM modem to
the serial port of controller 0. If the serial port of controller 0 fails, connect the
GSM modem to the serial port of controller 1.

To demonstrate how to configure a GSM modem, this section uses the COM1
serial port (baud rate = 115200 bit/s) on the host and the DB9 serial port on the
GSM modem (default baud rate = 9600 bit/s) as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert a SIM card into the GSM modem.

Step 2 Connect GSM modem to the serial port on the maintenance terminal through a
DB9 serial cable.

Step 3 Put the power cable of the GSM modem into the power supply outlet. Then power
on the GSM modem.

If the red indicator blinks, the GSM modem is successfully installed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 4 Run PuTTY. In the Category navigation tree, choose Session > Logging.
The Basic options for your PuTTY session page for configuring the GSM modem
is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21 Page for Basic options for your PuTTY session

Step 5 Click Open.

Step 6 Run the at command on the COM1-PuTTY. If the GSM modem has connected to
the host through the serial port, OK will appear in the command output. Go to
Step 9. If the system does not respond to the command, the GSM modem has
been disconnected from the serial port. Go to Step 7.
Step 7 Re-log in to the page for configuring the GSM modem, as shown in Figure 5-22.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-22 Page for configuring the GSM modem

Step 8 Reset the baud rate of the GSM modem until OK is displayed in the at command
output.
NOTE

● If the baud rate of the GSM modem is not confirmed, reconfigure it to ensure that the
baud rate of the GSM modem and that of the serial port are consistent. In this
condition, the PuTTY can be used to configure the GSM modem.
● The baud rate can be configured using the at+ipr=115200 command.

Step 9 Configure other parameters, for example whether to reply automatically.

Step 10 Click OK to save the configurations and exit. Run the related commands to verify
the configuration.
at
OK
at+ipr=115200
OK
ats0=1
OK
at&w
OK

Step 11 Upon successful configuration, connect the GSM modem to the serial port of the
storage system for use.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

For details about how to configure the GSM modem, see the corresponding manual
provided with the GSM modem.

----End

5.1.9 (Optional) Configuring the NTP Service

The NTP service can be installed in Windows and Linux. This section describes how
to configure the NTP service in the two types of operating systems. After
configuring the NTP service, you can get the NTP server certificate and related
private keys to obtain the time from a reliable server.

5.1.9.1 Configuring the NTP Service in Windows

Configure the NTP service on a Windows server, import the NTP certificate and
configure the NTP parameters on DeviceManager, and enable the storage system
to properly synchronize the time.

5.1.9.1.1 Configuring an NTP Service on a Server

Log in to the Windows command window of a storage device through a
management network port and generate the NTP certificate and private key file.

Prerequisites
● You have logged in to a Windows operating system through the management
network port.
● The NTP server has been set up on the Windows server. You can download
the NTP software from Meinberg website. For details, see the installation
guide at https://www.satsignal.eu/ntp/setup.html.
NOTE

● Before installation, run the net stop w32Time command to disable the Windows Time
(w32Time) service.
● In the following example, NTP is installed in the C:\Tools\ directory.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Windows server remotely through the maintenance terminal.
1. Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop Connection.
The Remote Desktop Connection dialog box is displayed.
2. In Computer, enter the IP address of the management network port on the
Windows server, and press Enter.
3. Type the user name and password, and press Enter.
The main interface of the server is displayed.

Step 2 On the Windows desktop, double-click Computer, select a proper disk partition,
and create the directory for saving the certificate and private key file.

For example, you can create folder ntp_config in disk partition D.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 3 Generate the NTP certificate and private key file.

1. Open the command window.
a. Press Windows+R to open the Run dialog box.
b. Type cmd and press Enter.
The command window is displayed.
2. Run the d: command to enter disk D.
3. Run the cd ntp_config command to open the ntp_config folder.
4. Run the ntp-keygen -c RSA-SHA256 -m 2048 -p server_password -T -H -l
3650 command to generate the private key file.
In the command, server_password is the private key encryption password
when the NTP certificate is generated and 3650 indicates the validity period
and is variable.
The execution result is as follows:
C:\Users\xxx>D:
D:\>cd ntp_config
D:\ntp_config>ntp-keygen -c RSA-SHA256 -m 2048 -p server_password -T -H -l 3650
Unable to initialize .rnd file
Using OpenSSL version OpenSSL 1.0.2k 26 Jan 2017
Using host ctuy5y002941131 group ctuy5y002941131
Generating RSA keys (2048 bits)...
RSA 312
Generating new host file and link
ntpkey_host_ctuy5y002941131->ntpkey_RSAhost_ctuy5y002941131.3707467127
Using host key as sign key
Generating new certificate ctuy5y002941131 RSA-SHA256
X509v3 Basic Constraints: critical,CA:TRUE
X509v3 Key Usage: digitalSignature,keyCertSign
X509v3 Extended Key Usage: trustRoot
Generating new cert file and link
ntpkey_cert_ctuy5y002941131->ntpkey_RSA-SHA256cert_ctuy5y002941131.3707467127

NOTICE

For the NTP server in Windows, if the certificate length is set to 2048, the
generated certificate fails to be signed, causing the storage system synchronization
time to slow down. Besides, an alarm indicating that the time server cannot be
used is reported. If the certificate length is set to 1024, such problem will not
occur but the certificate security decreases. If a certificate with higher security
level is required, you are advised to use the NTP server in the Linux operating
system and generate related certificates on this server.

Step 4 Run the hostname command to obtain the host name.

This section uses host name Storage as an example.
Step 5 Modify the NTP configuration file.
Enter C:\Tools\NTP\etc\, open the ntp.conf file in a text editor, and add the
following information at the beginning and end of the file:
● Add the following information at the beginning of the file:
crypto pw server_password host Storage ident Storage
keysdir "D:\ntp_config"

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

● Add the following information at the end of the file:

server 127.127.1.0
fudge 127.127.1.0 stratum 10
NOTE

server_password is the private key encryption password used in generating the certificate
(which can be specified by the user), Storage is the host name, and D:\ntp_config is the
directory where the certificate and private key files are saved.

Step 6 In the Windows command window, run the net stop ntp and net start ntp
commands to restart the NTP service.
NOTE

If multiple NTP servers need to be configured, you can copy the ntpkey_cert_Storage and
ntpkey_host_Storage files generated in Step 3 to the corresponding directory of other NTP
servers and change the file permission to be the same as that on the original server.
Configure the ntp.conf file under this server and restart the NTP service.

Step 7 Share the ntp_config directory.

1. In the Windows system, enter D:\, select ntp_config and right-click the
option.
2. In the displayed dialog box, click the Share tab.
3. Click Share....
The File Sharing dialog box is displayed.
4. In the drop-down box, select Everyone or enter the user name to which the
directory is shared and click Add.
5. Click Share, and wait about ten seconds.
The Your folder is shared. message is displayed.
6. Click Done. In the Map Properties dialog box, click Close to complete sharing
of the ntp_config directory.

----End

5.1.9.1.2 Configuring NTP Parameters on the Storage System

If the time of a storage system is inaccurate, adjust it so that you can accurately
determine the generation time of alarms, if any, based on the alarm log. This
section describes how to set the NTP service on the maintenance terminal and
enable the storage system to synchronize the server time.

Prerequisites
● The IP address of the NTP server has been obtained.
● The login user name and password of the NTP server have been obtained.
● You have configured the maintenance terminal in a Windows operating
system.
● The maintenance terminal is communicating with the storage system
properly.
● If the storage system has been added to a domain, the NTP server
communicates with the domain server properly, and NTP synchronization has
been completed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the certificate from the NTP server and copy it to the maintenance
terminal.
1. On the maintenance terminal, press Win+R.
The Run dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter \\NTP server IP address and click OK.
The maintenance terminal attempts to remotely access the NTP server.
3. Type the user name and password of the NTP server and click OK to enter the
shared directory.
4. Enter the ntp_config folder and select the NTP certificate that contains the
ntpkey_cert field and press Ctrl+C to copy the certificate.
5. Go back to the maintenance terminal desktop and press Ctrl+V to copy the
NTP certificate to the maintenance terminal.
6. Right-click the NTP certificate file and then select Rename from the shortcut
menu. Add the .crt extension to the file name, and click Enter.
Step 2 Log in to DeviceManager through the maintenance terminal.
Step 3 Import the NTP certificate.
1. Choose Settings > Storage Settings > Value-added Service Settings >
Credential Management.
2. Click Import and Activate.
The Import Certificate dialog box is displayed.
3. In Certificate Type, select NTP certificate.
4. Click Select next to CA Certificate File.
In the dialog box that is displayed, find the NTP file directory, select the NTP
certificate, and click Open.
5. Click OK.
The security alert dialog box is displayed.
6. Select I have read and understand the consequences associated with
performing this operation, and click OK.
The Success dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The certificate list shows imported certificates.
Step 4 Configure the NTP parameters.
1. Choose Settings > Basic Information > Device Time.
2. Select Set NTP automatic synchronization.
3. Type the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or domain name of the NTP server in
NTP Server Address.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

– A maximum of two NTP servers can be added. If the time of one NTP server
cannot be automatically synchronized to the device, the system synchronizes the
time from another NTP server.
– Ensure that the time of two NTP servers is consistent.
4. In NTP Authentication, select Enable.

NOTE

Some device models do not support this function. Only when NTPv4 or later is used, NTP
authentication can be enabled to complete identity authentication for the NTP server and
automatically synchronize the system time to the storage device.

Step 5 Confirm the NTP configuration.

1. Click Save.
The Warning dialog box is displayed.
2. Select I have read and understand the consequences associated with
performing this operation, and click OK.
The Execution Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
succeeded.
3. Click Close.

----End

5.1.9.2 Configuring the NTP Service in Linux

This section describes how to configure the NTP service on the Linux server, import
the NTP certificate and configure the NTP parameters on DeviceManager, and
enable the storage system to properly synchronize time.

5.1.9.2.1 Configuring an NTP Service on a Server

This section describes how to generate an NTP certificate and related private key
files on a Linux server.

Prerequisites
● The maintenance terminal has been connected to the server through a
management network port.
● GNU Compiler Collection (GCC) has been installed on the server running
Linux.

Context
This section uses PuTTY as an example. You can download PuTTY from the chiark
website.

Procedure
Step 1 Run PuTTY.
The PuTTY Configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-23.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-23 PuTTY Configuration

Step 2 Select Session. In Host Name (or IP address) of the Specify the destination you
want to connect to area, enter the IP address of the Linux server's management
network port that connects to the maintenance terminal and set Connection type
to SSH.
Step 3 Click Open. The CLI login page is displayed, as shown in the following:
login as:

Step 4 Enter the user name and password as prompted. The following shows the result of
a successful login.
Last login: Mon Apr 10 10:38:06 2017 from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
[storage ~]#

Step 5 Create the directory for saving the certificate and private key files.
1. Run the cd /etc command to go to the etc directory.
2. Run the mkdir ntp_config command to create the ntp_config folder.
The execution result is as follows:
Storage:~ # cd /etc/
Storage:/etc # mkdir ntp_config

Step 6 Generate the NTP certificate and private key file.

1. Run the cd ntp_config to open the ntp_config folder.
2. Run the ntp-keygen -c RSA-SHA256 -m 2048 -p server_password -T -H -l
3650 command to generate the private key file.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

server_password is the private key encryption password when the NTP

certificate is generated. 3650 indicates the validity period and is variable.
The execution result is as follows:
Storage:/etc # cd ntp_config
Storage:/etc/ntp_config # ntp-keygen -c RSA-SHA256 -m 2048 -p server_password -T -H -l 3650
Using OpenSSL version OpenSSL 0.9.8j-fips 07 Jan 2009
Using host Storage group Storage
Generating RSA keys (2048 bits)...
RSA 0 100 191 1 2 6 312
Generating new host file and link
ntpkey_host_Storage->ntpkey_RSAhost_Storage.3707466522
Using host key as sign key
Generating new certificate Storage RSA-SHA256
X509v3 Basic Constraints: critical,CA:TRUE
X509v3 Key Usage: digitalSignature,keyCertSign
X509v3 Extended Key Usage: trustRoot
Generating new cert file and link
ntpkey_cert_Storage->ntpkey_RSA-SHA256cert_Storage.3707466522
Storage:/etc/ntp_config #

NOTE

If a message shows that the parameter -l is not supported, upgrade the NTP on the server
to a version later than 4.2.8.

Step 7 Run the ls command to check the generated file.

The execution result is as follows:

Storage:/etc/ntp_config # ls
ntpkey_RSA-SHA256cert_Storage.3707466522
ntpkey_RSAhost_Storage.3707466522
ntpkey_cert_Storage
ntpkey_host_Storage

Step 8 Run the hostname command to obtain the host name.

This section uses host name Storage as an example.

Step 9 Run the vi /etc/ntp.conf command to modify the NTP configuration file.

Add the following information at the beginning of the ntp.conf file:

crypto pw server_password host Storage ident Storage

keysdir /etc/ntp_config

NOTE

server_password is the private key encryption password used in generating the certificate
(which can be specified by the user), Storage is the host name, and /etc/ntp_config is the
directory where the certificate and private key files are saved.

Step 10 Restart the NTP service.

● For the SUSE operating system, run the /etc/init.d/ntp restart command.
● For the Red Hat operating system, run systemctl restart ntpd.service
command.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

If multiple NTP servers need to be configured, you can copy the ntpkey_cert_Storage and
ntpkey_host_Storage files generated in Step 6 to the corresponding directory of other NTP
servers and change the file permission to be the same as that on the original server.
Configure the ntp.conf file under this server and restart the NTP service.

Step 11 Configure the samba user.

1. Input the cd /etc/init.d command and press Enter to enter the etc/init.d
directory.
2. Input the ./smb start command and press Enter to enable the SMB service.
3. Add the samba user (for example, root) and set a password. Run the
smbpasswd -a root command to add user root.
4. Run the vi /etc/samba/smb.conf command and press Enter. In the opened
file, add the following codes to change the user samba permission.
[ntp_config]
public=no
path=/etc/ntp_config
write list=@root root
writable=yes

NOTE

In write list=@root root, the two root fields are the account and password of the samba
user that were just added. Set the codes as required.

----End

5.1.9.2.2 Configuring NTP Parameters on the Storage System

If the time of a storage system is inaccurate, adjust it. In this way, when alarms
are generated, you can accurately determine the alarm generation time based on
alarm logs. This section describes how to set the NTP service on the maintenance
terminal and enable the storage system to synchronize the server time.

Prerequisites
● The IP address of the NTP server has been obtained.
● You have obtained the samba user name and password for logging in to the
NTP server.
● You have configured the maintenance terminal in a Linux operating system.
● The maintenance terminal is communicating with the storage system
properly.
● If the storage system has been added to a domain, the NTP server
communicates with the domain server properly, and NTP synchronization has
been completed.

Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the certificate from the NTP server and copy it to the maintenance
terminal.
1. On the maintenance terminal, press Win+R.
The Run dialog box is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

2. Enter \\NTP server IP address and click OK.

The maintenance terminal attempts to remotely access the NTP server.
3. Enter the samba user name and password for logging to the NTP server and
click OK to enter the shared directory.
4. Enter the ntp_config folder and select the NTP certificate that contains the
ntpkey_cert field and press Ctrl+C to copy the certificate.
5. Go back to the maintenance terminal desktop and press Ctrl+V to copy the
NTP certificate to the maintenance terminal.
6. Right-click the NTP certificate file and then select Rename from the shortcut
menu. Add the .crt extension to the file name, and click Enter.
Step 2 Log in to DeviceManager through the maintenance terminal.
Step 3 Import the NTP certificate.
1. Choose Settings > Storage Settings > Value-added Service Settings >
Credential Management.
2. Click Import and Activate.
The Import Certificate dialog box is displayed.
3. In Certificate Type, select NTP certificate.
4. Click Select next to CA Certificate File.
In the dialog box that is displayed, find the NTP file directory, select the NTP
certificate, and click Open.
5. Click OK.
The security alert dialog box is displayed.
6. Select I have read and understand the consequences associated with
performing this operation, and click OK.
The Success dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The certificate list shows imported certificates.
Step 4 Configure the NTP parameters.
1. Choose Settings > Basic Information > Device Time.
2. Select Set NTP automatic synchronization.
3. Type the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or domain name of the NTP server in
NTP Server Address.
NOTE

– A maximum of two NTP servers can be added. If the time of one NTP server
cannot be automatically synchronized to the device, the system synchronizes the
time from another NTP server.
– Ensure that the time of two NTP servers is consistent.
4. In NTP Authentication, select Enable.

NOTE

Some device models do not support this function. Only when NTPv4 or later is used, NTP
authentication can be enabled to complete identity authentication for the NTP server and
automatically synchronize the system time to the storage device.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 5 Confirm the NTP configuration.

1. Click Save.
The Warning dialog box is displayed.
2. Select I have read and understand the consequences associated with
performing this operation, and click OK.
The Execution Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
succeeded.
3. Click Close.

----End

5.1.10 (Optional) Building a Remote Maintenance

Environment
After building a remote maintenance environment, you can remotely manage and
maintain a storage system.

Prerequisites
● Before building a remote maintenance environment, ensure that PSTN phones
and external modems have been configured in equipment rooms.
● Each controller is equipped with one serial port connected to one modem.
Select the external modem based on your requirements.

Context
You can log in to the CLI through the storage system's serial port to perform
remote management and maintenance. This section uses two 56 K modems that
remotely access the storage system in PSTN dialup mode (in Windows) as an
example to describe how to configure modems for remote maintenance.

NOTE

The PSTN enhances data security by transmitting data over a telephone line instead of
Internet. To further improve security, you are advised to power off the modem when you
are not performing remote maintenance.

To implement remote maintenance, one remote modem and one local modem are
required.
Figure 5-24 shows the network topology.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-24 Remote maintenance network topology

In Figure 5-24, note the following information:

● Remote modem
The remote modem is connected to the storage system's serial port as an
answer end.
● Local modem
The local modem is connected to the maintenance terminal's serial port as a
call end.

On this network, a remote maintenance request is handled in this sequence:

maintenance terminal's serial port —> local modem —> PSTN —> remote
modem —> storage system's serial port.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure a remote modem as the answer end.
NOTE

To configure the remote modem, connect the remote modem to a maintenance terminal
temporarily.

1. Connect the remote modem to the power supply. Connect the remote
modem's serial port to the maintenance terminal's serial port using a serial
cable. Connect the remote modem LINE port to the PSTN with a telephone
cable.
2. Run PuTTY.
The PuTTY Configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-25.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-25 PuTTY Configuration dialog box

3. In Connection type, select Serial. In Speed, enter 115200.

4. Click Open.
5. Type at and press Enter. The screen displays:
OK!

6. Run the following AT commands in a sequence:

Type ats0=1 and press Enter. The screen displays:
OK!

Type at&d0 and press Enter. The screen displays:

OK!

Type at&k0 and press Enter. The screen displays:

OK!

Type at&w and press Enter. The screen displays:

OK!

Step 2 Configure a local modem as the call end.

1. Connect the modem to the nearest power supply. Connect the local modem's
serial port to the maintenance terminal's serial port using a serial cable.
Connect the local modem LINE port to the PSTN with a telephone cable.
2. Run PuTTY, and perform Step 1.2 to Step 1.4.
3. Type at and press Enter. The screen displays:

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

OK!
4. Set initial parameters for the local modem.
Type at&f&w and press Enter. The screen displays:
OK!

Step 3 Set up a connection.

NOTICE

Before setting up a connection, ensure that the remote modem is disconnected

from the storage device. Otherwise, the storage system's serial port will stop
responding because a large amount of data is sent from the remote modem
during modem dialup. When dialup tasks on both the remote modem and the
local modem are successful, connect the remote modem to the storage device
using a serial cable.

1. Run PuTTY on the maintenance terminal, and perform Step 1.2 to Step 1.4.
2. Type at and press Enter. The screen displays:
OK!
3. Type atdt XXX-YYYYYYYYY and press Enter for dialup.
If dialup tasks on both the remote modem and the local modem are
successful, the baud rate is CONNECT. (For modems of different
manufacturers, the screen displays vary.)
NOTE

– XXX-YYYYYYYYY (area code+phone number) indicates the telephone number of the

remote site. This phone number must allow direct dialup.
– During dialup, the OH indicator of the local modem is steady on.
– If error messages are displayed, such as NO CARRIER, BUSY, NO ANSWER, and
ERROR after the atdt command is executed, check the remote modem
configurations and then retry the dialup.
4. After the local modem is connected to the remote modem, connect the
remote modem to the storage device using a serial cable. Then press any key
to go to the CLI.
5. Enter the correct user name and password as prompted.
NOTE

– For security reasons, the entered password is not displayed.

– You are advised to change the default login password immediately after you log in
to the storage system for the first time and periodically change the password since
then. This reduces password leakage risks. For details about how to change a
password, see the Administrator Guide specific to your product model and version.
Authorized users only. All activity may be monitored and reported.

WARNING: You have accessed the system operated by Huawei.

You are required to have a personal authorisation from the system administrator before you use this
computer. Unauthorised access to or misuse of this system is prohibited.

System Name : xxxx

Health Status : Normal
Running Status : Normal
Total Capacity : 4.247TB

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

SN : xxxx
Location :
Product Model : xxxx
Product Version : xxxx
Time : 2014-08-26/14:33:34 +08:00

6. The CLI login succeeds. The storage device can now be remotely managed
and maintained.

----End

5.1.11 Other Configurations

Refer to the Administrator Guide specific to your product model to complete
system configurations (except basic storage service configurations), such as
security policies and available IP addresses.

5.2 (Optional) Deploying Multi-Controller Storage

Systems
This section describes how to deploy a storage system that has two or more
controller enclosures.

Deployment Procedure
Figure 5-26 shows the controller deployment procedure.

NOTICE

Before performing the operations in this section, ensure that the storage system
has no service. If the storage system is running any service, the operations will fail.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-26 Process of deploying controllers

Start

Direct-connection network Switched network

Install controller enclosures Install controller enclosures

and disk enclosures. and disk enclosures.

Install data switches.

Connect disk enclosures. Connect disk enclosures.

Install SO RDMA interface Install SO RDMA interface

modules. modules.

Cable controller enclosures. Cable controller enclosures

and data switches.

Power on and initialize data

switches.

Power on the storage system. Power on the storage system.

Enable the AD process for the

new controllers.

Use SmartKit to add controllers.

End

5.2.1 Adding Controllers in a Direct-Connection Network

This section describes the controller expansion via a direct-connection network for
a storage system that has two controller enclosures.

5.2.1.1 Adding Controllers Using SmartKit

After you have finished the connection between the original controller enclosure 0
and new controller enclosure 1 according to 3.1.2.4 (Optional) Connection
Planning for Multiple Controller Enclosures, use SmartKit to expand the
controllers.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Prerequisites
● The system network has been connected based on the controller expansion
scenario. For details, see 3.1.2.4 (Optional) Connection Planning for
Multiple Controller Enclosures.
● Controllers on all controller enclosures have the same memory size.
NOTE

You can run the show memory command to query the memory size of a controller.
● All controller enclosures have the same software version.
NOTE

You can run the show version all command to query the software version of
controller enclosures.
● Controller enclosures have been powered on. For a 4 U controller enclosure,
ensure that disk enclosures with coffer disk labels have been properly
connected to the controller enclosure.
● There are no critical or major alarms in the storage system.
● The public/private key pair and password of ibc_os_hs are the default values.
● The IP addresses of the management network ports on controller enclosures
connected to the management network must be different but on the same
network segment. For details, see 5.1.1.1 Changing the Initial IP Address of
the Management Network Port over a Serial Port and 5.1.1.3 (Optional)
Changing IP Addresses of Management Network Ports Using
DeviceManager.

Precautions
● SmartKit is used to expand controllers for the storage system.
● The operation procedure varies according to the SmartKit version. If you use
SmartKit of a different version, the GUI you see may be different from that in
this section.
● The Auto Discovery (AD) process has been enabled on all of the controllers in
the new controller enclosure 1. For details on how to enable the AD process,
see 6.1 What Can I Do If Controller Expansion Fails Because the Process
Lasts for Over 24 Hours After the Controllers to Be Added Are Powered
On?
NOTE

The AD process is used for message forwarding between controllers during expansion.
After enabling the AD process on all of the new controllers, you must add the new
controllers using SmartKit within 24 hours. Otherwise, controller expansion will fail
and you need to enable the AD process on the new controllers again.

Procedure
Step 1 Download SmartKit.
NOTE

If the maintenance terminal cannot access the Internet, you need to use another terminal
that can access the Internet to download the SmartKit installation package. Then copy
the package to the maintenance terminal.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

● If you are an enterprise user:

a. Use the maintenance terminal to log in to https://support.huawei.com/
enterprise and Choose Tools > SmartKit.
b. Select the latest version.
c. In the Version and Patch Software area, select and download the
software you need.
● If you are a carrier user:
a. Use the maintenance terminal to log in to https://support.huawei.com.
In the search box on the home page, type SmartKit and choose the
associated SmartKit path from the drop-down list.
b. On the search result page, click the Software tab.
c. On the Software tab page, click the latest version.
The page for downloading the software is displayed.
d. In the Software area, download the software you need.
Step 2 Install SmartKit.
1. On the maintenance terminal, run the SmartKit installation package and
follow the instructions provided by the installation wizard to install SmartKit.
After the installation is complete, SmartKit will automatically start.
2. Type your support website account as prompted to activate SmartKit and read
the safety precautions.
NOTE

– You can apply for an account of the support website at https://

support.huawei.com.
– You have 180 days to use an account after it is activated. If there are only 45 days
or fewer days left, you will be reminded of activating the tool again. If the tool is
not activated after 180 days, you only have permissions of a Visitor.

Step 3 Install the Expansion tool package.

● If your maintenance terminal can access the Internet, choose Home >
Storage > Capacity Expansion > Add Controllers. In the dialog box that is
displayed, click OK to download and install the expansion tool.
● If your maintenance terminal cannot access the Internet, click Function
Management on the Home page. Then click Import and select the tool
package exported from another SmartKit environment to install it in offline
mode.
NOTE

For details about offline installation, see "Function Export" and "Function Import" in the
SmartKit User Guide.

Step 4 Add the storage device for which you want to expand controllers to SmartKit.
1. In the main window of SmartKit, click the Device Management tab and
select Add.
The dialog box to add devices is displayed.
2. In Basic Information, select Specify IP Address (add a device by the IP
address) and enter the management IP address of the storage system. Then
click Next.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

3. In Config Information, enter the user name and password of the storage
system administrator and click Finish.

NOTE

● When a device is added for the first time or a device certificate is not trusted, a message
is displayed, indicating that the connection is not trusted.
● When an SSH server is added for the first time or after the fingerprint of an SSH server
changes, a prompt asks you whether you want to continue to register the SSH server.

Step 5 In the main window of SmartKit, choose Home > Storage > Capacity Expansion >
Add Controllers.

The Add Controllers page is displayed. Add the controllers by following the
wizard on SmartKit. For the detailed operations, see 7.2.1 Using SmartKit for
Capacity Expansion (Direct-Connection Network).

Step 6 Check the health status and running status of the added controllers and the disk
enclosure.

Log in to OceanStor DeviceManager and check whether Health Status of the new
controllers and disk enclosure is Normal and Running Status is Online.

● If yes, the capacity expansion is successful.

● If no, contact Huawei technical support.

----End

5.2.2 Adding Controllers in a Switched Network

This section describes the controller expansion via a switched network for a
storage system that has two or more controller enclosures.

5.2.2.1 Configuring New IP Addresses for the Management Network Ports on

the Switches and SSH Login User Information

5.2.2.1.1 Applicable to CE6865-48S8CQ-EI Switches

If you want to use SmartKit to configure switches, change the IP addresses of the
management network ports on the switches to ensure that the switches, the
maintenance terminal where SmartKit resides, and the original storage system are
on the same network.

Context
If you use SmartKit to configure a switch, modify the IP address of the switch's
management network port to ensure that this IP address resides in the same
network with that of the storage system.

NOTE

Before modifying the IP address of a switch's management network port and the SSH
account, run the reset saved-configuration command to reset the configuration file of the
switch. In the mean time, run the reboot fast command to restart the switch for the
resetting to take effect.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

WARNING

● The two switches used for controller expansion must be of the same model.
● Switches for controller expansion can only be used for scale-out networking. Do
not use them for front-end service networking or other purposes.
● Switches used for controller expansion cannot be stacked or cascaded.
● Do not upgrade the firmware of the switches used for controller expansion.

Procedure
Step 1 Use the serial port to log in to a switch.
Step 2 Run the system-view command to go to the system view.
Step 3 Run the command-privilege level rearrange command to improve command
levels in batches.
Step 4 Run the commit command to commit the configuration.
Step 5 Run the aaa command to enter the AAA view.
Step 6 Configure the SSH login user for the switch.
1. Run the undo local-user policy security-enhance command to delete SSH
login security policies.
2. Run the local-user username password irreversible-cipher password
command to add a user.
username is the user name and password is the user's password.
3. Run the local-user username service-type ssh command to set the user
service model.
4. Run the local-user username level 15 command to set the user level.
Step 7 Change the IP address of the management network port of the switch.
1. Run the interface MEth0/0/0 command to enter the management network
port view.
2. Run the ip address ipaddress mask command to set the IP address.
ipaddress is the new IP address of the management network port and mask is
the subnet mask of the management network port.
3. Optional: Run the ip route-static ipaddress mask gateway command to set
the switch gateway.
ipaddress indicates the destination network segment, mask indicates the
subnet mask of the destination network segment, and gateway indicates the
gateway.
NOTE

If the switches, the maintenance terminal where SmartKit resides, and the original storage
system are not on the same network, you need to set the switch gateway. To ensure that IP
addresses on all network segments can access switches, you are advised to set a default
gateway, namely, set ipaddress and mask to 0.0.0.0 and 0.0.0.0.

Step 8 Run the user-interface maximum-vty number command to change the number
of SSH connections.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

number is the maximum number of SSH connections and the value ranges from 0
to 21.

NOTE

If SmartKit is used to configure switches, you are advised to set number to a value larger
than six.

Step 9 Run the stelnet server enable command to enable the SSH service.
Step 10 Run the ssh authentication-type default password command to set the SSH
user authentication mode to password authentication.
Step 11 Run the user-interface vty 0 n command to set the number of concurrent users.
n indicates the number of concurrent users and the value must be smaller than
that set in Step 8.
Step 12 Run the authentication-mode aaa command to set the user authentication
mode.
Step 13 Run the user privilege level 15 command to set the user level.
Step 14 Run the protocol inbound ssh command to enable the user to support the SSH
protocol.
Step 15 Run the quit command to return to the system view.
Step 16 Run the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate the SSH public key for
the user.
Step 17 Run the commit command to submit the configuration file.
Step 18 Run the quit command to exit the system view.
Step 19 Run the save command to save the configuration file.

----End

Example
Add a user admin123 for SSH, and set a new IP address 172.31.8.54 for the
management network ports on the switches to ensure that the switches, the
maintenance terminal where tool resides, and the original storage system are on
the same network.
<HUAWEI>system-view
Enter system view, return user view with return command.
[~HUAWEI]command-privilege level rearrange
Info: The command levels have been upgraded in batch !
Privilege note: 0-VISIT, 1-MONITOR, 10-SYSTEM, 15-MANAGE
[*HUAWEI]commit
[~HUAWEI]aaa (Enter the AAA view.)
[~HUAWEI-aaa]undo local-user policy security-enhance (Delete SSH login security policies.)
Warning: The current operation may reduce the degree of account security. It is strongly recommended to
keep this enabled.
[*HUAWEI-aaa]local-user admin123 password irreversible-cipher huawei (Add a user admin123 for SSH.)
[*HUAWEI-aaa]local-user admin123 service-type ssh (Set the user service model.)
[*HUAWEI-aaa]local-user admin123 level 15 (Set the user level.)
[*HUAWEI-aaa]interface MEth0/0/0 (Enter the management network port view.)
[*HUAWEI-MEth0/0/0]ip address 172.31.8.54 255.255.0.0 (Set a new IP address for the management
network port)
[*HUAWEI-MEth0/0/0]ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.31.0.1 (Set a default gateway.)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

[*HUAWEI]user-interface maximum-vty 21 (Change the number of SSH connections.)

[*HUAWEI]stelnet server enable (Enable the SSH service.)
Info: The Stelnet server is already started.
[*HUAWEI]ssh authentication-type default password (Set the SSH user authentication mode to password
authentication.)
[*HUAWEI]user-interface vty 0 4 (Set the number of concurrent users.)
[*HUAWEI-ui-vty0-4]authentication-mode aaa (Set the user authentication mode.)[~HUAWEI-ui-
vty0-4]user privilege level 15 (Set the user level.)
Warning: The level of the user-interface(s) will be the default level of AAA users, please check whether it is
correct. After the authentication mode is set to AAA, you need to enter the user name and password to log
in.
[*HUAWEI-ui-vty0-4]user privilege level 15
[*HUAWEI-ui-vty0-4]protocol inbound ssh (Enable the user to support the SSH protocol.)
[*HUAWEI-ui-vty0-4]quit (Return to the system view.)
[*HUAWEI]rsa local-key-pair create (Generate the SSH public key for the user.)
The key name will be: HUAWEI_Host
% RSA keys defined for HUAWEI_Host already exist.
Confirm to replace them? Please select [Y/N]:y
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTE: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
it will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus [default = 2048]:
[*HUAWEI]commit
[~HUAWEI]quit
<HUAWEI>save
Warning: The current configuration will be written to the device. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: Please input the file name(*.cfg, *.zip, *.dat):2.dat
Now saving the current configuration to the slot 1 .......
Info: Save the configuration successfully.

5.2.2.1.2 Applicable to CE8850-32CQ-EI Switches

If you want to use SmartKit to configure switches, change the IP addresses of the
management network ports on the switches to ensure that the switches, the
maintenance terminal where SmartKit resides, and the original storage system are
on the same network.

NOTE

Before modifying the IP address of a switch's management network port and the SSH
account, run the reset saved-configuration command to reset the configuration file of the
switch. In the mean time, run the reboot fast command to restart the switch for the
resetting to take effect.

WARNING

● The two switches used for controller expansion must be of the same model.
● Switches for controller expansion can only be used for scale-out networking. Do
not use them for front-end service networking or other purposes.
● Switches used for controller expansion cannot be stacked or cascaded.
● Do not upgrade the firmware of the switches used for controller expansion.

Procedure
Step 1 Use the serial port to log in to a switch.
Step 2 Run the system-view command to go to the system view.
Step 3 Run the command-privilege level rearrange command to improve command
levels in batches.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 4 Run the commit command to commit the configuration.

Step 5 Run the aaa command to enter the AAA view.
Step 6 Configure the SSH login user for the switch.
1. Run the undo local-user policy security-enhance command to delete SSH
login security policies.
2. Run the local-user username password irreversible-cipher password
command to add a user.
username is the user name and password is the user's password.
3. Run the local-user username service-type ssh command to set the user
service model.
4. Run the local-user username level 15 command to set the user level.
Step 7 Change the IP address of the management network port of the switch.
1. Run the interface MEth0/0/0 command to enter the management network
port view.
2. Run the ip address ipaddress mask command to set the IP address.
ipaddress is the new IP address of the management network port and mask is
the subnet mask of the management network port.
3. Optional: Run the ip route-static ipaddress mask gateway command to set
the switch gateway.
ipaddress indicates the destination network segment, mask indicates the
subnet mask of the destination network segment, and gateway indicates the
gateway.
NOTE

If the switches, the maintenance terminal where SmartKit resides, and the original storage
system are not on the same network, you need to set the switch gateway. To ensure that IP
addresses on all network segments can access switches, you are advised to set a default
gateway, namely, set ipaddress and mask to 0.0.0.0 and 0.0.0.0.

Step 8 Run the user-interface maximum-vty number command to change the number
of SSH connections.
number is the maximum number of SSH connections and the value ranges from 0
to 21.

NOTE

If SmartKit is used to configure switches, you are advised to set number to a value larger
than six.

Step 9 Run the stelnet server enable command to enable the SSH service.
Step 10 Run the ssh authentication-type default password command to set the SSH
user authentication mode to password authentication.
Step 11 Run the user-interface vty 0 n command to set the number of concurrent users.
n indicates the number of concurrent users and the value must be smaller than
that set in Step 8.
Step 12 Run the authentication-mode aaa command to set the user authentication
mode.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 13 Run the user privilege level 15 command to set the user level.
Step 14 Run the protocol inbound ssh command to enable the user to support the SSH
protocol.
Step 15 Run the quit command to return to the system view.
Step 16 Run the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate the SSH public key for
the user.
Step 17 Run the commit command to submit the configuration file.
Step 18 Run the quit command to exit the system view.
Step 19 Run the save command to save the configuration file.

----End

5.2.2.1.3 Applicable to CE8850-SAN Switches

If you want to use SmartKit to configure switches, change the IP addresses of the
management network ports on the switches to ensure that the switches, the
maintenance terminal where SmartKit resides, and the original storage system are
on the same network.

Context
If you use SmartKit to configure a switch, modify the IP address of the switch's
management network port to ensure that this IP address resides in the same
network with that of the storage system.

NOTE

Before modifying the IP address of a switch's management network port and the SSH
account, run the reset saved-configuration command to reset the configuration file of the
switch. In the mean time, run the reboot command to restart the switch for the resetting to
take effect.

WARNING

● The two switches used for controller expansion must be of the same model.
● Switches for controller expansion can only be used for scale-out networking. Do
not use them for front-end service networking or other purposes.
● Switches used for controller expansion cannot be stacked or cascaded.
● Do not upgrade the firmware of the switches used for controller expansion.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the switch using the serial port.
Step 2 Run the system-view command to go to the system view.
Step 3 Change the IP address of the management network port of the switch.
1. Run the interface MEth 0/0/0 command to enter the management network
port.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

2. Run the undo ip binding vpn-instance _management_vpn_ command to

unbind the interface from the VPN instance.
NOTE

If the following error message is displayed, the interface has been unbound from the
VPN instance. Ignore the error message.
[*HUAWEI-MEth0/0/0]undo ip binding vpn-instance _management_vpn_
Error: The VPN instance is not bound to the interface.

3. Run the commit command to commit the configuration.

4. Run the ip address ipaddress mask command to set the IP address.
ipaddress is the new IP address of the management network port and mask is
the subnet mask.
5. (Optional) Run the ip route-static ipaddress mask gateway command to set
the switch gateway.
ipaddress is the destination network segment, mask is the subnet mask of the
destination network segment, and gateway is the gateway.
NOTE

If the switches, the maintenance terminal where SmartKit resides, and the original
storage system are not on the same network, you must set the switch gateway. To
ensure that IP addresses on all network segments can access the switches, you are
advised to use the default gateway, that is, set ipaddress and mask to 0.0.0.0 and
0.0.0.0.
6. Run the commit command to commit the configuration.
7. Run the quit command.
Step 4 Set the user authentication mode and enable the user to support the SSH
protocol.
1. Run the system-view command to go to the system view.
2. Run the user-interface vty 0 4 command to set the number of concurrent
users.
3. Run the authentication-mode aaa command to set the user authentication
mode.
4. Run the protocol inbound ssh command to enable the user to support the
SSH protocol.
5. Run the quit command to return to the system view.
6. Run the commit command to commit the configuration.
Step 5 Set the AAA local user name and password.
1. Run the aaa command to enter the AAA view.
2. Run the local-user username password irreversible-cipher password
command to add an AAA local user.
In the command, username indicates the user name, and password indicates
the password of the user.
3. Run the local-user username service-type ssh terminal command to set the
user service mode.
4. Run the local-user username privilege level 3 command to set the user level.
5. Run the quit command to return to the system view.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

6. Run the commit command to commit the configuration.

Step 6 Create an SSH user and configure the authentication mode and service type for
the user.
1. Run the ssh user username command to create an SSH user with the same
name as the AAA local user.
2. Run the ssh user username authentication-type password command to set
the SSH user authentication mode to password authentication.
3. Run the ssh user username service-type stelnet command to set the service
type of the SSH user to STelnet.
4. Run the ssh server-source -i meth 0/0/0 command to configure the source
interface of the SSH server.
NOTE

If the login address is an IPv6 address, run the ssh ipv6 server-source -a ipv6-address
command to configure the source IP address of the SSH server.
5. Run the stelnet server enable command to enable the STelnet server
functions.
6. Run the commit command to commit the configuration.

Step 7 Run the ssh server publickey ecc rsa rsa_sha2_256 rsa_sha2_512 command to
enable the ECC and RSA encryption algorithms.

Step 8 Run the quit command to exit the system view.

Step 9 Run the save command to save the configuration file.

Step 10 Run the reboot command to restart the switch for the configurations to take
effect.

Step 11 Log in to the switch using SSH as the SSH user created in Step 6 and set the
password as prompted.

----End

5.2.2.2 (Optional) Manually Configuring Switches

If the maintenance terminal where SmartKit is installed cannot log in to the
switch through the management network port of the switch, you need to
manually configure the switch by referring to this section. If the maintenance
terminal where SmartKit is installed can log in to the switch through the
management network port of the switch, SmartKit automatically configures the
switch during controller expansion. In this case, skip this section.

5.2.2.2.1 Applicable to CE6865-48S8CQ-EI Switches

If the maintenance terminal where SmartKit is installed cannot log in to the
switch through the management network port of the switch, you need to
manually configure the switch by referring to this section. If the maintenance
terminal where SmartKit is installed can log in to the switch through the
management network port of the switch, SmartKit automatically configures the
switch during controller expansion. In this case, skip this section.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

For details about how to configure switches, see the CloudEngine 7800&6800&5800 Product
Documentation.

Procedure for Configuring Switch 0

Step 1 Set the global parameters of the spanning tree.
//Enter the system view.
system-view
//Set the spanning tree mode to MSTP.
stp mode mstp
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Enter the spanning tree configuration view.
stp region-configuration
//Configure a spanning tree instance.
instance 1 vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 1200 to 1203
1300 to 1303 4005 4007
instance 1 vlan 4010 4011
instance 2 vlan 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4008
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Exit the spanning tree configuration view.
quit

Step 2 Configure spanning tree ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations for other spanning tree functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 25GE 1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48
//Enable root bridge protection on the ports.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit
● Method 2: Configure each port separately.
NOTE

The following uses port 25GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 25GE
1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
interface 25GE 1/0/1
//Enable root bridge protection on the port.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 3 Configure global LLDP parameters.

//Configure the system name.

sysname STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

//Enable LLDP globally.

lldp enable
//Set the number of LLDP packets to be quickly sent.
lldp fast-count 3
//Set the LLDP restart delay.
lldp restart 1
//Set the interval for sending LLDP packets.
lldp transmit interval 20
//Configure the LLDP keepalive factor.
lldp transmit multiplier 10
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit

Step 4 Configure LLDP ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other LLDP functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 25GE 1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48
//Enable LLDP on the ports.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 25GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 25GE
1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
interface 25GE 1/0/1
//Enable LLDP on the port.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1
quit

Step 5 Configure global RDMA parameters.

//Create a WRED drop profile and enter the WRED drop profile view.
drop-profile ecn_25G
//Configure ECN parameters.
ecn buffer-size low-limit 7000 high-limit 200000 discard-percentage 30
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the WRED drop profile view.
quit
//Configure the accuracy of the hardware-based PFC deadlock detection interval and recovery time.
dcb pfc deadlock-detect interval 100
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Enter the default PFC configuration view.
dcb pfc
//Configure the RDMA link forwarding priority.
priority 0 2
//Configure PFC deadlock detection.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

priority 0 deadlock-detect time 2 deadlock-recovery time 15

priority 0 turn-off threshold 20
priority 2 deadlock-detect time 2 deadlock-recovery time 15
priority 2 turn-off threshold 20
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the global RDMA configuration view.
quit

Step 6 Configure the RDMA parameters of ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other RDMA functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 25GE 1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
undo flow-control
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xoff dynamic 4 hdrm 2000
qos drr 0 2
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_25G
qos queue 2 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 25GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 25GE
1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1
interface 25GE 1/0/1
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
undo flow-control
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xoff dynamic 4 hdrm 2000
qos drr 0 2
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_25G
qos queue 2 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 7 Configure global VLAN parameters.

//Create VLANs in a batch.

vlan batch 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 4011
vlan batch 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4005 4007
4008 4010
//Validate the configuration.
commit

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 8 Set port VLAN parameters.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other VLAN functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 25GE 1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48
//Set the ports to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 25GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 25GE
1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
interface 25GE 1/0/1
//Set the port to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 9 Save the settings.

//Enter the user view.
quit
//Save the settings.
save STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0.cfg
//Modify the boot items for the next startup.
startup saved-configuration STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0.cfg

----End

Procedure for Configuring Switch 1

Step 1 Set the global parameters of the spanning tree.
//Enter the system view.
system-view
//Set the spanning tree mode to MSTP.
stp mode mstp
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Enter the spanning tree configuration view.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

stp region-configuration
//Configure a spanning tree instance.
instance 1 vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 1200 to 1203
1300 to 1303 4005 4007
instance 1 vlan 4010 4011
instance 2 vlan 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4008
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Exit the spanning tree configuration view.
quit

Step 2 Configure spanning tree ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations for other spanning tree functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 25GE 1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48
//Enable root bridge protection on the ports.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 25GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 25GE
1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
interface 25GE 1/0/1
//Enable root bridge protection on the port.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 3 Configure global LLDP parameters.

//Configure the system name.

sysname STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1
//Enable LLDP globally.
lldp enable
//Set the number of LLDP packets to be quickly sent.
lldp fast-count 3
//Set the LLDP restart delay.
lldp restart 1
//Set the interval for sending LLDP packets.
lldp transmit interval 20
//Configure the LLDP keepalive factor.
lldp transmit multiplier 10
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit

Step 4 Configure LLDP ports.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other LLDP functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 25GE 1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48
//Enable LLDP on the ports.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 25GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 25GE
1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
interface 25GE 1/0/1
//Enable LLDP on the port.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1
quit

Step 5 Configure global RDMA parameters.

//Create a WRED drop profile and enter the WRED drop profile view.
drop-profile ecn_25G
//Configure ECN parameters.
ecn buffer-size low-limit 7000 high-limit 200000 discard-percentage 30
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the WRED drop profile view.
quit
//Configure the accuracy of the hardware-based PFC deadlock detection interval and recovery time.
dcb pfc deadlock-detect interval 100
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Enter the default PFC configuration view.
dcb pfc
//Configure the RDMA link forwarding priority.
priority 0 2
//Configure PFC deadlock detection.
priority 0 deadlock-detect time 2 deadlock-recovery time 15
priority 0 turn-off threshold 20
priority 2 deadlock-detect time 2 deadlock-recovery time 15
priority 2 turn-off threshold 20
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the global RDMA configuration view.
quit

Step 6 Configure the RDMA parameters of ports.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other RDMA functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 25GE 1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
undo flow-control
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xoff dynamic 4 hdrm 2000
qos drr 0 2
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_25G
qos queue 2 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 25GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 25GE
1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1
interface 25GE 1/0/1
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
undo flow-control
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xoff dynamic 4 hdrm 2000
qos drr 0 2
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_25G
qos queue 2 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 7 Configure global VLAN parameters.

//Create VLANs in a batch.

vlan batch 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 4011
vlan batch 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4005 4007
4008 4010
//Validate the configuration.
commit

Step 8 Set port VLAN parameters.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other VLAN functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 25GE 1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

//Set the ports to work in trunk mode.

port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit
● Method 2: Configure each port separately.
NOTE

The following uses port 25GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 25GE
1/0/1 to 25GE 1/0/48 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
interface 25GE 1/0/1
//Set the port to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 25GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 9 Save the settings.

//Enter the user view.
quit
//Save the settings.
save STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1.cfg
//Modify the boot items for the next startup.
startup saved-configuration STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1.cfg

----End

5.2.2.2.2 Applicable to CE8850-32CQ-EI Switches

If the maintenance terminal where SmartKit is installed cannot log in to the
switch through the management network port of the switch, you need to
manually configure the switch by referring to this section. If the maintenance
terminal where SmartKit is installed can log in to the switch through the
management network port of the switch, SmartKit automatically configures the
switch during controller expansion. In this case, skip this section.

Procedure for Configuring Switch 0

Step 1 Set the global parameters of the spanning tree.
//Enter the system view.
system-view
//Set the spanning tree mode to MSTP.
stp mode mstp
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Enter the spanning tree configuration view.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

stp region-configuration
//Configure a spanning tree instance.
instance 1 vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 1200 to 1203
1300 to 1303 4005 4007
instance 1 vlan 4010 4011
instance 2 vlan 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4008
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Exit the spanning tree configuration view.
quit

Step 2 Configure spanning tree ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations for other spanning tree functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Enable root bridge protection on the ports.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Enable root bridge protection on the port.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 3 Configure global LLDP parameters.

//Configure the system name.

sysname STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0
//Enable LLDP globally.
lldp enable
//Set the number of LLDP packets to be quickly sent.
lldp fast-count 3
//Set the LLDP restart delay.
lldp restart 1
//Set the interval for sending LLDP packets.
lldp transmit interval 20
//Configure the LLDP keepalive factor.
lldp transmit multiplier 10
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit

Step 4 Configure LLDP ports.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other LLDP functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Enable LLDP on the ports.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Enable LLDP on the port.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 5 Configure global RDMA parameters.

//Create a WRED drop profile and enter the WRED drop profile view.
drop-profile ecn_100G
//Configure ECN parameters.
ecn buffer-size low-limit 7000 high-limit 750000 discard-percentage 30
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the WRED drop profile view.
quit
//Configure the accuracy of the hardware-based PFC deadlock detection interval and recovery time.
dcb pfc deadlock-detect interval 100
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Enter the default PFC configuration view.
dcb pfc
//Configure the RDMA link forwarding priority.
priority 2 3
//Configure PFC deadlock detection.
priority 2 deadlock-detect time 2 deadlock-recovery time 15
priority 2 turn-off threshold 20
priority 3 deadlock-detect time 2 deadlock-recovery time 15
priority 3 turn-off threshold 20
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the global RDMA configuration view.
quit

Step 6 Configure the RDMA parameters of ports.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other RDMA functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
undo flow-control
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xoff dynamic 4
dcb pfc buffer 3 xoff dynamic 4
qos drr 0 2 3
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos queue 3 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos buffer queue 3 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 3 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 2 ecn
qos queue 3 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
undo flow-control
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xoff dynamic 4
dcb pfc buffer 3 xoff dynamic 4
qos drr 0 2 3
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos queue 3 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos buffer queue 3 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 3 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 2 ecn
qos queue 3 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 7 Configure global VLAN parameters.

//Create VLANs in a batch.

vlan batch 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 4011
vlan batch 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4005 4007
4008 4010
//Validate the configuration.
commit

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 8 Set port VLAN parameters.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other VLAN functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Set the ports to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Set the port to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 9 Save the settings.

//Enter the user view.
quit
//Save the settings.
save STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0.cfg
//Modify the boot items for the next startup.
startup saved-configuration STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0.cfg

----End

Procedure for Configuring Switch 1

Step 1 Set the global parameters of the spanning tree.
//Enter the system view.
system-view
//Set the spanning tree mode to MSTP.
stp mode mstp
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Enter the spanning tree configuration view.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

stp region-configuration
//Configure a spanning tree instance.
instance 1 vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 1200 to 1203
1300 to 1303 4005 4007
instance 1 vlan 4010 4011
instance 2 vlan 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4008
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Exit the spanning tree configuration view.
quit

Step 2 Configure spanning tree ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations for other spanning tree functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Enable root bridge protection on the ports.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Enable root bridge protection on the port.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 3 Configure global LLDP parameters.

//Configure the system name.

sysname STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1
//Enable LLDP globally.
lldp enable
//Set the number of LLDP packets to be quickly sent.
lldp fast-count 3
//Set the LLDP restart delay.
lldp restart 1
//Set the interval for sending LLDP packets.
lldp transmit interval 20
//Configure the LLDP keepalive factor.
lldp transmit multiplier 10
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit

Step 4 Configure LLDP ports.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other LLDP functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Enable LLDP on the ports.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Enable LLDP on the port.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 5 Configure global RDMA parameters.

//Create a WRED drop profile and enter the WRED drop profile view.
drop-profile ecn_100G
//Configure ECN parameters.
ecn buffer-size low-limit 7000 high-limit 750000 discard-percentage 30
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the WRED drop profile view.
quit
//Configure the accuracy of the hardware-based PFC deadlock detection interval and recovery time.
dcb pfc deadlock-detect interval 100
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Enter the default PFC configuration view.
dcb pfc
//Configure the RDMA link forwarding priority.
priority 2 3
//Configure PFC deadlock detection.
priority 2 deadlock-detect time 2 deadlock-recovery time 15
priority 2 turn-off threshold 20
priority 3 deadlock-detect time 2 deadlock-recovery time 15
priority 3 turn-off threshold 20
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the global RDMA configuration view.
quit

Step 6 Configure the RDMA parameters of ports.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other RDMA functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
undo flow-control
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xoff dynamic 4
dcb pfc buffer 3 xoff dynamic 4
qos drr 0 2 3
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos queue 3 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos buffer queue 3 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 3 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 2 ecn
qos queue 3 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
undo flow-control
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xoff dynamic 4
dcb pfc buffer 3 xoff dynamic 4
qos drr 0 2 3
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos queue 3 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos buffer queue 3 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 3 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 2 ecn
qos queue 3 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 7 Configure global VLAN parameters.

//Create VLANs in a batch.

vlan batch 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 4011
vlan batch 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4005 4007
4008 4010
//Validate the configuration.
commit

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 8 Set port VLAN parameters.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other VLAN functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Set the ports to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Set the port to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 9 Save the settings.

//Enter the user view.
quit
//Save the settings.
save STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1.cfg
//Modify the boot items for the next startup.
startup saved-configuration STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1.cfg

----End

5.2.2.2.3 Applicable to CE8850-SAN Switches

If the maintenance terminal where SmartKit is installed cannot log in to the
switch through the management network port of the switch, you need to
manually configure the switch by referring to this section. If the maintenance
terminal where SmartKit is installed can log in to the switch through the
management network port of the switch, SmartKit automatically configures the
switch during controller expansion. In this case, skip this section.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Procedure for Configuring Switch 0

Step 1 Set the global parameters of the spanning tree.
//Enter the system view.
system-view
//Set the spanning tree mode to MSTP.
stp mode mstp
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Enter the spanning tree configuration view.
stp region-configuration
//Configure a spanning tree instance.
instance 1 vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 1200 to 1203
1300 to 1303 4005 4007
instance 1 vlan 4010 4011
instance 2 vlan 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4008
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Exit the spanning tree configuration view.
quit

Step 2 Configure spanning tree ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations for other spanning tree functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Enable root bridge protection on the ports.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Enable root bridge protection on the port.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 3 Configure global LLDP parameters.

//Configure the system name.
sysname STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0
//Enable LLDP globally.
lldp enable
//Set the number of LLDP packets to be quickly sent.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

lldp fast-count 3
//Set the LLDP restart delay.
lldp restart 1
//Set the interval for sending LLDP packets.
lldp transmit interval 20
//Configure the LLDP keepalive factor.
lldp transmit multiplier 10
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit

Step 4 Configure LLDP ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other LLDP functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Enable LLDP on the ports.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Enable LLDP on the port.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 5 Configure global RDMA parameters.

//Create a WRED drop profile and enter the WRED drop profile view.
drop-profile ecn_100G
//Configure ECN parameters.
ecn buffer-size low-limit 7000 high-limit 750000 discard-percentage 30
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the WRED drop profile view.
quit
//Configure the accuracy of the hardware-based PFC deadlock detection interval and recovery time.
dcb pfc deadlock-detect timer 100
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Enter the default PFC configuration view.
dcb pfc
//Configure the RDMA link forwarding priority.
priority 2 3
//Configure PFC deadlock detection.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

priority 2 turn-off threshold 30

priority 3 turn-off threshold 30
dcb pfc deadlock recovery-behavior forwarding slot 1
dcb pfc deadlock-detect timer 200
dcb pfc deadlock-recovery timer 1500
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the global RDMA configuration view.
quit

Step 6 Configure the RDMA parameters of ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other RDMA functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xon dynamic 6 xoff dynamic 9
dcb pfc buffer 3 xon dynamic 6 xoff dynamic 9
qos drr 0 2 3
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos queue 3 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos buffer queue 3 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 3 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 2 ecn
qos queue 3 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit
● Method 2: Configure each port separately.
NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xon dynamic 6 xoff dynamic 9
dcb pfc buffer 3 xon dynamic 6 xoff dynamic 9
qos drr 0 2 3
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos queue 3 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos buffer queue 3 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 3 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 2 ecn
qos queue 3 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.

quit

Step 7 Configure global VLAN parameters.

//Create VLANs in a batch.
vlan batch 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 4011
vlan batch 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4005 4007
4008 4010
//Validate the configuration.
commit

Step 8 Set port VLAN parameters.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other VLAN functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Set the ports to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Set the port to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 9 Save the settings.

//Enter the user view.
quit
//Save the settings.
save STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0.cfg

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

//Modify the boot items for the next startup.

startup saved-configuration STORAGE-SCALE-SW-0.cfg

----End

Procedure for Configuring Switch 1

Step 1 Set the global parameters of the spanning tree.
//Enter the system view.
system-view
//Set the spanning tree mode to MSTP.
stp mode mstp
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Enter the spanning tree configuration view.
stp region-configuration
//Configure a spanning tree instance.
instance 1 vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 1200 to 1203
1300 to 1303 4005 4007
instance 1 vlan 4010 4011
instance 2 vlan 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4008
//Validate the spanning tree configuration.
commit
//Exit the spanning tree configuration view.
quit

Step 2 Configure spanning tree ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations for other spanning tree functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Enable root bridge protection on the ports.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Enable root bridge protection on the port.
stp root-protection
//Enable the edge port function.
stp edged-port enable
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 349

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 3 Configure global LLDP parameters.

//Configure the system name.
sysname STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1
//Enable LLDP globally.
lldp enable
//Set the number of LLDP packets to be quickly sent.
lldp fast-count 3
//Set the LLDP restart delay.
lldp restart 1
//Set the interval for sending LLDP packets.
lldp transmit interval 20
//Configure the LLDP keepalive factor.
lldp transmit multiplier 10
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit

Step 4 Configure LLDP ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other LLDP functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Enable LLDP on the ports.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit
● Method 2: Configure each port separately.
NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Enable LLDP on the port.
undo lldp disable
//Allow LLDP packet transmission and reception.
lldp admin-status txrx
//Validate all the preceding configurations.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 5 Configure global RDMA parameters.

//Create a WRED drop profile and enter the WRED drop profile view.
drop-profile ecn_100G
//Configure ECN parameters.
ecn buffer-size low-limit 7000 high-limit 750000 discard-percentage 30
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the WRED drop profile view.
quit
//Configure the accuracy of the hardware-based PFC deadlock detection interval and recovery time.
dcb pfc deadlock-detect timer 100
//Validate the configuration.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 350

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

commit
//Enter the default PFC configuration view.
dcb pfc
//Configure the RDMA link forwarding priority.
priority 2 3
//Configure PFC deadlock detection.
priority 2 turn-off threshold 30
priority 3 turn-off threshold 30
dcb pfc deadlock recovery-behavior forwarding slot 1
dcb pfc deadlock-detect timer 200
dcb pfc deadlock-recovery timer 1500
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the global RDMA configuration view.
quit

Step 6 Configure the RDMA parameters of ports.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other RDMA functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xon dynamic 6 xoff dynamic 9
dcb pfc buffer 3 xon dynamic 6 xoff dynamic 9
qos drr 0 2 3
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos queue 3 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos buffer queue 3 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos queue 2 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 3 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 2 ecn
qos queue 3 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit
● Method 2: Configure each port separately.
NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Configure the port forwarding priority and QoS parameters.
dcb pfc enable mode manual
dcb pfc buffer 2 xon dynamic 6 xoff dynamic 9
dcb pfc buffer 3 xon dynamic 6 xoff dynamic 9
qos drr 0 2 3
qos queue 0 drr weight 10
qos queue 2 drr weight 90
qos queue 3 drr weight 90
qos buffer queue 0 shared-threshold dynamic 1
qos buffer queue 2 shared-threshold dynamic 10
qos buffer queue 3 shared-threshold dynamic 10

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

qos queue 2 wred ecn_100G

qos queue 3 wred ecn_100G
qos queue 2 ecn
qos queue 3 ecn
//Validate the configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 7 Configure global VLAN parameters.

//Create VLANs in a batch.
vlan batch 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104 4011
vlan batch 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300 to 2303 4005 4007
4008 4010
//Validate the configuration.
commit

Step 8 Set port VLAN parameters.

NOTE

● Ports can be configured in batches or one by one.

● Retain the default configurations of other VLAN functions.
● Method 1: Configure ports in batches.
//Enter the batch port configuration view.
port-group group-member 100GE 1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Set the ports to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the batch port configuration view.
quit

● Method 2: Configure each port separately.

NOTE

The following uses port 100GE 1/0/1 as an example. Perform this step on ports 100GE
1/0/1 to 100GE 1/0/32 in sequence.
//Enter the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
interface 100GE 1/0/1
//Change the mode of an Ethernet interface from Layer 3 to Layer 2.
portswitch
//Set the port to work in trunk mode.
port link-type trunk
//Configure the PVID.
port trunk pvid vlan 1
//Configure allowed VLAN IDs.
port trunk allow-pass vlan 200 to 203 300 to 303 400 to 403 500 to 503 1000 to 1004 1100 to 1104
4011
port trunk allow-pass vlan 1200 to 1203 1300 to 1303 2000 to 2003 2100 to 2103 2200 to 2203 2300
to 2303 4005 4007 4008 4010
//Validate the port configuration.
commit
//Exit the configuration view of port 100GE 1/0/1.
quit

Step 9 Save the settings.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 352

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

//Enter the user view.

quit
//Save the settings.
save STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1.cfg
//Modify the boot items for the next startup.
startup saved-configuration STORAGE-SCALE-SW-1.cfg

----End

5.2.2.3 Adding Controllers Using SmartKit

After you have finished the connection between the original controller enclosure 0
and new controller enclosures 1 and 2 according to 3.1.2.4 (Optional)
Connection Planning for Multiple Controller Enclosures, use SmartKit to
expand the controllers.

Prerequisites
● The system network has been connected based on the controller expansion
scenario. For details, see 3.1.2.4 (Optional) Connection Planning for
Multiple Controller Enclosures.
● Controllers on all controller enclosures have the same memory size.
NOTE

You can run the show memory command to query the memory size of a controller.
● All controller enclosures have the same software version.
NOTE

You can run the show version all command to query the software version of
controller enclosures.
● Controller enclosures have been powered on. For a 4 U controller enclosure,
ensure that disk enclosures with coffer disk labels have been properly
connected to the controller enclosure.
● There are no critical or major alarms in the storage system.
● The public/private key pair and password of ibc_os_hs are the default values.
● The IP addresses of the management network ports on controller enclosures
connected to the management network must be different but on the same
network segment. For details, see 5.1.1.1 Changing the Initial IP Address of
the Management Network Port over a Serial Port and 5.1.1.3 (Optional)
Changing IP Addresses of Management Network Ports Using
DeviceManager.

Precautions
● SmartKit is used to expand controllers for the storage system.
● The operation procedure varies according to the SmartKit version. If you use
SmartKit of a different version, the GUI you see may be different from that in
this section.
● The Auto Discovery (AD) process has been enabled on all of the controllers in
the new controller enclosures 1 and 2. For details on how to enable the AD
process, see 6.1 What Can I Do If Controller Expansion Fails Because the
Process Lasts for Over 24 Hours After the Controllers to Be Added Are
Powered On?

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 353

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

The AD process is used for message forwarding between controllers during expansion.
After enabling the AD process on all of the new controllers, you must add the new
controllers using SmartKit within 24 hours. Otherwise, controller expansion will fail
and you need to enable the AD process on the new controllers again.

Procedure
Step 1 Download SmartKit.
NOTE

If the maintenance terminal cannot access the Internet, you need to use another terminal
that can access the Internet to download the SmartKit installation package. Then copy
the package to the maintenance terminal.
● If you are an enterprise user:
a. Use the maintenance terminal to log in to https://support.huawei.com/
enterprise and Choose Tools > SmartKit.
b. Select the latest version.
c. In the Version and Patch Software area, select and download the
software you need.
● If you are a carrier user:
a. Use the maintenance terminal to log in to https://support.huawei.com.
In the search box on the home page, type SmartKit and choose the
associated SmartKit path from the drop-down list.
b. On the search result page, click the Software tab.
c. On the Software tab page, click the latest version.
The page for downloading the software is displayed.
d. In the Software area, download the software you need.
Step 2 Install SmartKit.
1. On the maintenance terminal, run the SmartKit installation package and
follow the instructions provided by the installation wizard to install SmartKit.
After the installation is complete, SmartKit will automatically start.
2. Type your support website account as prompted to activate SmartKit and read
the safety precautions.
NOTE

– You can apply for an account of the support website at https://

support.huawei.com.
– You have 180 days to use an account after it is activated. If there are only 45 days
or fewer days left, you will be reminded of activating the tool again. If the tool is
not activated after 180 days, you only have permissions of a Visitor.

Step 3 Install the Expansion tool package.

● If your maintenance terminal can access the Internet, choose Home >
Storage > Capacity Expansion > Add Controllers. In the dialog box that is
displayed, click OK to download and install the expansion tool.
● If your maintenance terminal cannot access the Internet, click Function
Management on the Home page. Then click Import and select the tool

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 354

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

package exported from another SmartKit environment to install it in offline

mode.
NOTE

For details about offline installation, see "Function Export" and "Function Import" in the
SmartKit User Guide.

Step 4 Add the storage device for which you want to expand controllers to SmartKit.
1. In the main window of SmartKit, click the Device Management tab and
select Add.
The dialog box to add devices is displayed.
2. In Basic Information, select Specify IP Address (add a device by the IP
address) and enter the management IP address of the storage system. Then
click Next.
3. In Config Information, enter the user name and password of the storage
system administrator and click Finish.

NOTE

● When a device is added for the first time or a device certificate is not trusted, a message
is displayed, indicating that the connection is not trusted.
● When an SSH server is added for the first time or after the fingerprint of an SSH server
changes, a prompt asks you whether you want to continue to register the SSH server.

Step 5 In the main window of SmartKit, choose Home > Storage > Capacity Expansion >
Add Controllers.
The Add Controllers page is displayed. Add the controllers by following the
wizard on SmartKit. For the detailed operations, see 7.2.2 Using SmartKit for
Capacity Expansion (Switched Network).
Step 6 Check the health status and running status of the added controllers and the disk
enclosure.
Log in to OceanStor DeviceManager and check whether Health Status of the new
controllers and disk enclosure is Normal and Running Status is Online.
● If yes, the capacity expansion is successful.
● If no, contact Huawei technical support.

----End

5.2.3 Expansion Rollback

If controllers fail to be expanded, restore the storage system to factory settings
and expand the controllers again.

Symptom
SmartKit may fail to expand controllers because:
● The configuration information about controller enclosure (enclosure SN: %s)
fails to be modified.
● The BMC information about controller enclosure (enclosure SN: %s) fails to
be synchronized.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

● Controller expansion fails to be performed.

● The new controller enclosure (enclosure SN: %s) fails to be added to the
cluster.
%s indicates the SN of the enclosure.

NOTICE

● When handling controller expansion failure, remove cables of storage systems

that have not been added to the cluster to isolate controllers.
● If New engine (enclosure SN: %s) failed to be added to the cluster is
displayed in SmartKit, the controller expansion cannot be rolled back. Contact
Huawei technical support.
● For details about how to use the commands mentioned in this chapter, see
Advanced O&M Command Reference of the corresponding product model.
● Do not restart the controllers to minimize the impact on cluster services.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Fault Diagnosis

Figure 5-27 Process of handling controller expansion failure

Expansion failure

1. Remove the cables. Remove the cables between

original storage systems and new
storage systems.

2. Roll back the original Roll back the original storage

storage system. system.

3. Clear the controllers in the

Check whether No
added controller enclosure.
coffer disks of controllers to be
added are valid.

Yes

Yes
Check whether the new
controllers are normal.

No

Clear the controllers to be added.

4. Expand the controllers

again. Expand the controllers again.

Contact technical support

End
engineers.

5.2.3.1 Rolling Back the Storage System

If controllers fail to be expanded, restore the storage system to factory settings.

NOTICE

When handling controller expansion failure, remove cables of storage systems that
have not been added to the cluster to isolate controllers.

Procedure
Step 1 Roll back controller expansion in the original storage system in normal mode.
1. Run the change user_mode current_mode user_mode=developer command
to go to the developer view.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

2. Run the debug command to go to the engineer view.

3. Run the sys showcls command to query the total number of controllers in the
cluster, as shown in the following figure. node cfg indicates the total number
of controllers in the cluster.
admin:/diagnose>sys showcls
mode : normal
status : none
node cfg :2
node max :8
group cfg :1
group max :4
product :0
serial : 2102350SHW10G3000001
WWN : 0x2100e4a8b63bd03e
local node id : 0
normalNodeBitmap : 3
faultNodeBitmap : 0
offlineNodeBitmap: 0
standbyNodeBitmap: 0
id role status
-------------------- -------------------- --------------------
0 master normal
1 slave normal
group engine nodeSessionID
-------------------- -------------------- --------------------
0 0 1
0 0 1

4. Run the exit command to exit the diagnose view.

5. Run the change user_mode current_mode user_mode=engineer command
to go to the engineer view.
6. Run the change controllers_expansion cancel controller_total=m command
to roll back controller expansion.
In the command, m indicates the total number of controllers in the original
cluster.

NOTE

Do not restart the controllers to minimize the impact on cluster services.

Step 2 Perform the operations described in 5.2.3.2 Clearing the Controllers That Failed
to Be Added (Applicable to the OceanStor 2000, 5000, and 5000F V5 Series).

----End

5.2.3.2 Clearing the Controllers That Failed to Be Added (Applicable to the

OceanStor 2000, 5000, and 5000F V5 Series)
If controller expansion fails, you must clear the controllers that failed to be added
before expanding controllers again.

Prerequisites
You have removed the cables of storage systems that have not been added to the
cluster to isolate controllers.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to a controller that failed to be added via its serial port or management
network port and check whether the following information is displayed in the CLI.
Storage: minisystem>
● If yes, the controller is in minisystem mode. Go to Step 2.
● If no, the controller is not in minisystem mode. You must enter the
minisystem mode before proceeding with Step 2. You can manually enter the
minisystem mode as follows:
– Run change user_mode current_mode user_mode=developer to enter
the developer mode and then run minisystem to enter the minisystem
mode.
developer:/>minisystem
Storage: minisystem>
– When the storage system is starting, System is not ready, Please
wait(Ctrl+c to exit or Input minisystem to minisystem mode) is
displayed on the CLI. Run minisystem to enter the minisystem mode.
Authorized users only. All activities may be monitored and reported.
WARNING! The remote SSH server rejected X11 forwarding request.

WARNING: You have accessed the system.

You are required to have a personal authorisation from the system administrator before you use
this computer. Unauthorised access to or misuse of this system is prohibited.

System is not ready, Please wait(Ctrl+c to exit or Input minisystem to minisystem mode).
\minisystem

NOTE

If you cannot log in to a controller (for example, controller A) using the serial port or
management network port, log in to another controller in the controller enclosure (for
example, controller B) and run the sshtoremoteExt SlotId command in minisystem mode
to log in to controller A. SlotId is controller A's slot number and its value ranges from 0 to
N–1, where N indicates the total number of controllers after controller expansion.
2 U controller enclosures are used as an example. The slot IDs of controllers A and B in
controller enclosure 0 are 0 and 1, those in controller enclosure 1 are 2 and 3, and so on.
4 U controller enclosures are used as an example. The slot IDs of controllers A, B, C, and D
in controller enclosure 0 are 0, 1, 2, and 3, those in controller enclosure 1 are 4, 5, 6, and 7,
and so on.

Step 2 Run bdm_diskbomlist.sh showdisk and check whether Valid of coffer disks (Slot
ranges from 0 to 3 and ID is greater than 63) is Normal.
● If yes, go to Step 4.
● If no, go to Step 3.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 359

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 3 Wait for 20 minutes and run bdm_diskbomlist.sh showdisk again to check
whether Valid of the coffer disks is Normal.
● If yes, go to Step 4.
● If no, go to Step 6.
Step 4 Run showsysstatus. The value of local node id is the ID of the current controller.
Check whether the controller's status is normal.
● If yes, perform Step 1 to Step 4 on each controller that failed to be added
separately. If all controllers' status are normal, expand controllers again using
the expansion tool.
NOTE

If you still want to clear information about the new controller, go to Step 7.
● If no, go to Step 5.

Step 5 Run sys.sh clearnode -d -all in minisystem mode. The system will clear
information automatically. This process typically takes about 6 minutes and will
not exceed 30 minutes.
Check whether Success is returned.
● If yes, go to Step 9.
● If no, go to Step 8.
NOTE

● This operation will restore all services and configurations of the controller to the initial
state.
● This operation will initialize user passwords. For the default password of the system
administrator, see Security Configuration Guide of the corresponding product model.

Step 6 Run sys.sh clearnode -df -all in minisystem mode. The system will clear
information automatically. This process typically takes about 6 minutes and will
not exceed 30 minutes.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 360

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Check whether Success is returned.

● If yes, go to Step 9.
● If no, go to Step 8.
NOTE

● This operation will restore all services and configurations of the controller to the initial
state.
● This operation will initialize user passwords. For the default password of the system
administrator, see Security Configuration Guide of the corresponding product model.

Step 7 Run sys.sh clearnode -d in minisystem mode. The system will clear information
automatically. This process typically takes about 6 minutes and will not exceed 30
minutes.

After the system clears information automatically, check whether the "FAILED"
message is not displayed.

● If the message is not displayed, go to Step 9.

● If the message is displayed, go to Step 8.
NOTE

● This operation will restore all services and configurations of the controller to the initial
state.
● This operation will initialize user passwords. For the default password of the system
administrator, see Security Configuration Guide of the corresponding product model.

Step 8 Observe the indicators to determine whether the controller is running properly
and the coffer disks are normal. For the indicator meanings, see the Product
Description of the corresponding product model.
● If the controller and coffer disks are normal, return to Step 1 and perform the
operations again.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 361

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

● If the controller or coffer disks are abnormal, go to Step 11.

Step 9 Repeat the preceding procedure on other controllers to clear their information.
● After all controllers have been cleared, log in to any of them and run sys.sh
resetengine -n to reset all controllers in the current controller enclosure. If
the controller enclosure becomes normal after the controllers have been reset,
go to Step 10.
● If the controller enclosure fails to recover, go to Step 11.
Step 10 Use the expansion tool to expand controllers again.
● If the expansion is successful, no further action is required.
● If expansion fails, go to Step 11.
Step 11 Collect system logs and contact technical support engineers for assistance.
To collect system logs:
● Log in to DeviceManager. If you can access the console, choose Settings >
Export Data. Select All logs under System Log and click Log List. The system
starts collecting logs.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 362

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-28 Exporting system logs

● If Failed to start the system is displayed when you log in to DeviceManager,

click Download Log to download system logs.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 363

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-29 Downloading logs

● If a controller fails to be powered on, log in to the controller and enter the
minisystem mode. Then run os_backup_info.sh to collect logs and access the
log path to obtain the logs.

----End

5.2.3.3 Clearing the Controllers That Failed to Be Added (Applicable to the

OceanStor 6000 and 6000F V5 Series)
If controller expansion fails, you must clear the controllers that failed to be added
before expanding controllers again.

Prerequisites
You have removed the cables of storage systems that have not been added to the
cluster to isolate controllers.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to a controller that failed to be added via its serial port or management
network port and check whether the following information is displayed in the CLI.
Storage: minisystem>

● If yes, the controller is in minisystem mode. Go to Step 2.

● If no, the controller is not in minisystem mode. You must enter the
minisystem mode before proceeding with Step 2. You can manually enter the
minisystem mode as follows:
– Run change user_mode current_mode user_mode=developer to enter
the developer mode and then run minisystem to enter the minisystem
mode.
developer:/>minisystem
Storage: minisystem>

– When the storage system is starting, System is not ready, Please

wait(Ctrl+c to exit or Input minisystem to minisystem mode) is
displayed on the CLI. Run minisystem to enter the minisystem mode.
Authorized users only. All activities may be monitored and reported.
WARNING! The remote SSH server rejected X11 forwarding request.

WARNING: You have accessed the system.

You are required to have a personal authorisation from the system administrator before you use
this computer. Unauthorised access to or misuse of this system is prohibited.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 364

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

System is not ready, Please wait(Ctrl+c to exit or Input minisystem to minisystem mode).
\minisystem

NOTE

If you cannot log in to a controller (for example, controller A) using the serial port or
management network port, log in to another controller in the controller enclosure (for
example, controller B) and run the sshtoremoteExt SlotId command in minisystem mode
to log in to controller A. SlotId is controller A's slot number and its value ranges from 0 to
N–1, where N indicates the total number of controllers after controller expansion.
2 U controller enclosures are used as an example. The slot IDs of controllers A and B in
controller enclosure 0 are 0 and 1, those in controller enclosure 1 are 2 and 3, and so on.
4 U controller enclosures are used as an example. The slot IDs of controllers A, B, C, and D
in controller enclosure 0 are 0, 1, 2, and 3, those in controller enclosure 1 are 4, 5, 6, and 7,
and so on.

Step 2 Query the status of coffer disks.

● If the configuration disk enclosure (DAE000) is a smart SAS or NVMe disk
enclosure, run the sys.sh showallspecdiskinfo command to check whether
the State value of coffer disks (Engine ID is 0 and Slot ranges from 0 to 3) is
0.
– If yes, go to Step 4.
– If no, go to Step 3.

● If the configuration disk enclosure (DAE000) is a SAS disk enclosure, run

bdm_diskbomlist.sh showdisk and check whether Valid of coffer disks (Slot
ranges from 0 to 3 and ID is greater than 63) is Normal.
– If yes, go to Step 4.
– If no, go to Step 3.

Step 3 Wait for 20 minutes. If the configuration disk enclosure is a smart SAS or NVMe
disk enclosure, run the sys.sh showallspecdiskinfo command again to check
whether coffer disks are connected. If the configuration disk enclosure is a SAS
disk enclosure, run the bdm_diskbomlist.sh showdisk command again to check
whether coffer disks are connected.
● If yes, go to Step 4.
● If no, go to Step 6.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 365

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Step 4 Run showsysstatus. The value of local node id is the ID of the current controller.
Check whether the controller's status is normal.
● If yes, perform Step 1 to Step 4 on each controller that failed to be added
separately. If all controllers' status are normal, expand controllers again using
the expansion tool.
NOTE

If you still want to clear information about the new controller, go to Step 7.
● If no, go to Step 5.

Step 5 Run sys.sh clearnode -d -all in minisystem mode. The system will clear
information automatically. This process typically takes about 6 minutes and will
not exceed 30 minutes.

Check whether Success is returned.

● If yes, go to Step 9.
● If no, go to Step 8.
NOTE

● This operation will restore all services and configurations of the controller to the initial
state.
● This operation will initialize user passwords. For the default password of the system
administrator, see Security Configuration Guide of the corresponding product model.

Step 6 Run sys.sh clearnode -df -all in minisystem mode. The system will clear
information automatically. This process typically takes about 6 minutes and will
not exceed 30 minutes.

Check whether Success is returned.

● If yes, go to Step 9.
● If no, go to Step 8.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 366

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

NOTE

● This operation will restore all services and configurations of the controller to the initial
state.
● This operation will initialize user passwords. For the default password of the system
administrator, see Security Configuration Guide of the corresponding product model.

Step 7 Run sys.sh clearnode -d in minisystem mode. The system will clear information
automatically. This process typically takes about 6 minutes and will not exceed 30
minutes.

After the system clears information automatically, check whether the "FAILED"
message is not displayed.

● If the message is not displayed, go to Step 9.

● If the message is displayed, go to Step 8.
NOTE

● This operation can only clear the information on the controller that you have logged in
to. Therefore, you must log in to all of the new controllers one by one and run this
command.
● This operation will restore all services and configurations of the controller to the initial
state.
● This operation will initialize user passwords. For the default password of the system
administrator, see Security Configuration Guide of the corresponding product model.

Step 8 Observe the indicators to determine whether the controller is running properly
and the coffer disks are normal. For the indicator meanings, see the Product
Description of the corresponding product model.
● If the controller and coffer disks are normal, return to Step 1 and perform the
operations again.
● If the controller or coffer disks are abnormal, go to Step 11.

Step 9 After all controllers have been cleared, log in to any of them and run sys.sh
resetengine -n to reset all controllers in the current controller enclosure.
● If the controller enclosure becomes normal after the controllers have been
reset, go to Step 10.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 367

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

● If the controller enclosure fails to recover, go to Step 11.

Step 10 Use the expansion tool to expand controllers again.
● If the expansion is successful, no further action is required.
● If expansion fails, go to Step 11.
Step 11 Collect system logs and contact technical support engineers for assistance.
To collect system logs:
● Log in to DeviceManager. If you can access the console, choose Settings >
Export Data. Select All logs under System Log and click Log List. The system
starts collecting logs.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 368

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-30 Exporting system logs

● If Failed to start the system is displayed when you log in to DeviceManager,

click Download Log to download system logs.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 369

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Figure 5-31 Downloading logs

● If a controller fails to be powered on, log in to the controller and enter the
minisystem mode. Then run os_backup_info.sh to collect logs and access the
log path to obtain the logs.

----End

5.3 (Optional) Installing and Configuring a Key

Management Server
Storage systems support external key management servers for data encryption. If
a storage system configures a key management server and has completed the
initial configuration, install and configure the key management server following
instructions in the Encryption User Guide specific to your product model to provide
secure storage services without affecting storage performance.
Table 5-19 describes the port connections between the key management server
and switch.

Table 5-19 Port connections between the key management server and switch
Port ID Port on the Key Port on the Switch Port ID
Management Server

0 Key_Port_Y Switch_Port_Y 2

Y indicates the port ID.

5.4 (Optional) Installing Other Software on an

Application Server
To use certain functions, you can choose to install the software listed in Table
5-20 on an application server.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 370

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Table 5-20 Other software running on an application server

Software Function Reference Document
Name

UltraPath The software enables For details about how to install

redundant physical UltraPath, see the OceanStor
connections to be UltraPath for Windows User
established between a Guide, OceanStor UltraPath for
storage system and an Linux User Guide, OceanStor
application server to UltraPath for Solaris User Guide,
ensure high reliability of OceanStor UltraPath for AIX User
communication links. The Guide, or OceanStor UltraPath
UltraPath software can for vSphere User Guide.
virtualize two redundant NOTE
links into one to facilitate ● To install UltraPath in Linux, run
management and the install.sh script.
application of storage ● Go to Huawei technical support
resources. website to obtain the user guide
● If redundant paths are specific to your operating system.
used between the AIX ● After the multipathing software
host and Huawei is installed, you can run a
storage device and no command to query product
models supported by the
SAN boot operation is multipathing software. If XSG1 is
required, you can use displayed in the command
Huawei UltraPath. output, the multipathing
● If redundant paths are software supports OceanStor V5
series.
used between the AIX
host and Huawei ● If the UltraPath version is 21.1.0
or later and the SmartKit version
storage device and the is V2R5C00RC10 or later, you can
SAN boot operation is use the SmartKit for quick
required, AIX host UltraPath installation. For details,
multipathing software see 7.7 Using SmartKit to
and AIX ODM for Install UltraPath.
MPIO must be
installed. For details,
see Installing AIX ODM
for MPIO in the AIX
ODM for MPIO User
Guide.
BCManager If value-added features For details about how to install
eReplication (such as asynchronous BCManager eReplication, see the
remote replication and OceanStor BCManager
snapshot) are used, eReplication User Guide.
BCManager eReplication NOTE
must be installed to Go to Huawei technical support
manage these features on website to obtain the user guide
the host and protect data specific to your product model and
version.
consistency.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 371

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Software Function Reference Document

Name

eService eService is used for For details about how to install

equipment monitoring, eService, see the OceanStor
alarm reporting, and eService User Guide.
device inspection. NOTE
Go to Huawei technical support
website to obtain the user guide
specific to your product model and
version.

SystemReporter SystemReporter is used For details about how to install

for performance and SystemReporter, see the
capacity report analysis. OceanStor SystemReporter User
Guide.
NOTE
● Go to Huawei technical support
website to obtain the user guide
specific to your product model
and version.
● The versions of SystemReporter
and the storage system must be
consistent; otherwise,
SystemReporter cannot manage
the storage system.

NOTE

If you use the multipathing software built in your operating system, see the Huawei SAN
Storage Host Connectivity Guide for XXX, where XXX indicates the operating system, such as
Windows.

5.5 Using SmartKit for Deployment Inspection

After installing hardware and configuring services, you can use SmartKit on your
maintenance terminal to inspect the software and hardware status, value-added
services, and alarms of the storage system.

Prerequisites
● SmartKit of a correct version has been installed on the maintenance terminal.
You can check the version information in the version mapping table. To obtain
the version mapping table, log in to https://support.huawei.com/
enterprise/, enter your storage model in the search box, and select the
associated path to the product documentation page. Then find and download
the version mapping table.
● You have obtained the IP address of the management network port and the
login user name and password.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 372

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to SmartKit. On the Storage tab, select Site Deployment Quality
Inspection in Site Deployment Delivery.

Step 2 Click Device Selection.

The Select Devices dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click Add Device, and add a device as instructed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 373

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

1. Specify basic information of the storage device, such as management IP

address.
2. Enter the login username, password, and port.
3. Click Finish. After successful verification, the storage device is added to the
device list.
4. Select the storage device on the device list, click Browse to specify Result
Folder, and click OK(L).
The Site Deployment Quality Inspection page is displayed.
Step 4 Click Deployment Inspection.

The Inspection Wizard Step 3-1: Check Site Deployment Quality Standards
page is displayed.
Step 5 Select the storage device, and click Fill Result.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 374

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

1. Check the electrical environment and network configuration based on the

displayed checklist.
2. Enter the check results in the Result column.
3. Click Save to exit.
4. Click Next.

The Inspection Wizard Step 3-2: Select Check Items page is displayed.

Step 6 Select the storage device, and click desired check items.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 375

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 5 Operations After Installation

1. Select the device to be inspected in the left pane.

2. Select the check items in the right pane.
NOTE

You can click to expand the check items under a category.

3. Click Next.
The Inspection Wizard Step 3-3: Start Inspections page is displayed.
Step 7 Check the task status and inspection result.

NOTE

● After the inspection is complete, the inspection results are automatically saved and an
inspection report is generated. You can:
– Click Open the result directory to view the inspection result data.
– Click View the report to view the inspection report.
● If any check item has failed, rectify the fault according to the handling suggestions.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 376

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

6 FAQs

This chapter provides answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs) about

installation. If you encounter problems during configuration or maintenance, you
can read this chapter to see whether your problems can be solved. If your
problems persist or you cannot find answers, contact Huawei technical support.
6.1 What Can I Do If Controller Expansion Fails Because the Process Lasts for Over
24 Hours After the Controllers to Be Added Are Powered On?
6.2 How Do I Query and Configure the NPIV Function of Switches?
6.3 How Do I Create AD Domain Users and Groups on the AD Domain Controller?
6.4 How Can I Import the Windows AD Domain Server's CA Certificate to the
Storage System?
6.5 How Can I Use Self-Signed Certificates to Fix the Privacy Error Displayed When
I Attempt to Log In to DeviceManager?
6.6 How Do I Check Whether Network Firewall Ports Are Enabled?
6.7 What Should I Do If Login to DeviceManager over Internet Explorer Failed?

6.1 What Can I Do If Controller Expansion Fails Because

the Process Lasts for Over 24 Hours After the
Controllers to Be Added Are Powered On?
Question
What can I do if controller expansion fails because the process lasts for over 24
hours after the controllers to be added are powered on?

Answer
If a controller expansion lasts for over 24 hours after the controllers to be added
are powered on, the AD process in the storage system will be disabled. As a result,
controllers in the cluster cannot communicate with each other, leading to a
controller expansion failure. You can enable the AD process as follows:

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 377

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

NOTE

An AD process is used for message forwarding among controllers during controller

expansion.

Step 1 Log in to the CLI of any controller in the new controller enclosure.

Step 2 Run the change user_mode current_mode user_mode=engineer command to go

to the engineer view.

Step 3 Run the change ad_process action=startup command to enable the AD process.
NOTE

● For versions earlier than V500R007C60SPC300, the command for starting the AD
process must be executed on each controller. If you cannot log in to a controller (for
example, controller A) using the serial port or management network port, log in to
another controller in the controller enclosure (for example, controller B) and run the
sshtoremoteExt SlotId command in the minisystem view to log in to controller A.
SlotId is the slot number of controller A and its value ranges from 0 to N-1, where N
indicates the maximum number of controllers that can be inserted in the current
controller enclosure.
● For V500R007C60SPC300 and later versions, the command for starting the AD process is
executed on any controller, and the AD process is enabled on all controllers in the
controller enclosure.

Step 4 Run the show ad_process status command to check whether the status of the AD
process is Online. If the status is Online, the AD process has been enabled.

For details, see the Advanced O&M Command Reference specific to your product
model and version.

----End

6.2 How Do I Query and Configure the NPIV Function

of Switches?
Question
On a Fibre Channel switch network, NPIV must be enabled on Fibre Channel
switches. How do I query and configure NPIV of switches?

Answer
On Brocade Fibre Channel series switches, NPIV is enabled by default.

● Run the portcfgshow command to query configurations of NPIV. View

configuration information about the NPIV capability field and ensure that
the status of the port connecting to the storage system is ON.
● Run the following commands in sequence to configure NPIV:
a. portcfgnpivport --enable [slot/]port
b. portcfgnpivport --setloginlimit [slot/]port login_limit

Cisco switches

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 378

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

● Run the show npiv status command to query configurations of NPIV.

● Run the following commands in sequence to configure NPIV:
a. config t
b. feature npiv
The NPIV function of QLogic switches, as well as of Huawei SNS2120 and
SNS5120 switches, is enabled by default, and cannot be disabled.

6.3 How Do I Create AD Domain Users and Groups on

the AD Domain Controller?
Question
How do I create AD domain users and groups on the AD domain controller?

Answer
● After the primary AD domain controller is configured, you must create AD
domain users and groups on the AD domain controller. An administrator can
centrally manage domain users and groups and allocate them to different
users.
● A user can log in to a client host in the AD domain as a domain user and is
authenticated by the primary AD domain controller.
● This section uses Windows Server 2008 R2 as an example to explain how to
create AD domain users and groups on the AD domain controller.

Step 1 Log in to the Windows AD domain server. Choose Start > Administrative Tools >
Active Directory Users and Computers.
The Active Directory Users and Computers page is displayed.
Step 2 Create a user.
1. In the Active Directory Users and Computers dialog box, right-click Users.
2. Choose New > User.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 379

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

3. Enter the domain user information.

The user information includes First name, Last name, Initials, and User
logon name. User logon name is used for AD domain login and
authentication.
4. Click Next after the user information is configured.

5. Enter and confirm the user password. Deselect User must change password
at next logon. Click Next.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 380

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

6. Click Finish after you confirm the user information.

Return to the Active Directory Users and Computers dialog box.

Step 3 Create a group.

1. In the Active Directory Users and Computers dialog box, right-click Users.
2. Choose New > Group.

3. Enter Group name.

4. Set Group scope to Global.
5. Set Group type to Security.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 381

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

6. Click OK.
Return to the Active Directory Users and Computers dialog box.
Step 4 Add a user to a group.
1. In the Active Directory Users and Computers dialog box, right-click a user to
add to a group.
2. Select Add to a group.

3. In the Enter the object name to select text box, enter the name of the group
to which the user is added.
4. Click OK.
A message is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeded.
5. Click OK.

----End

6.4 How Can I Import the Windows AD Domain

Server's CA Certificate to the Storage System?
When you set domain authentication for a storage system, you must import the
CA certificate of the AD domain server to the storage system before selecting
LDAPS.

Prerequisites
The web service has been enabled for the Windows AD domain server.

Procedure
Step 1 Access http://localhost/certsrv/ on the Internet Explorer.
Step 2 Click Download a CA certificate, certificate chain, or CRL.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 382

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

Step 3 Select the CA certificate you want to export, set the encoding mode to DER, and
click Download CA certificate.

Step 4 Click Save to save the CA certificate to a specified directory.

Step 5 Convert the CA certificate format.

The exported CA certificate uses the default format of Windows. You must convert
it to the pem format before importing it to the storage system.

NOTE

To convert the format, copy the CA certificate to a Linux server and run the openssl x509 -
in ./XXX.cer -inform DER -out YYY.pem -outform PEM command in the directory where
the CA certificate is saved.
In the preceding command, XXX represents the name of the CA certificate before
conversion, and YYY represents the name after conversion.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 383

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

Step 6 After the CA certificate is converted, import it to the storage system.

1. Log in to DeviceManager.
2. Choose Settings > Certificate Management.
3. Select a scenario, and import and activate the CA certificate.
----End

6.5 How Can I Use Self-Signed Certificates to Fix the

Privacy Error Displayed When I Attempt to Log In to
DeviceManager?
Question
How can I use self-signed certificates to fix the privacy error displayed when I
attempt to log in to DeviceManager?

Answer
You can replace the default security certificates of the DeviceManager server and
user browser with self-signed security certificates and private key files to eliminate
the privacy error displayed when you log in to DeviceManager. The configuration
procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Prepare the OpenSSL environment.
1. Prepare a Linux-based device where the OpenSSL tool is installed. (Generally,
the OpenSSL tool has been pre-installed in a CentOS or Ubuntu system.) Run
the openssl version command to verify that the OpenSSL tool version is 0.9.8j
or later.
CTU1000047802:~ # openssl version
OpenSSL 0.9.8j-fips 07 Jan 2009
2. Run the find / -name openssl.cnf command to identify the location of the
openssl.cnf file.
Generally, the openssl.cnf file is under /etc/ssl.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 384

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

CTU1000047802:/ # cd /etc/ssl
CTU1000047802:/etc/ssl # ls
ca.key ca.pem cacert.pem cert.csr certs demoCA openssl.cnf private private.key

3. Open the openssl.cnf file and check the default CA directory.

CTU1000047802:/etc/ssl # cat openssl.cnf

4. Add the subjectAltName option to [v3_req] in the openssl.cnf file.

The IP address is the management IP address of the storage system, XX.XX.
109.96 in this example. If the storage system has multiple management IP
addresses, configure all of them in the following format: IP:XX.XX.109.96,
IP:XX.XX.109.97.

Step 2 Use the OpenSSL tool to generate CA private key and CA certificate files.
1. Create directories and files related to certificate files.
CTU1000047802:/ # mkdir new9
CTU1000047802:/ # cd new9
CTU1000047802:/new9 # mkdir demoCA
CTU1000047802:/new9 # mkdir demoCA/csr demoCA/private demoCA/jks demoCA/newcerts
CTU1000047802:/new9 # touch demoCA/index.txt
CTU1000047802:/new9 # echo 03 > ./demoCA/serial

2. Generate a CA private key file.

CTU1000047802:/new9 # openssl genrsa -out ./demoCA/private/ca.key 2048
Generating RSA private key, 1024 bit long modulus
........++++++
...............++++++
e is 65537 (0x10001)

3. Generate a CA certificate file.

CTU1000047802:/new9 # openssl req -new -x509 -sha256 -extensions v3_ca -key ./demoCA/private/
ca.key -out ./demoCA/newcerts/RootCA.crt -subj '/C=CN/ST=SiChuan/O=Huawei/L=ChengDu/CN=*.*.*.*/
OU=IT Product Line' -days 5475

CN is the common name for the CA certificate. To avoid certificate alarms, set
this parameter to *.*.*.*.

Step 3 Generate certificate files for the DeviceManager server.

1. Generate a key file.
CTU1000047802:/new9 # openssl genrsa -out ./demoCA/private/deviceManager_key.pem 2048
Generating RSA private key, 2048 bit long modulus
.......+++
..............................................+++
e is 65537 (0x10001)

2. Generate a certificate request file.

CTU1000047802:/new9 # openssl req -new -sha256 -extensions v3_req -key ./demoCA/private/
deviceManager_key.pem -out ./demoCA/csr/deviceManager.csr -subj '/C=CN/ST=SiChuan/O=Huawei/
L=ChengDu/CN=XX.XX.109.96/OU=IT Product Line' -days 3650

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 385

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

CN is the common name for the DeviceManager server certificate. To avoid

certificate alarms, set this parameter to the management IP address of the
storage system, XX.XX.109.96 in this example.
3. Use the CA certificate to sign the key.
CTU1000047802:/new9 # openssl ca -batch -in ./demoCA/csr/deviceManager.csr -cert ./demoCA/
newcerts/RootCA.crt -keyfile ./demoCA/private/ca.key -out ./demoCA/newcerts/
deviceManager_cert.pem -days 3650 -md sha256 -extensions v3_req
Using configuration from /etc/ssl/openssl.cnf
Check that the request matches the signature
Signature ok
Certificate Details:
Serial Number: 3 (0x3)
Validity
Not Before: Jul 30 02:42:35 2018 GMT
Not After : Jul 27 02:42:35 2028 GMT
Subject:
countryName = CN
stateOrProvinceName = SiChuan
organizationName = Huawei
organizationalUnitName = IT Product Line
commonName = XX.XX.109.96
X509v3 extensions:
X509v3 Basic Constraints:
CA:FALSE
X509v3 Key Usage:
Digital Signature, Non Repudiation, Key Encipherment
X509v3 Subject Alternative Name:
IP Address:XX.XX.109.96
Certificate is to be certified until Jul 27 02:42:35 2028 GMT (3650 days)
Write out database with 1 new entries
Data Base Updated

Step 4 Replace certificates.

1. Use an FTP tool (such as FileZilla) to connect to the Linux environment where
the OpenSSL tool is located and export the generated certificates and key file
to the local PC.
– RootCA.crt
– deviceManager_cert.pem
– deviceManager_key.pem
NOTE

– The RootCA.crt and deviceManager_cert.pem files are stored in the newcerts

folder.
CTU1000047802:/new9/demoCA/newcerts # ls
03.pem RootCA.crt deviceManager_cert.pem
– The deviceManager_key.pem file is stored in the private folder.
CTU1000047802:/new9/demoCA/private # ls
ca.key deviceManager_key.pem

In this example, the three files are exported to F:\replace.

2. Use an FTP server tool to share the three exported files.

Specify the user, password, and port number of the FTP server. Set the share
path to the directory where the three exported files are saved, F:\replace in
this example. Set the IP address to the IP address of the local computer,
XX.XX.117.211 in this example.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 386

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

3. Import the generated self-signed certificates to the storage system.

Log in to the storage system using the CLI. Run the import ssl_certificate
command to import the shared certificate and key files,
deviceManager_cert.pem and deviceManager_key.pem in this example.
NOTE

– You must log in to the storage system using the CLI and import the certificate and
key files shared in 4.b.
– The import ssl_certificate command must be executed on each controller to
import the shared certificate and key files.
admin:/>import ssl_certificate ip=XX.XX.117.211 user=admin password=*********
cert_file=deviceManager_cert.pem key_file=deviceManager_key.pem port=32 protocol=SFTP
DANGER: You are about to use an unencrypted SSL certificate to replace the current SSL certificate.
Security risks may exist in the unencrypted certificate. This operation will cause DeviceManager
automatically to restart, interrupting services. The certificate you are about to import has the
following security risks: a certificate loading error (the certificate fails to be loaded, the certificate key
fails to be obtained, certificate public information fails to be obtained, the certificate signature
algorithm fails to be obtained).
Suggestion:
1. Use an encrypted certificate to replace the current certificate.
2. Before running the command, confirm that you want to replace the SSL certificate.
Have you read danger alert message carefully?(y/n)y
Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y
Command executed successfully.
4. Restart DeviceManager.
admin:/>change user_mode current_mode user_mode=developer
DANGER: You are about to switch to the developer view. Commands in this view must be run under
the guidance of R&D engineers. You can choose whether to run this command. If you run this
command to switch to the developer view, it means that you know risks of running commands in the
developer view. Device vendors are not responsible for any loss or damage caused to the user or
others by running commands in the developer view.
1. Running the command in the developer view may cause system reset, restart, offline, service
interruption, data loss, and data inconsistency.
2. Running the command in the developer view may cause the performance to decrease.
3. Running the command in the developer view to delete or remove configurations may have impact
on the service and data.
4. Running the command in the developer view may cause system alarms.
Suggestion: Run this command under the guidance of R&D engineers.
Have you read danger alert message carefully?(y/n)y
Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y
developer:/>reboot ism
DANGER: You are about to restart the DeviceManager for the storage system. This operation causes
the DeviceManager unavailable temporarily.
Suggestion: Before performing this operation, ensure that all users have exit the DeviceManager.
Have you read danger alert message carefully?(y/n)y
Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y
Command executed successfully.
5. Import the certificate file to the browser.
The following uses Google Chrome (67.0) as an example.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 387

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

NOTE

For details about how to replace the security certificates of other browsers, see section
"Importing a Security Certificate" in the DeviceManager Online Help.
a. Open Google Chrome and choose Settings > Advanced > Manage
Certificate > Trusted Root Certification Authorities > Import. The
Certificate Import Wizard dialog box is displayed.
b. Select and import the certificate file (RootCA.crt in this example) as
prompted.
c. Restart the browser after the certificate is successfully imported.
d. Log in to the storage system again. No privacy error is generated.

----End

6.6 How Do I Check Whether Network Firewall Ports

Are Enabled?
Question
How do I check whether network firewall ports are enabled?

Answer
The check method varies depending on whether a proxy server is configured or
not:
● Proxy Server Not Configured
● Proxy Server Configured

Proxy Server Not Configured

Step 1 Test the connection between the DNS server and storage system.
1. Log in to DeviceManager.

2. Choose Settings > Basic Information > DNS Service.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 388

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

3. Test the connection between the DNS server and storage system. If the
connection is normal, go to Step 2.
– You can click Test of each DNS IP address to test its availability.
– You can click Test All to test the connection between the DNS server and
storage system.

Step 2 Obtain the URL of the technical support center to which alarm and event data of
the storage system will be uploaded.
● Carrier in China region: icloudservice-cn.huawei.com
● Carrier in Romania region: itr-eservicero-carrier.huawei.com
● Enterprise in China region: ecloudService-cn.huawei.com
● Enterprise in Romania region: itr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com

Step 3 Obtain the IP address of the technical support center.

1. Log in to the storage system using the CLI.
2. Run the change user_mode current_mode user_mode=developer command
to go to the developer view.
3. Run the minisystem command to go to the minisystem mode.
4. Run the ping URL of the technical support center command. For example, run
the ping itr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com command for Enterprise in Romania
region.
– If the ping operation succeeds, the value of XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX in the
parentheses in the command output is the IP address of the technical
support center.
– If the ping operation fails, check the network firewall and DNS
configuration.
Storage: minisystem> ping tr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com
PING tr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX) 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.720 ms
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.181 ms

Step 4 Check whether the storage system can be properly connected to ports 7448, 8448,
and 9448 of the technical support center.

In minisystem mode, run the telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 7448, telnet

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 8448, and telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 9448 commands.

NOTE

● XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the IP address of the technical support center obtained in Step 3.4.
● If the command output displays Connected to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, the connection is
normal.
● If the connection is abnormal, check the connectivity between the storage system and
the external network, for example, firewall configuration.
Storage: minisystem> telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 7448
Trying XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX...
Connected to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX).
Escape character is '^]'.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 389

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

Proxy Server Configured

Step 1 Check the connection between the storage system and the proxy server
1. Log in to the storage system using the CLI.
2. Run the change user_mode current_mode user_mode=developer command
to go to the developer view.
3. Run the minisystem command to go to the minisystem mode.
4. Run the ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX command. XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the proxy
server's IP address.
– If the ping operation succeeds, go to Step 1.5.
– If the ping operation fails, check the network connection.
Storage: minisystem> ping tr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com
PING tr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX) 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.720 ms
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.181 ms

5. In minisystem mode, run the telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX YY command to check

whether the port used by the proxy server to communicate with the storage
system is correct. XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX indicates the IP address of the proxy
server, and YY indicates the port ID of the proxy server.
– If the port ID of the proxy server is correct, go to Step 2.
– If the port ID of the proxy server is incorrect, correct it by referring to the
related product documentation of the proxy server.

Step 2 Obtain the URL of the technical support center to which alarm and event data of
the storage system will be uploaded.
● Carrier in China region: icloudservice-cn.huawei.com
● Carrier in Romania region: itr-eservicero-carrier.huawei.com
● Enterprise in China region: ecloudService-cn.huawei.com
● Enterprise in Romania region: itr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com

Step 3 Obtain the IP address of the technical support center.

1. Log in to the management interface of the proxy server. The following uses
the proxy server running Linux as an example.
2. Run the ping URL of the technical support center command. For example, run
the ping itr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com command for Enterprise in Romania
region.
– If the ping operation succeeds, the value of XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX in the
parentheses in the command output is the IP address of the technical
support center.
– If the ping operation fails, check the network firewall and DNS
configuration.
[root@localhost ~]# ping tr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com
PING tr-eservicero-ent.huawei.com (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX) 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.720 ms
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.181 ms

Step 4 Check whether the proxy server can be properly connected to ports 7448, 8448,
and 9448 of the technical support center.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 390

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

Log in to the management interface of the proxy server, and run the telnet
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 7448, telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 8448, and telnet
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 9448 commands.

NOTE

● XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the IP address of the technical support center obtained in Step 3.2.
● If the command output displays Connected to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, the connection is
normal.
● If the connection is abnormal, check the configuration of the firewall between the proxy
server and the external network.
● If the connection is normal but alarms and logs cannot be sent to the eService after the
eService is configured, enable the HTTP proxy service for ports 7448, 8448, and 9448 of
the proxy server by referring to the related product documentation of the proxy server.
[root@localhost ~]# telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 7448
Trying XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX...
Connected to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX).
Escape character is '^]'.

----End

6.7 What Should I Do If Login to DeviceManager over

Internet Explorer Failed?
Question
What should I do if the "This page can't be displayed" error is displayed when I log
in to DeviceManager over Internet Explorer?

Answer
Update your Internet Explorer, use any other browser supported by
DeviceManager, or use CLI commands to change the cipher suite to the
compatible mode.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 391

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 6 FAQs

Updating the Internet Explorer

Update the version of Internet Explorer to 11.0.10240.16384 or later.

Using Any Other Browser Supported by the DeviceManager

In addition to Internet Explorer, DeviceManager also supports browsers such as
Mozilla Firefox and Google Chrome. You can access Huawei Storage
Interoperability Navigator to query the supported browsers and versions.

Changing the Cipher Suite to the Compatible Mode

DeviceManager supports two cipher suite modes, safe and compatible. The cipher
suite mode is safe by default. You can log in to DeviceManager over Internet
Explorer of a compatible version after changing the cipher suite mode to
compatible. To query the Internet Explorer versions compatible with
DeviceManager, access Huawei Storage Interoperability Navigator.

Step 1 Log in to the CLI. For details, see 5.1.1.4 Logging In to the CLI.
Step 2 Run the change devicemanager ciphersuite suite=compatible command to
change the cipher suite mode to compatible.
admin:/>change devicemanager ciphersuite suite=compatible
WARNING: You are about to change the cipher suite type of DeviceManager.
1. If you change the cipher suite type to "safe", data transmission security will increase, but DeviceManager
may be inaccessible for clients with a lower encryption level.
2. If you change the cipher suite type to "compatible", data transmission security will decrease and user
data may have security risks.
Suggestion: After performing this operation, manually restart DeviceManager to make the operation take
effect.Have you read warning message carefully?(y/n)y

Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y

Command executed successfully.

Step 3 Run the reboot storage service service_name=DeviceManager command to

restart DeviceManager.
admin:/>reboot storage service service_name=DeviceManager
DANGER: You are about to restart the DeviceManager for the storage system. This operation causes the
DeviceManager unavailable temporarily.
Suggestion: Before performing this operation, ensure that all users have exit the DeviceManager.
Have you read danger alert message carefully?(y/n)y

Are you sure you really want to perform the operation?(y/n)y

Command executed successfully.

Step 4 Wait until restarting of DeviceManager is complete, log in to DeviceManager

through Internet Explorer.
Restarting of DeviceManager takes about 10s.

----End

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 392

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

7 Appendix

7.1 Installation Tools

7.2 Using SmartKit for Capacity Expansion
7.3 Loop ID and Disk Enclosure ID Naming Rules
7.4 Introduction to an FR42612L Cabinet
7.5 Installation Environment Checklist
7.6 Checking a Third-Party Cabinet
7.7 Using SmartKit to Install UltraPath
7.8 General Cable Routing Principles
7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics
7.10 Preparing Cables and Connectors
7.11 Engineering Label Specifications for Cables
7.12 Replacing an Optical Fiber, Optical Module, Electrical Module, or Network
Cable Using a Fiber Extractor

7.1 Installation Tools

Table 7-1 lists the required installation tools.

Table 7-1 Tools

Name Appearance Function

Marker Marks a location and

scale.

Phillips screwdriver Fastens small screws

(M3 to M6) or bolts and has a
cross-shaped head.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 393

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Name Appearance Function

Flat-head Fastens small screws

screwdriver (M3 to or bolts and has a
M6) line-shaped head.

Diagonal pliers Cuts insulation tubes

and cable ties.

Crimping tool Crimps the metal

jacket at the end of
a coaxial cable
assembly.

Segmented blade Cuts the adhesive

utility knife tapes on a carton.

Floating nut Installs or removes

mounting bar floating nuts.

ESD clothing Prevents ESD.

ESD gloves Prevents ESD.

ESD wrist strap Prevents ESD.

7.2 Using SmartKit for Capacity Expansion

This section describes how to use SmartKit to add controllers when a storage
system has multiple controller enclosures.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 394

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

7.2.1 Using SmartKit for Capacity Expansion (Direct-

Connection Network)
Procedure
Step 1 In the main window of SmartKit, choose Home > Storage > Capacity Expansion >
Add Controllers.
The Add Controllers page is displayed.
Step 2 Select devices.
1. Click Device Selection. The Select Devices dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the storage system for which you want to expand controllers and the
results save folder and click OK.
Step 3 Ensure compliance with the safety operation guide.
1. Click Safety Operation Guide. The Safety Operation Guide dialog box is
displayed.
2. Make sure that the prerequisites displayed on the user interface have been
prepared. Select the prerequisites and click Confirm.
Step 4 Evaluate the capacity expansion solution.
1. Click Expansion Evaluation.
The Expansion Configuration page is displayed.
2. (Optional) For devices that are configured with HyperMetro, select the device
you want to perform capacity expansion evaluation from the device list and
click Next.
3. Select a capacity expansion scenario.
Select Add controllers in Capacity expansion scenario. Select the number of
controllers after the capacity expansion, and enter the BOM codes of the new
enclosure by referring to the BOQ for capacity expansion. Use commas (,) to
separate multiple BOM codes.
4. Click Add Hardware Information and Expansion Mode.
NOTE

You can add multiple configuration policies.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 395

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

5. Specify the configuration parameters according to the capacity expansion

plan. Table 7-2 lists the parameters.

Table 7-2 Capacity evaluation parameters

Parameter Description

Storage Capacity Method to add storage space.

Expansion Mode

BOM of Disk BOM code of the new disk.

NOTE
– If the BOM code of the new disk is the same as an
existing one in the storage system, select the BOM
code from the drop-down list.
– If the BOM code of the new disk is not included in
the drop-down list box, select Customize.
– To add multiple disk types, click Add Hardware
Information and Expansion Mode to add new
configuration policies.

Disk Type Type of the new disks.

NOTE
– When Customize is selected for BOM of Disk, you
need to manually select a disk type.
– Self-encrypting drives (SEDs) are supported.

Physical Capacity of a Capacity of the new disks.

Single Disk NOTE
When Customize is selected for BOM of Disk, you
need to manually enter the disk capacity.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 396

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Parameter Description

Capacity Unit Capacity unit of the new disks.

NOTE
When Customize is selected for BOM of Disk, you
need to manually select a capacity unit.

Disk Quantity Number of new disks.

Operation You can click Delete to delete the current

configuration policy.

6. Click Next.
The Information page is displayed.
7. Read and confirm the displayed message, and click OK.
The Start Evaluation page is displayed and the system starts evaluating the
capacity expansion solution.
NOTE

– After the evaluation is complete, click Open the report to go to the save path of
the evaluation report. The report is a .zip file named by the evaluation time.
– You can also click View the report to open the report directly.
8. Click Finish.

NOTICE

Rectify the failed items (if any) according to the suggestions and evaluate the
solution again. If the items fail again, contact Huawei technical support engineers
for assistance. Otherwise, risks may arise during capacity expansion.

Step 5 Open the Add Controller Wizard dialog box.

1. Click Expansion.
2. Click Add Controller.
The Select Expansion Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select Networking Mode and Configuration after expansion.
Set Networking Mode to direct connection network and Configuration to
the number of controllers after expansion.
4. Click OK
The Add Controller Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Add controllers as prompted by the wizard.
1. Confirm the precautions of SmartKit.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 397

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Select I have read the previous precautions, completed the related

operations, and understood consequences of the operation and click Next.
The Check Before Capacity Expansion page is displayed.
2. The system automatically checks the expansion condition.

If any check item fails, rectify the faults and perform the check again.
After all check items are passed, click Next.
The Confirm the Networking Environment page is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 398

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

3. Click the network diagram to obtain the network diagram.

NOTICE

It is recommended that you connect the cables according to the 3.1.2.4

(Optional) Connection Planning for Multiple Controller Enclosures in this
document. Other networking may cause controller expansion failure.

Ensure that cables are properly connected according to the network diagram.
Select I have powered on the controller that is added and click Next.
The Scan for Node Information page is displayed.
4. The system automatically detects node information. If the system fails to
detect the information of the new controllers, rectify the faults as prompted
and click Rescan.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 399

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

After the system obtains the node information, confirm and select the
controller enclosure to be expanded based on Controller enclosure SN.
After confirming all controller enclosures, select I have read the previous
information and understood consequences of the operation and click
Next.
The Check the Added Controller page is displayed.
NOTE

You can query the SN of a controller enclosure on the label on its exterior, for
example, 2102XXXXXXXXE700000X.
5. The system automatically performs a pre-expansion check.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 400

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

If the check fails, identify and rectify the failed items. Then click Recheck to
perform the check again.
After all check items are passed, click Next.
The Capacity Expansion page is displayed.
6. The system automatically starts adding controllers.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 401

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTE

– A Danger dialog box will be displayed indicating that this operation will restore
the new controllers to the default settings.
– Confirm the information in the dialog box and select I have read and understood
the consequence associated with performing this operation and click OK. The
system continues to add controllers.
After the controllers are successfully added, click Next.
The Post-expansion Check page is displayed.
7. The system automatically performs a post-expansion check.

If the check fails, identify and rectify the failed items. Then click Recheck to
perform the check again.
After all check items are passed, click Next.
The Completed page is displayed.
8. Click Finish to complete the expansion.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 402

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Step 7 Inspect the system after expansion.

1. Click Post-Expansion Inspection. The inspection tool page is displayed.
2. Click Select Check Items.
In the check item list, select the items you want to check.
3. Click Next to start the inspection.
– Open the result directory is linked to the directory that stores the
inspection report.
– View the report is linked to the inspection results that are saved
as .html files. These files are also compressed and stored in the result
directory.
– Click Finish. The inspection is complete.

----End

7.2.2 Using SmartKit for Capacity Expansion (Switched

Network)
Procedure
Step 1 In the main window of SmartKit, choose Home > Storage > Capacity Expansion >
Add Controllers.
The Add Controllers page is displayed.
Step 2 Select devices.
1. Click Device Selection. The Select Devices dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the storage system for which you want to expand controllers and the
results save folder and click OK.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 403

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Step 3 Ensure compliance with the safety operation guide.

1. Click Safety Operation Guide. The Safety Operation Guide dialog box is
displayed.
2. Make sure that the prerequisites displayed on the user interface have been
prepared. Select the prerequisites and click Confirm.
Step 4 Evaluate the capacity expansion solution.
1. Click Expansion Evaluation.
The Expansion Configuration page is displayed.
2. (Optional) For devices that are configured with HyperMetro, select the device
you want to perform capacity expansion evaluation from the device list and
click Next.
3. Select a capacity expansion scenario.
Select Add controllers in Capacity expansion scenario. Select the number of
controllers after the capacity expansion, and enter the BOM codes of the new
enclosure or controller by referring to the BOQ for capacity expansion. Use
commas (,) to separate multiple BOM codes.
4. Click Add Hardware Information and Expansion Mode.
NOTE

You can add multiple configuration policies.

5. Specify the configuration parameters according to the capacity expansion

plan. Table 7-3 lists the parameters.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 404

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Table 7-3 Capacity evaluation parameters

Parameter Description

Storage Capacity Method to add storage space.

Expansion Mode

BOM of Disk BOM code of the new disk.

NOTE
– If the BOM code of the new disk is the same as an
existing one in the storage system, select the BOM
code from the drop-down list.
– If the BOM code of the new disk is not included in
the drop-down list box, select Customize.
– To add multiple disk types, click Add Hardware
Information and Expansion Mode to add new
configuration policies.

Disk Type Type of the new disks.

NOTE
– When Customize is selected for BOM of Disk, you
need to manually select a disk type.
– Self-encrypting drives (SEDs) are supported.

Physical Capacity of a Capacity of the new disks.

Single Disk NOTE
When Customize is selected for BOM of Disk, you
need to manually enter the disk capacity.

Capacity Unit Capacity unit of the new disks.

NOTE
When Customize is selected for BOM of Disk, you
need to manually select a capacity unit.

Disk Quantity Number of new disks.

Operation You can click Delete to delete the current

configuration policy.

6. Click Next.
The Information page is displayed.
7. Read and confirm the displayed message, and click OK.
The Start Evaluation page is displayed and the system starts evaluating the
capacity expansion solution.
NOTE

– After the evaluation is complete, click Open the report to go to the save path of
the evaluation report. The report is a .zip file named by the evaluation time.
– You can also click View the report to open the report directly.
8. Click Finish.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 405

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTICE

Rectify the failed items (if any) according to the suggestions and evaluate the
solution again. If the items fail again, contact Huawei technical support engineers
for assistance. Otherwise, risks may arise during capacity expansion.

Step 5 Open the Add Controller Wizard dialog box.

1. Click Expansion.
2. Click Add Controller.
The Select Expansion Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select Networking Mode and Configuration after expansion.
Set Networking Mode to Switch-based network and Configuration to the
number of controllers after expansion.
4. Click OK
The Add Controller Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Add controllers as prompted by the wizard.
1. Confirm the precautions of SmartKit.

Select I have read the previous precautions, completed the related

operations, and understood consequences of the operation and click Next.
The Check Before Capacity Expansion page is displayed.
2. The system automatically checks the expansion condition.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 406

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

If any check item fails, rectify the faults and perform the check again.
After all check items are passed, click Next.
The Confirm the Networking Environment page is displayed.
3. Click the network diagram to obtain the network diagram.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 407

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTICE

It is recommended that you connect the cables according to 3.1.2.4

(Optional) Connection Planning for Multiple Controller Enclosures in this
document. Other networking may cause controller expansion failure.

Ensure that cables are properly connected according to the network diagram.
Select I have powered on the controller that is added and click Next.
The Configure Data Switch page is displayed.
4. Enter the configuration information about the data switch, as described in
Table 7-4.

Table 7-4 Data switch parameters

Parameter Description

Data switch 0 Management IP IP address of the management

Address network port on data switch 0.

Data switch 0 Username User name used to log in to data

switch 0 through SSH. For details
about the user name, see
Configuring New IP Addresses for
the Management Network Ports
on the Switches and SSH Login
User Information.

Data switch 0 Password Password used to log in to data

switch 0 through SSH.

Data switch 0 SSH Port Port used to log in to data switch 0

through SSH. The default port is port
22.

Data switch 1 Management IP IP address of the management

Address network port on data switch 1.

Data switch 1 Username User name used to log in to data

switch 1 through SSH. For details
about the user name, see
Configuring New IP Addresses for
the Management Network Ports
on the Switches and SSH Login
User Information.

Data switch 1 Password Password used to log in to data

switch 1 through SSH.

Data switch 1 SSH Port Port used to log in to data switch 1

through SSH. The default port is port
22.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 408

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

After configuration, click OK.

The Scan for Node Information page is displayed.
5. The system automatically detects node information. If the system fails to
detect the information of the new controllers, rectify the faults as prompted
and click Rescan.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 409

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

After the system obtains the node information, confirm and select the
controller enclosure to be expanded based on Controller enclosure SN.
After confirming all controller enclosures, select I have read the previous
information and understood consequences of the operation and click
Next.
The Check the Added Controller page is displayed.
NOTE

You can query the SN of a controller enclosure on the label on its exterior, for
example, 2102XXXXXXXXE700000X.
6. The system automatically performs a pre-expansion check.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 410

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

If the check fails, identify and rectify the failed items. Then click Recheck to
perform the check again.
After all check items are passed, click Next.
The Capacity Expansion page is displayed.
7. The system automatically starts adding controllers.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 411

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTE

A Danger dialog box will be displayed indicating that this operation will restore the
new controllers to the default settings.
Confirm the information in the dialog box and select I have read and understood the
consequence associated with performing this operation and click OK. The system
continues to add controllers.
After the controllers are successfully added, click Next.
The Post-expansion Check page is displayed.
8. The system automatically performs a post-expansion check.

If the check fails, identify and rectify the failed items. Then click Recheck to
perform the check again.
After all check items are passed, click Next.
The Completed page is displayed.
9. Click Finish to complete the expansion.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 412

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Step 7 Inspect the system after expansion.

1. Click Post-Expansion Inspection. The inspection tool page is displayed.
2. Click Select Check Items.
In the check item list, select the items you want to check.
3. Click Next to start the inspection.
– Open the result directory is linked to the directory that stores the
inspection report.
– View the report is linked to the inspection results that are saved
as .html files. These files are also compressed and stored in the result
directory.
– Click Finish. The inspection is complete.

----End

7.3 Loop ID and Disk Enclosure ID Naming Rules

Before connecting disk enclosures, determine the loop IDs and disk enclosure IDs.

7.3.1 OceanStor 2200 V5

Loop ID
Each onboard port or port on an expansion module corresponds to a fixed loop ID,
as shown in orange and blue marks in Figure 7-1.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 413

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTE

● SAS disk enclosures can be cascaded to onboard interface modules or 12 Gbit/s SAS
expansion modules in slots IOM 1.
● High-density disk enclosures are deployed in dual-uplink networking and require two
expansion ports for cascading. The loop ID is the smaller one between two loop IDs to
which the two cascading ports correspond.
For example, the loop ID is 3 if ports P0 and P1 (marked by 3 and 4 in Figure 7-1) in
slots IOM 1 are used to cascade a high-density disk enclosure.

Figure 7-1 12 Gbit/s SAS expansion modules in slots IOM 1

3 4 5 6

1 2

3 4 5 6

1 2

Disk Enclosure ID
DAEXXX indicates a disk enclosure ID. The first X indicates the controller enclosure
ID, the second X indicates the hexadecimal loop ID, and the third X indicates the
number of disk enclosures connected in a loop.

NOTE

● For loops 1 to 6, the second X is 1, 2, ..., 5, and 6, and the third X ranges from 0 to 7 (0
for the first disk enclosure, 1 for the second disk enclosure, and so on).
● For example, the ID of the first disk enclosure in loop 2 of controller enclosure 0 is
DAE020.

Table 7-5 describes the rules for naming disk enclosure IDs in each loop.

Table 7-5 Disk enclosure IDs in each loop

Expansion Port ID Loop ID Disk Enclosure ID
Module
Location

Onboard P0 1 DAE010 to DAE017

expansion
module P1 2 DAE020 to DAE027

IOM 1 P0 3 DAE030 to DAE037

P1 4 DAE040 to DAE047

P2 5 DAE050 to DAE057

P3 6 DAE060 to DAE067

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 414

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

7.3.2 OceanStor 2600 V5

Loop ID
Each onboard port or port on an expansion module corresponds to a fixed loop ID,
as shown in orange and blue marks in Figure 7-2.

NOTE

● SAS disk enclosures can be cascaded to onboard interface modules or 12 Gbit/s SAS
expansion modules in slots IOM 1.
● High-density disk enclosures are deployed in dual-uplink networking and require two
expansion ports for cascading. The loop ID is the smaller one between two loop IDs to
which the two cascading ports correspond.
For example, the loop ID is 3 if ports P0 and P1 (marked by 3 and 4 in Figure 7-2) in
slots IOM 1 are used to cascade a high-density disk enclosure.

Figure 7-2 12 Gbit/s SAS expansion modules in slots IOM 1

3 4 5 6

1 2

3 4 5 6
1 2

Disk Enclosure ID
DAEXXX indicates a disk enclosure ID. The first X indicates the controller enclosure
ID, the second X indicates the hexadecimal loop ID, and the third X indicates the
number of disk enclosures connected in a loop.

NOTE

● For loops 1 to 6, the second X is 1, 2, ..., 5, and 6, and the third X ranges from 0 to 7 (0
for the first disk enclosure, 1 for the second disk enclosure, and so on).
● For example, the ID of the first disk enclosure in loop 2 of controller enclosure 0 is
DAE020.

Table 7-6 describes the rules for naming disk enclosure IDs in each loop.

Table 7-6 Disk enclosure IDs in each loop

Expansion Port ID Loop ID Disk Enclosure ID

Module
Location

Onboard P0 1 DAE010 to DAE017

expansion
module P1 2 DAE020 to DAE027

IOM 1 P0 3 DAE030 to DAE037

P1 4 DAE040 to DAE047

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 415

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Expansion Port ID Loop ID Disk Enclosure ID

Module
Location

P2 5 DAE050 to DAE057

P3 6 DAE060 to DAE067

7.3.3 OceanStor 5300 V5 and 5300F V5

Loop ID
Each onboard port or port on an expansion module corresponds to a fixed loop ID,
as shown in orange and blue marks in Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4.

NOTE

● SAS disk enclosures can be cascaded to onboard interface modules or 12 Gbit/s SAS
expansion modules in slots IOM 2.
● Smart disk enclosures can be cascaded to 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion modules in slots
IOM 2, 1, or 0.
● High-density disk enclosures are deployed in dual-uplink networking and require two
expansion ports for cascading. The loop ID is the smaller one between two loop IDs to
which the two cascading ports correspond.
For example, the loop ID is 3 if ports P0 and P1 (marked by 3 and 4 in Figure 7-3) in
slots IOM 2 are used to cascade a high-density disk enclosure.

Figure 7-3 12 Gbit/s SAS expansion modules in slots IOM 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

Figure 7-4 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion modules in slots IOM 2, 1, or 0

9 10 7 8

3 4

9 10 7 8

3 4

9 10 7 8

3 4

9 10 7 8

3 4

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 416

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Disk Enclosure ID
DAEXXX indicates a disk enclosure ID. The first X indicates the controller enclosure
ID, the second X indicates the hexadecimal loop ID, and the third X indicates the
number of disk enclosures connected in a loop.

NOTE

● For loops 1 to 10, the second X is 1, 2, ..., 8, 9, and A, and the third X ranges from 0 to 7
(0 for the first disk enclosure, 1 for the second disk enclosure, and so on).
● For example, the ID of the first disk enclosure in loop 10 of controller enclosure 0 is
DAE0A0.

Table 7-7 describes the rules for naming disk enclosure IDs in each loop.

Table 7-7 Disk enclosure IDs in each loop

Expansion Port ID Loop ID Disk Enclosure ID
Module Location

Onboard P0 1 DAE010 to DAE017

expansion module
P1 2 DAE020 to DAE027

IOM 2 P0 3 DAE030 to DAE037

P1 4 DAE040 to DAE047

P2 5 DAE050 to DAE057

P3 6 DAE060 to DAE067

IOM 1 P0 7 DAE070 to DAE077

P1 8 DAE080 to DAE087

IOM 0 P0 9 DAE090 to DAE097

P1 10 DAE0A0 to DAE0A7

7.3.4 OceanStor 5500 V5, 5600 V5, 5800 V5, 5500F V5, 5600F
V5, and 5800F V5
Loop ID
Each onboard port or port on an expansion module corresponds to a fixed loop ID,
as shown in orange and blue marks in Figure 7-5 and Figure 7-6.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 417

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTE

● SAS disk enclosures can be cascaded to onboard interface modules or 12 Gbit/s SAS
expansion modules in slots IOM 3, 4, or 5.
● Smart disk enclosures can be cascaded to 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion modules in slots
IOM 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
● High-density disk enclosures are deployed in dual-uplink networking and require two
expansion ports for cascading. The loop ID is the smaller one between two loop IDs to
which the two cascading ports correspond.
For example, the loop ID is 3 if ports P0 and P1 (marked by 3 and 4 in Figure 7-5) in
slots IOM 3 are used to cascade a high-density disk enclosure.

Figure 7-5 12 Gbit/s SAS expansion modules in slots IOM 3, 4, or 5

1 2 11 12 13 14 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6

1 2 11 12 13 14 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6

Figure 7-6 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion modules in slots IOM 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5

19 20 17 18 15 16

1 2 11 12 7 8 3 4

19 20 17 18 15 16

1 2 11 12 7 8 3 4

Disk Enclosure ID
DAEXXX indicates a disk enclosure ID. The first X indicates the controller enclosure
ID, the second X indicates the last digit of the loop ID, and the third X indicates the
number of disk enclosures connected in a loop.

NOTE

● For loops 1 to 15, the second X is 1, 2, ..., 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F, and the third X ranges
from 0 to 7 (0 for the first disk enclosure, 1 for the second disk enclosure, and so on).
● For loops 16 to 20, the second X is 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the third X is 8, 9, A, ..., and F (8
for the first disk enclosure, 9 for the second disk enclosure, and so on).
● For example, the ID of the first disk enclosure in loop 15 of controller enclosure 0 is
DAE0F0, and the ID of the first disk enclosure in loop 20 of controller enclosure 0 is
DAE048.

Table 7-8 describes the rules for naming disk enclosure IDs in each loop.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 418

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Table 7-8 Disk enclosure IDs in each loop

Expansion Port ID Loop ID Disk Enclosure ID

Module Location

Onboard P0 1 DAE010 to DAE017

expansion module
P1 2 DAE020 to DAE027

IOM 5 P0 3 DAE030 to DAE037

P1 4 DAE040 to DAE047

P2 5 DAE050 to DAE057

P3 6 DAE060 to DAE067

IOM 4 P0 7 DAE070 to DAE077

P1 8 DAE080 to DAE087

P2 9 DAE090 to DAE097

P3 10 DAE0A0 to DAE0A7

IOM 3 P0 11 DAE0B0 to DAE0B7

P1 12 DAE0C0 to DAE0C7

P2 13 DAE0D0 to DAE0D7

P3 14 DAE0E0 to DAE0E7

IOM 2 P0 15 DAE0F0 to DAE0F7

P1 16 DAE008 to DAE009,
DAE00A to DAE00F

IOM 1 P0 17 DAE018 to DAE019,

DAE01A to DAE01F

P1 18 DAE028 to DAE029,
DAE02A to DAE02F

IOM 0 P0 19 DAE038 to DAE039,

DAE03A to DAE03F

P1 20 DAE048 to DAE049,
DAE04A to DAE04F

7.3.5 OceanStor 6800 V5 and 6800F V5

Loop ID
Each port on an expansion module corresponds to a fixed loop ID, as shown in
orange and blue marks in Figure 7-7, Figure 7-8, and Figure 7-9.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 419

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTE

● SAS disk enclosures can connect to 12 Gbit/s SAS expansion modules in slots IOM H5/L5
to IOM H8/L8.
● Smart disk enclosures can connect to 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion modules in slots IOM
H1/L1 to IOM H12/L12.

Figure 7-7 Scenario where 12 Gbit/s SAS expansion modules are installed

8 0 4 12
9 1 5 13
10 2 6 14
11 3 7 15

8 0 4 12
9 1 5 13
10 2 6 14
11 3 7 15

Figure 7-8 Scenario where 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion modules are installed

16 12 20 8 4 0 2 6 10 22 14 18

17 13 21 9 5 1 3 7 11 23 15 19

16 12 20 8 4 0 2 6 10 22 14 18

17 13 21 9 5 1 3 7 11 23 15 19

Figure 7-9 Scenario where 12 Gbit/s SAS and 100 Gbit/s RDMA expansion
modules are intermixed

8 0 4 12
16 18
9 1 5 13
10 2 6 14
17 11 3 7 15 19

8 0 4 12 18
16
9 1 5 13
10 2 6 14
17 19
11 3 7 15

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 420

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Disk Enclosure ID
DAEXXX indicates a disk enclosure ID. The first X indicates the controller enclosure
ID, the second X indicates the loop ID, and the third X indicates the number of disk
enclosures connected in a loop.

NOTE

● For loops 0 to 15, the second X is 0, 1, ..., 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F, and the third X is 0 or
1 (0 for the first disk enclosure and 1 for the second disk enclosure in the loop).
● For loops 16 to 19, the second X can be 0, 1, 2, or 3, and the third X can be 8, 9, ... (8 for
the first disk enclosure and 9 for the second disk enclosure in the loop).
● For example, the ID of the first disk enclosure in loop 15 of controller enclosure 0 is
DAE0F0.

Table 7-9 describes the rules for naming disk enclosure IDs in each loop.

Table 7-9 Disk enclosure IDs in each loop

Loop ID Disk Enclosure ID

0 DAE000 to DAE007

1 DAE010 to DAE017

2 DAE020 to DAE027

3 DAE030 to DAE037

4 DAE040 to DAE047

5 DAE050 to DAE057

6 DAE060 to DAE067

7 DAE070 to DAE077

8 DAE080 to DAE087

9 DAE090 to DAE097

10 DAE0A0 to DAE0A7

11 DAE0B0 to DAE0B7

12 DAE0C0 to DAE0C7

13 DAE0D0 to DAE0D7

14 DAE0E0 to DAE0E7

15 DAE0F0 to DAE0F7

16 DAE008 to DAE00F

17 DAE018 to DAE01F

18 DAE028 to DAE02F

19 DAE038 to DAE03F

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 421

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Loop ID Disk Enclosure ID

20 DAE048 to DAE04F

21 DAE058 to DAE05F

22 DAE068 to DAE06F

23 DAE078 to DAE07F

7.4 Introduction to an FR42612L Cabinet

This section describes the function, exterior, physical structure, ESD jack, and
technical specifications of an FR42612L cabinet.

Function
The FR42612L cabinet complies with IEC 60297-1 and is an assembled cabinet for
ease of expansion. The distance between front and rear mounting bars in the
cabinet can be adjusted at a minimum unit of 25 mm. The FR42612L cabinet has
the following functions:
● Delivers space for accommodating components that can be interconnected.
● Provides castors to facilitate movement on a flat floor or a gradient that
slopes to less than or equal to 10 degrees.
● Protects components from dust.
● Prevents components from being damaged.

Appearance
The exterior of an FR42612L cabinet is in sand texture black. Figure 7-10 shows
the appearance of an FR42612L cabinet.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 422

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-10 Appearance of an FR42612L cabinet

Physical Structure
The FR42612L cabinet consists of the racks, front door, rear door, side panels,
cover, and mounting bars. Figure 7-11 shows the structure of an FR42612L
cabinet.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 423

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-11 Structure of an FR42612L cabinet

1 Cover 2 Rear door

3 Side panel 4 Mounting bar

5 Rack 6 Front door

ESD Jack
The FR42612L cabinet provides two ESD jacks. When installing or maintaining a
cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert the other end into an ESD jack, as
shown in Figure 7-12.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 424

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-12 ESD jack

Technical Specifications
Table 7-10 lists the technical specifications of an FR42612L cabinet.

Table 7-10 Technical specifications of an FR42612L cabinet

Parameter Value

Dimensions (H x 2000 mm x 600 mm x 1200 mm

W x D)

Capacity 42 U of internal space (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Weight 120 kg (only with the front and rear doors)

Cabling mode Overhead and underfloor cabling

Installation mode Fastening installation and non-fastening installation

The two modes are applicable both to the concrete ground
and ESD floor.

Material High-intensity G-A quality carbon cold-rolled steel plates

and galvanized sheets that comply with Restriction of the
Use of Certain Hazardous Substances (RoHS) and
Underwriter Laboratories (UL)

Heat dissipation Perforated doors, front-to-rear cooling, and underfloor air

intake

Operating ● Long term: 5°C to 40°C

temperature ● Short term: -5°C to +50°C

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 425

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Parameter Value

Operating ● Long term: 5% RH to 85% RH

humidity ● Short term: 5% RH to 95% RH

Power supply and An FR42612L cabinet supports two types of PDUs, namely,
power distribution single-phase 220 V 32 A PDU and three-phase 380 V 32 A
PDU. Each cabinet must be equipped with two PDUs of the
same type.
● When single-phase 220 V 32 A PDUs are used:
– Input: Two single-phase 32 A inputs must be provided
for each cabinet.
– Output: Each PDU provides twenty C13 outputs and
four C19 outputs.
NOTE
In single-phase power supply mode, the maximum power
consumption of all devices in a cabinet cannot exceed 6336 W.
● When three-phase 380 V 32 A PDUs are used:
– Input: Two three-phase 32 A inputs must be provided
for each cabinet.
– Output: Each PDU provides twenty-four C13 outputs
and three C19 outputs.

NOTE

● Operating temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in
front of the device in the equipment room.
● Short-term operation means that the consecutive operating time does not exceed 48
hours, and the annual accumulative operating time does not exceed 15 days.

7.5 Installation Environment Checklist

Table 7-11 lists the check items and requirements on the installation environment.

Table 7-11 Installation environment checklist

No. Item Requirement

1 Site The site of the equipment room is free of high or low

selection temperature, heavy dust, harmful gas, inflammable or
explosive materials, electromagnetic interference (nearby
large-sized radar station, broadcast transmitting station,
or transformer station), unstable electric voltage, and
large vibration or strong noise. During engineering design,
you need to consider hydrology, geography, earthquake,
electric power, and transportation conditions according to
the technical requirements for communication network
planning and communication devices.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 426

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

No. Item Requirement

2 Civil The space of the equipment room must be sufficient for

construct product installation and capacity expansion. The floor
ion must meet the bearing weight requirements. Cable
troughs, ladders, and holes are installed or ready and the
decoration is completed.

3 Operatin For details, see "Environmental Requirements" in the

g product description specific to your product model and
temperat version.
ure

4 Altitude

5 Particle
Contami
nants

6 Corrosive
Airborne
Contami
nants

7 Vibration
and
Shock

8 Air If the temperature in the room exceeds 35°C, you are

condition advised to install air conditioners (which can restart
er automatically after a power-off). Do not let the air
conditioner blow directly toward the devices.

9 Moisture If the relative humidity is greater than 70%, install

preventio dehumidifying devices, such as the air conditioner with
n the dehumidification function or special dehumidifier.
Ensure that the equipment room is protected from water
seepage and dew.

10 Heating For an environment where the average daily temperature

is lower than 5°C for at least 90 days each year, heating
devices are required. For an environment where the
average temperature is lower than 5°C for 60 to 90 days
each year, heating devices are recommended.

11 Ventilati A cabinet is at least 1000 mm away from the wall and

on and 1200 mm away from another cabinet. To maintain a
heat convective air transfer between the cabinet and the
dissipatio equipment room, no enclosed space is allowed in the
n cabinet. It is recommended that you leave 1 U space
above and below each device.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 427

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

No. Item Requirement

12 Dust For the equipment room near dust sources (such as coal
preventio mines, country roads, or farmland), use double-layer
n aluminum alloy windows for proper sealing and an anti-
theft and fireproof door. Separate the devices from the
door with a partition board to avoid dust.

13 Ground The ground resistance is smaller than 10 ohm. The

resistanc distance between the top of the ground terminal and the
e ground is at least 0.7 m. In the cold regions, bury the
ground terminal under the layer of frozen earth. The
ground resistance is measured periodically to ensure that
the grounding is effective.

14 Ground The ground bar in the equipment room is securely

lead-in connected to ground cables. The ground lead-in is less
than 30 m and is prepared using zinc-coated flat steel
whose cross-sectional area is not smaller than 40 mm x 4
mm. The contact point is processed for insulation and
anticorrosive purposes. The above-ground steel is
protected from mechanical damage and is intact without
soldering points for the break.

15 Neutral- A neutral-ground voltage lower than 2 V is

ground recommended. The maximum value is 4 V. Ensure that
voltage the device is properly grounded.

16 Lightnin The equipment room is equipped with lightning

g conductors such as a lightning rod and lightning belt. The
protectio lightning conductors are connected to the same ground
n bar as the protection ground of the equipment room.

17 AC For details, see Electrical Specifications in Specifications

power Query (https://support-it.huawei.com/spec/#/home).
supply

18 High
voltage
DC

19 DC

20 Circuit To avoid unexpected power loss of storage devices

breaker connected to the same circuit breaker when a storage
device has failed, the circuit breaker of the external power
supply must meet the following current specification
requirements:
● AC: no less than 10 A
● DC:
– 2 U controller enclosure: no less than 32 A
– SAS disk enclosure: no less than 18.5 A
– Smart disk enclosure: no less than 32 A

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 428

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

No. Item Requirement

21 AC The neutral line of a power cable is not connected to the

groundin protection ground bar of any devices in the equipment
g room. Leading-out terminals are deployed for the AC
protection ground to facilitate device grounding.

22 AC The AC power system of the equipment room is equipped

lightning with a lightning arrestor with a rated discharging current
protectio of no less than 20,000 A, and the arrestor is properly
n grounded.

23 Cabinet The cabinet is a standard 19-inch one with a depth of no

less than 1000 mm. For high-density disk enclosures, the
minimum depth of the cabinet is 1100 mm.

24 Transmis The transmission system commissioning is complete and

sion meets all engineering requirements. The protection
device ground of the transmission system is securely connected
to the ground bar in the equipment room.

a: ISO, International Organization for Standardization.

b: Å, Ångström, a unit of length. One Å is equal to 1/10,000,000,000 meters.
c: ANSI, American National Standards Institute.
d: ISA, Instrument Society of America.

7.6 Checking a Third-Party Cabinet

If you are installing a device in a third-party cabinet, check the cabinet first to
ensure that it meets the conditions for installing devices.
Before installing hardware, a third-party cabinet provided by a customer must be
checked both by the customer and by a Huawei hardware installation engineer to
ensure that it meets the requirements for installing and operating devices. Table
7-12 and Table 7-13 list the check items.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 429

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTICE

● When evaluating the power supply capability of a cabinet, consider the voltage
fluctuation range of the locality. Obtain the current fluctuation range allowed
by the external power supply according to its specifications, and then calculate
the actual power supply capability of the cabinet.
● When evaluating the power bearing capability of each PDU and PDU group,
consider the voltage fluctuation range of the locality. Obtain the current
fluctuation range allowed by each PDU and PDU group based on their
specifications, and then calculate the actual power bearing capability of each
PDU and PDU group.
● Connect the power cables of the storage devices to different PDU groups based
on the power consumption, so each PDU group bears similar power load,
preventing overload in any group.

Table 7-12 Check items for a third-party cabinet (for ordinary disk enclosure)

Catego Check Item Condition Remarks

ry

Ground Does the ground □Yes □No The total weight of the
bearing bearing capacity of cabinet and all devices,
of the the equipment room PDUs, and components in
equipm meet requirements? the cabinet does not exceed
ent the ground bearing capacity
room of the equipment room.

Cabinet Is the cabinet a 19-in. □Yes □No The size meets the
parame standard cabinet (in requirements shown in
ters compliance with the Figure 7-13.
IEC 60297 standards)?

Is the cabinet empty? □Yes □No A third-party cabinet must

be empty to ensure that:
● The cabinet has the
capacity expansion
capability.
● OceanStor storage
systems do not interfere
mutually with other
devices in terms of
cables, heat, electricity,
and ground while
providing high
maintainability and
reliability.
● If a third-party cabinet is
not empty, the following-
up capacity expansion
and installation will be
affected.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 430

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Catego Check Item Condition Remarks

ry

Is the depth (L) at □Yes □No For details about how to

least 1200 mm? See check whether the cabinet
Figure 7-14. depth meets the installation
requirements, see 3.1.2.1
Cabinet Planning.

Does the cabinet have □Yes □No Check whether the cabinet
adequate space for has adequate space for
installing the installing Huawei devices.
enclosure? Each controller enclosure
occupies 2 U or 4 U, and
each disk enclosure occupies
2 U or 4 U.

What is the shape of □ Square hole N/A

the holes on the (side length ≥
mounting bar? 9.5 mm x 9.5
mm)
□ Round hole
(diameter ≥ Ф
7 mm)

Is the distance □Yes □No If a third-party cabinet has

between the front and guide rails or trays, skip this
rear mounting bars item.
(L2) ranges from 600
mm to 900 mm? See
Figure 7-14.

Do the guide rails □Yes □No 4 U controller enclosure in

delivered with the full configuration:
third-party cabinet 97 kg
meet the load-bearing
NOTE
requirements? Adjustable guide rails are not
included in a storage device to
be installed in a third-party
cabinet. You can specify
whether adjustable guide rails
are needed when purchasing a
storage device.

Is the distance □Yes □No If the distance is less than

between the front 1000 mm, cables at the rear
mounting bar and the of the storage device will
rear door (L3) at least affect proper cable routing.
1000 mm? Refer to
Figure 7-14.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 431

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Catego Check Item Condition Remarks

ry

Is the distance □Yes □No If the distance is less than

between the front 50 mm, the mounting bar
mounting bar and will affect closing of the
interior side of the front cabinet door.
front door (L1) at
least 50 mm? Refer to
Figure 7-14.

Is the angle of the □Yes □No A small angle hinders the

door when open at loading, unloading, and
least 120º? maintaining of devices.

Cabinet What is the AC power □ 220 V AC The server supports 220 V

power nominal voltage (V)? AC.
system
A disk enclosure □Yes □No ● 220 V AC single-phase,
requires 1+1 power 32 A
supplies, a 2 U ● 380 V AC three-phase, 32
controller enclosure A
requires 1+1 power
supplies, and a 4 U
controller enclosure
requires 2+2 power
supplies.

Does the power □Yes □No The power system must be

system meet power able to support the total
supply requirements? maximum power
consumption of all devices
in the cabinet. You can
query the maximum power
consumption of Huawei
devices on the Power
Consumption Calculation
or from the "Electrical
Specifications" in
Specifications Query.

Does the power of □Yes □No Each PDU group must be

each PDU group meet able to support the total
the requirements? maximum power
consumption of all devices
in that group. You can query
the maximum power
consumption of Huawei
devices on the Power
Consumption Calculation
or from the "Electrical
Specifications" in
Specifications Query.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 432

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Catego Check Item Condition Remarks

ry

Does the power plug □Yes □No If the power plug of the
of the PDU face PDU faces toward the side,
toward the rear door? the FRU cannot be installed
properly.

Is the PDU width □Yes □No If the PDU width is greater

greater than 50 mm? than 50 mm, the PDU may
interfere with the device,
affecting the removal and
installation of interface
modules.

Are there sufficient □Yes □No The number of power

power sockets (C13 sockets required by each
standards) available device is as follows:
on each PDU of each ● 4 U controller enclosure:
cabinet? 4
● 2 U controller enclosure
with disks and controllers
integrated, 2 U disk
enclosure, and 4 U disk
enclosure: 2

What is the power □ IEC The power socket type of

socket type? standards the storage device is C14.
Each cabinet must provide
C13 sockets. If this cannot
be met, replace the PDU on
C13
site.

Is there a ground □Yes □No For DC models, ground

point? points must be reserved in
the cabinet for device
grounding. Two ground
points are required for a 2 U
controller enclosure with
disks and controllers
integrated, 2 U disk
enclosure, and 4 U disk
enclosure. One ground point
is required for a high-density
enclosure.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 433

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Table 7-13 Check items for a third-party cabinet (for high-density enclosures)
Catego Check Item Condition Remarks
ry

Ground Does the ground □Yes □No The total weight of the
bearing bearing capacity of the cabinet and all devices,
of the equipment room meet PDUs, and components in
equipm requirements? the cabinet does not exceed
ent the ground bearing capacity
room of the equipment room. The
weight of a single high-
density disk enclosure is 100
kg in full configuration.

Cabinet Is the cabinet a 19-in. □Yes □No The size meets the
parame standard cabinet (in requirements shown in
ters compliance with the Figure 7-13.
IEC 60297 standards)?

Is the cabinet empty? □Yes □No A third-party cabinet must

be empty to ensure that:
● The cabinet has the
capacity expansion
capability.
● OceanStor storage
systems do not interfere
mutually with other
devices in terms of
cables, heat, electricity,
and ground while
providing high
maintainability and
reliability.
● If a third-party cabinet is
not empty, the following-
up capacity expansion
and installation will be
affected.

Is the depth (L) at □Yes □No -

least 1150 mm? Refer
to Figure 7-14.

Does the cabinet have □Yes □No Check whether the cabinet
adequate space for has adequate space
installing the depending on the product
enclosure? configuration.

What is the shape of □ Square hole -

the holes on the (side length ≥
mounting bar? 9.5 mm x 9.5
mm)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 434

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Catego Check Item Condition Remarks

ry

Is the distance □Yes □No If no, you cannot install the

between the front and storage guide rail on the
rear mounting bars cabinet.
(L2) ranges from 600
mm to 900 mm and is
the surrounding about
475 mm within the
installation scope of
the guide rail free of
any obstacles? Refer to
Figure 7-14.

Is the distance □Yes □No If no, cables behind the

between the front storage device will be too
mounting bar and the close to the rear door of the
rear door (L3) at least cabinet and may fail to be
1000 mm? Refer to installed.
Figure 7-14.

Is the distance □Yes □No If no, the storage device will

between the front be too close to the front
mounting bar and door. Therefore, the front
interior side of the door cannot be closed.
front door (L1) at least
50 mm? Refer to
Figure 7-14.

Is the top 4 U space of □Yes □No If a high-density disk

the cabinet free of any enclosure is installed in the
high-density top 4 U space, disks cannot
enclosures? be inserted.

Is the angle of the □Yes □No A small angle hinders the

door at least 120º loading, unloading, and
when being opened? maintaining of devices.

Cabinet What is the AC power □ 220 V AC 220 V AC is supported.

power nominal voltage (V)?
system
Does the cabinet □Yes □No -
require a dual-channel
PDU?

Does the power □Yes □No Check whether the power

system meet power supply is sufficient for the
supply requirements? maximum power
consumption of the device.

Does the power of □Yes □No Check whether the power of

each PDU group meet each PDU group is sufficient
the requirements? for the maximum power
consumption of the device.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 435

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Catego Check Item Condition Remarks

ry

Does the power plug □Yes □No If the power plug of the
of the PDU face PDU faces toward the side,
toward the rear door? the high-density disk
enclosure cannot be
installed.

Is the PDU width □Yes □No If the PDU width is greater

greater than 50 mm? than 50 mm, the PDU may
interfere with the device,
affecting the removal and
installation of interface
modules.

Are there sufficient □Yes □No Each high-density disk

power sockets (C13 enclosure requires four
standards) available power sockets.
on each PDU of each
cabinet?

What is the power □ IEC The power socket type of

socket type? standards the storage device is C14.
Each cabinet must provide
C13 sockets. If this cannot
be met, replace the PDU on
C13
site.

Is there a ground □Yes □No Each high-density disk

point? enclosure requires a ground
point.

NOTE

If a high-density disk enclosure is installed in the top 4 U space, disks cannot be inserted.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 436

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-13 Mechanical structure and size requirements for IEC 60297 482.6 mm
(19 in.) series cabinet

Figure 7-14 Top view of a cabinet

7.7 Using SmartKit to Install UltraPath

SmartKit has integrated user guides oriented to multiple types of hosts into the
multipathing software installation scenario. In addition, a maximum of 256

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

devices can be added to SmartKit so that the multipathing software installation

tool can simultaneously install UltraPath on these devices. The entire process,
including installation package verification and upload, pre-installation check,
software installation, and post-installation verification, is automatically completed.
Also, installation track reports can be automatically generated, greatly improving
installation efficiency.

Prerequisites
Both UltraPath and SmartKit meet the following requirements:
● UltraPath: 21.1.0 or later
● SmartKit: V2R5C00RC10 or later

Procedure
Step 1 Start SmartKit. Log in to SmartKit as a Huawei engineer or channel partner
engineer. Click the Storage tab. In the Site Deployment Delivery area, select
UltraPath Installation.
NOTE

Based on user permissions, SmartKit users are classified into Huawei engineers, channel
partner engineers, customers, and visitors.

If the following dialog box is displayed, click OK.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 438

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Step 2 In the UltraPath installation wizard, select Check before UltraPath Installation.

Step 3 In the Installation Preparation dialog box that is displayed, complete the
following preparations as prompted:
1. Click download the UltraPath software package. On the support website,
download the corresponding UltraPath software package. In addition,
download the signature verification tool and verify the digital signature. If the
UltraPath software package has been obtained, skip this step.
2. Based on the application scenario, select the types of hosts where UltraPath
needs to be installed.
3. Manually complete a pre-installation check for all host types and select
Confirmed from the Operation drop-down box on the right.
4. Click Finish.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 439

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Step 4 In the UltraPath installation wizard, select UltraPath Software Installation.

Step 5 Add devices.

1. Click Add Host. The Select Device installation wizard is displayed.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 440

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

2. Click Add Device. The Add Device dialog box is displayed.

3. To add one device, select Device Type and set IP Address.
4. To add more devices, click the Template link to obtain the corresponding
template, fill in the device information, click Path, select the template file,
and upload and parse the file. The system automatically adds the devices.

After the devices are added successfully, the tool displays the device information.
Click Next.

Step 6 Set an installation policy.

1. Select an UltraPath software package for all the selected devices.
2. For Linux hosts, you need to manually specify an installation policy.
– Boot From SAN: If a host starts from the SAN storage, you must select
this policy. Otherwise, the host may fail to restart. If the number of disks
mounted to a host exceeds 500, you are advised to select this option.
– Boot From Local Disk: If a host starts from a local disk, you are advised
to select this option.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 441

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

3. Click Finish. The configuration is complete and the main window is displayed.

Step 7 Click Start.

NOTE

● After hosts are added, they are displayed in the main window. If any host is incorrectly
added, select it and click Remove Host to delete the host.
● After all the selected hosts have executed the installation policy, the system
automatically generates a report. To specify a report directory, click Set Directory.
● To modify an installation policy, click Modify in the Installation Policy column.

Step 8 Confirm the precautions in the dialog box that is displayed, select I have read the
previous information and understood consequences of the operation, and click
OK.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 442

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Step 9 Start to install UltraPath.

1. The tool concurrently installs UltraPath on the selected hosts. You can select a
host in the host list to view the current installation status.

NOTE

The installation process consists of four steps. You can click each tab to view details
about the corresponding step.
1. UltraPath Software Package Import: This step automatically uploads the
software package to a host.
2. Pre-Install Check: This step checks that a host allows UltraPath to be installed on
it.
3. Install: This step installs the main program of the UltraPath software.
4. Post-Install Verification: This step checks, activates, and validates the UltraPath
software.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 443

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

2. If some check items are not passed or need to be optimized, the system will
suspend the installation and Paused will be displayed in the Operation
column in the upper pane. You can click View Details to view the current
status. For a specific check item or operation item, click Details in the
Operation column in the lower pane to view information.

3. The system provides a check method, check criteria, and recovery suggestion.
If a check item fails, you can handle the problem according to the check
result.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 444

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTE

Each check item can be retried, ignored, or terminated according to the policy
requirements. If the current item does not support an operation, the corresponding
button is unavailable.
– Retry: After the fault is rectified, click Retry to check the current item again.
– Ignore: Ignore this item and proceed with subsequent operations if the current
check item or operation item can be ignored.
– Terminate: If you want to terminate the installation process, click this button. This
may cause UltraPath software exceptions on the host. Exercise caution when
performing this operation.

Step 10 After UltraPath has been installed on all the selected hosts, the system
automatically generates an installation report in Excel format. Click View Report
to view detailed information. Click Close to finish the installation.

NOTICE

Do not repeatedly install UltraPath on a host. If you need to upgrade UltraPath,

use the UltraPath upgrade tool.

Step 11 The main window is displayed, and the UltraPath software installation is complete.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 445

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

----End

7.8 General Cable Routing Principles

To avoid loss resulting from incorrect cable routing, follow specified principles
when routing ground cables, power cables, network cables, mini SAS cables, serial
cables, and optical fibers.

General Cable Routing Principles

● In an equipment room containing brackets and an ESD floor, cables can be
routed through the ground interlayer (the space between the concrete floor
and the ESD floor) or the cable tray. Also, cables can be routed through a
cable tray that is installed on the top of the cabinet.
● The specifications, routing, cross-section, and location for cable routing should
be predetermined, and the cables should be arranged neatly.
● The insulation layer of the conductor should be intact.
● Cables must be bent smoothly with a bend radius of larger than 60 mm.
● Ease of maintenance and expansion should be considered when routing
cables.
● Power cables and ground cables should be separated from signal cables to
reduce electromagnetic interference.

General Optical Fiber Routing Principles

● Do not forcibly pull or excessively bend the optical fibers.
● The bending radius of optical fibers must be no less than 50 mm.
● Do not stack other cables on the laid optical fibers.
● When used in a cabinet, optical fibers should be inside corrugated pipes. The
corrugated pipes should be stretched into the cabinet by about 100 mm.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 446

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

● Cut the corrugated pipe according to the required length during hardware
installation. Wrap tape around the sharp edge of the corrugated pipe to
protect the optical fibers.
● In an equipment room containing brackets and an ESD floor, optical fibers
shielded in the corrugated pipes can be routed through the ground interlayer
or the cable tray.
● Optical fibers can be routed through the cable tray installed on the top of the
cabinet.
● If the cable tray is more than 0.8 m above the cabinet top, set up a cable
ladder above the cabinet.

7.9 Cable Routing and Binding Basics

This section describes basics about cable routing and binding. Correct cabling and
binding prevent damage to cables.

7.9.1 Cable Routing and Binding

This section describes the general methods and requirements for cable routing and
binding.

Cable Routing
● In an equipment room installed with supports and ESD floor, cables can go
through the interlayer (the space between the concrete floor and the ESD
floor) or the cable trough.
● If the cables are led out from the top of the cabinet, a cable tray should be
built over the cabinet. Use cable ties to fix the PDU cables in the cabinet, to
prevent PDU connectors loosening due to gravity of cables.
● The specifications, routing, section, and position for arranging the cables
should be designed beforehand. The cables should be lined up neatly, without
any damage on the cover.
● Signal cables, such as the alarm cables, network cables, and clock cables must
be routed separately from power cables.
● The cable should be turned smoothly at the bends, with the minimum bend
radius no less than three times the diameter of the cable.
● The insulation layer of the conducting wire must be intact.
● The cables should be routed in a way that facilitates future maintenance and
expansion.

Cable Binding
● Bind the cables when laying them on the passage. The cables should be
aligned snugly together. The spacing between the cable ties should be even
with a neat overall appearance.
● Cables run through the ducts do not need to be bound but should be
arranged neatly without crossover. The cable should not overflow the trough.
Bind or attach the cables with ties where they enter or exit the trough and at
turning points.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 447

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

● The bundles should be tidy and their purpose clear. The bundles can be
classified by type. A large number of cables can be further classified by
column. Bind each group of cables with ties.
● Do not connect two or more cable ties to bind cables, because this may
decrease the strength of the binding.
● Bind the cables neatly and trim the excessive tie.
● The cable ties should be evenly spaced three to four times the diameter of the
cable bundle.
● Use as long a bend radius as possible to prevent internal cable stress and
breakage.
Figure 7-15 shows how to bind cables.

Figure 7-15 Binding cables

1. Cable tie placed 2. Cable ties 3. Cable tie 4. Cable tie

incorrectly (at the bend) correctly placed loose not trimmed

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 448

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

5. Cable tie correctly 6. Space cable ties -

trimmed three or four
times the
diameter of the
bundle

7.9.2 Optical Fiber Routing and Bundling

This section describes the general methods and requirements for routing and
binding of optical fibers.

Optical Fiber Routing

● During the hardware installation, cut the corrugated pipe to the desired
length and wrap the sharp ends with adhesive tape to protect the optical
fiber.
● Avoid forcibly pulling or excessively bending optical fibers during routing.
There should be no other cables on the optical fibers.
● If cable trays are installed for a storage device, place all cables connected to
the device into the troughs of the cable trays.
NOTE

Evenly divide the cables connected to the storage device into two parts. Place the left part
of cables into the troughs of the left cable tray, and the right part in the troughs of the
right cable tray.
● The bending radius of optical fibers must be no less than 50 mm.
● Route optical fibers inside the cabinet along the posts on the sides of the
cabinet and attach them when necessary.
● Corrugated pipes are required when running optical fibers outside the cabinet,
and should be extended into the cabinet about 100 mm.
● When using corrugated pipes, optical fibers can be run through the cable
trough in an equipment room installed with supports and ESD floor, or the
interlayer (the space between the concrete floor and the ESD floor).
● If the optical fibers are led out from the top of the cabinet, a cable tray
should be installed over the cabinet for cabling. If the distance between the
cable tray and the cabinet top is longer than 0.8 m (31.50 in.), a cable ladder
should be used.

Optical Fiber Bundling

● Optical fiber binding tapes are used to bundle optical fibers.
● Optical fibers should be bound neatly without crossover.
● Optical fibers should be arranged neatly without crossover.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 449

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Optical Fiber Binding Tape

WARNING

Before bundling optical fibers, read the instructions and precautions carefully to
prevent man-made accidents.

● Appearance of the optical fiber binding tape

The optical fiber binding tape is 12.5 mm wide, with one hook side (made of
transparent polypropylene) and one mat side (made of black nylon) working
together to bundle optical fibers tightly, as shown in Figure 7-16.

Figure 7-16 Appearance of the optical fiber binding tape

● Bundling optical fibers using the optical fiber binding tape

a. Arrange the optical fibers into a bundle. Cut off a piece of the optical
fiber binding tape of appropriate length according to the size of the
bundle.
b. Hold the bundle with one hand and press one end of the optical fiber
binding tape on the bundle with the thumb, as shown in Figure 7-17.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 450

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-17 Step 1 of bundling optical fibers

c. Strain the optical fiber binding tape by the other end with the other
hand. Turn the fiber binding tape around the fiber bundle till the mat
side adheres to the hook side snugly, as shown in Figure 7-18.

Figure 7-18 Step 2 of bundling optical fibers

● Expected result
The optical fibers are bundled successfully, as shown in Figure 7-19.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 451

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-19 Step 3 of bundling optical fibers

● Precautions
– When using a fiber binding tape, keep the mat side inside and the hook
side outside. It is only the mat side of the fiber binding tape that contacts
the optical fiber.
– Arrange the optical fibers tidily into a bundle before bundling.
– Bundle the optical fibers with appropriate force. Never bind them too
tight.
– The interval between two pieces of optical fiber binding tape should not
exceed 40 cm.
– A bundle can contain a maximum of 100 optical fibers (each with a
diameter of 2 mm) or 60 optical fibers (each with a diameter of 3 mm).
If more optical fibers need to be bundled, separate them into different
bundles.

7.10 Preparing Cables and Connectors

This chapter describes how to prepare power cables, ground cables, and network
cables.

7.10.1 Preparing Ordinary Network Cables

This section describes how to prepare ordinary network cables.

Components of an Ordinary Network Cable

An ordinary network cable consists of two ordinary RJ45 connectors and one
category 5 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. Figure 7-20 shows an ordinary
network cable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 452

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-20 Ordinary network cable

Checking Tools and Materials

● Ensure that the necessary tools, including the diagonal pliers, blades (or
knives), and the RJ45 crimping tool, are available.
● Ensure that the materials, including the RJ45 connectors, category 5 UTP
cable, and the boots, are available.
● Ensure that the cable sheath is in proper condition. If the sheath around a
part of the cable is convex, damaged, or uneven in thickness, cut that part
from the cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Use the diagonal pliers to cut the cable according to the required length.
Step 2 Put the cable through the boot, and reserve at least 100 mm of the cable for
installing the connector. Ensure that the boot is installed in the correct direction,
as shown in Figure 7-21.

Figure 7-21 Installing the boot of the RJ45 connector

Step 3 Use a blade or knife to peel off 20 mm of the sheath, as shown in Figure 7-22. Do
not damage the insulation of the wires.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 453

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-22 Peeling off the sheath

Step 4 Arrange the four pairs of wires according to the color codes followed by pins of
the RJ45 connector shown in Table 7-14. Figure 7-23 illustrates pins of the RJ45
connector (pay attention to the pin colors).

Figure 7-23 Pins of the RJ45 connector

NOTE

In Table 7-14, end A and end B refer to both ends of a network cable.

Table 7-14 Pair color codes

Pin Insulation Colors

Straight- Straight- Crossover Cable Crossover Cable

Through Cable Through Cable End A End B
End A End B

1 White and White and White and White and

orange orange orange green

2 Orange Orange Orange Green

3 White and White and White and White and

green green green orange

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 454

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

4 Blue Blue Blue Blue

5 White and blue White and blue White and blue White and blue

6 Green Green Green Orange

7 White and White and White and White and

brown brown brown brown

8 Brown Brown Brown Brown

Step 5 Ensure that the wires are 13 to 15 mm long. Cut off the excess if the wires are
longer than required, arrange them in the correct order, and then insert them into
the RJ45 connector, as shown in Figure 7-24.

Figure 7-24 Arranging the wires according to the color codes

Step 6 Use the RJ45 crimping tool to crimp the connector. Ensure that the connector is
put in the right position in the RJ45 crimping tool. After crimping, the metal cover
on the connector must be lower than other area on the connector.
Step 7 Use a network cable tester or a multimeter to test all the wires and ensure that
they are connected properly.
Step 8 Push the boot to cover the RJ45 connector, as shown in Figure 7-25.

Figure 7-25 Pushing the boot to cover the RJ45 connector

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 455

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

----End

7.10.2 Preparing Shielded Network Cables

This section describes how to prepare shielded network cables.

Components of a Shielded Network Cable

A shielded network cable consists of two shielded RJ45 connectors and one
shielded twisted pair (STP) cable. Figure 7-26 shows a complete shielded network
cable.

Figure 7-26 Shielded network cable

Checking Tools and Materials

Check the following items:
● Ensure that all necessary tools, including the diagonal pliers, RJ45 crimping
tool, and blades (or knives), are available.
● Ensure that the necessary materials, including the shielded RJ45 connectors
and the category 5e cables, are available. Figure 7-27 shows the shielded
RJ45 connector, which has a shielded iron cover and a wire fastening slot.
● Ensure that the cable sheath is in proper condition. If the sheath round a part
of the cable is convex, uneven in thickness, or damaged, cut that part off.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 456

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-27 Components of a shielded RJ45 connector

Procedure
Step 1 Install the boot of the RJ45 connector.
1. Select a cable of proper length and install the boot on the RJ45 connector of
the cable, as shown in Figure 7-28.

Figure 7-28 Installing the boot of the RJ45 connector

2. Use a blade or knife to peel off 30 mm of the sheath and use a blade to slit
up to 5 mm on the sheath, as shown in Figure 7-29.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 457

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-29 Peeling off the sheath

3. Install a shielded iron cover on the cable shield, and then insert the shielded
iron cover into the sheath along the crack. Install the shielded iron cover
correctly, as shown in Figure 7-30.

Figure 7-30 Installing the shielded metal cover

Step 2 Install the wires.

NOTICE

When peeling off the cable sheath, do not damage the cable shield or the
insulated wires.

1. Use the diagonal pliers to peel the cable shield, grounding wire, aluminum
foil, and polyester band off the first 20 mm of the cable, leaving only the
insulated conductors.
2. Arrange the four twisted pairs properly and insert them into the load bar, as
shown in Figure 7-31 and Figure 7-32. Maintain the original twist pitch of
the twisted pairs.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 458

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-31 Leading cables through the load bar

Figure 7-32 Cable locations in a load bar

3. Arrange the pairs smoothly and straightly at the aperture of the load bar.
Arrange the wires properly and cut off the excess of the wires along the edge
of the wire fastening slot. Table 7-15 shows the wires order, and Figure 7-33
shows the pins of the RJ45 connector (pay attention to the colors of pins).

Figure 7-33 Pins of the RJ45 connector

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 459

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Table 7-15 Pair color codes

Pin Insulation Colors

Straight- Straight- Crossover Crossover

Through Cable Through Cable Cable End A Cable End B
End A End B

1 White and White and White and White and

orange orange orange green

2 Orange Orange Orange Green

3 White and White and White and White and

green green green orange

4 Blue Blue Blue Blue

5 White and White and White and White and

blue blue blue blue

6 Green Green Green Orange

7 White and White and White and White and

brown brown brown brown

8 Brown Brown Brown Brown

4. Install the plastic cover on the wire fastening slot, and then fasten the slot. To
ensure that the cover is fitted properly, push it into the slot until you hear a
click, as shown in Figure 7-34.

Figure 7-34 Installing the wires

Step 3 Crimp the RJ45 connector.

1. Insert the RJ45 connector into the metal cover.
2. Use the diagonal pliers to crimp the pins on the RJ45 connector. Ensure that
the conductors inside the wires are properly connected to the pins and the
RJ45 connector is placed correctly. After crimping, the pins on the connector
must be lower than the plastic cover.
3. Use a network cable tester or a multimeter to check that the wires are
connected properly.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 460

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

4. Insert the RJ45 connector into the boot, as shown in Figure 7-35.

Figure 7-35 Crimping the RJ45 connector

----End

7.10.3 Preparing External Power Cables and Ground Cables

with OT Terminals
This section describes how to prepare external power cables and ground cables
with OT terminals.

Recommended Tools and Materials

The recommended tools and materials for preparing external power cables
(example in this document) and ground cables with OT terminals are as follows:

● Tools:
– Power cable crimping tool
– Hydraulic pliers
– Box cutter
– Diagonal pliers
– Wire clipper
– Heat gun

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 461

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

● Materials:
– Power cables
– Insulation tapes
– OT terminals
– Heat shrink tubes

Procedure
Step 1 Peel off a section of the insulation layer C from the power cable based on the
cross-sectional area of the power cable conductors. A section of power cable
conductor D with a length of L1 is exposed, as shown in Figure 7-36. Table 7-16
lists the recommended lengths of the insulation layer to be peeled off (L1).

Figure 7-36 Peeling off the insulation layer of the power cable

NOTICE

● When peeling off the insulation layer of the power cable, take care not to
scratch the conductor of the power cable.
● You can adjust L1 according to the length of the OT terminal. L1 = L + (1 to 2)
mm.

Table 7-16 Mappings between the cross-sectional area and the length of the
insulation layer to be peeled off (L1)

Cross-Sectional Area (mm2) L1 (mm)

1 7

1.5 7

2.5 7

4 8

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 462

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Cross-Sectional Area (mm2) L1 (mm)

6 9

10 11

16 13

25 14

35 16

50 16

NOTE

Engineers can determine the length of insulation layer to be peeled off by comparing the
cable with the connector to be crimped.

Step 2 Insert the power cable into the heat shrink tube A, as shown in Figure 7-37.

Step 3 Insert the bare conductor of the power cable into the OT terminal B, and then
press the OT terminal close to the insulation layer C, as shown in Figure 7-37.

Figure 7-37 Installing the heat shrink tube and OT terminal

NOTICE

After the OT terminal is installed, the length of the bare conductor outside the OT
terminal (L2) cannot be larger than 2 mm. If L2 is larger than 2 mm, cut the
excess by using the diagonal pliers or wire clipper, as shown in Figure 7-37.

Step 4 Use the power cable crimping tool to clamp the tail of the OT terminal and the
contact part of the conductor, as shown in Figure 7-38.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 463

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-38 Clamping the tail of the OT terminal with the contact part of the
conductor

NOTE

The crimped shape varies with the crimping mold.

Step 5 Push the heat shrink tube A toward the OT terminal, and cover the crimping area
of the OT terminal and the conductor. Use a heat gun to heat the heat shrink
tube, as shown in Figure 7-39.

NOTICE

Stop heating the heat shrink tube once the cable is wrapped by it tightly. Excessive
heat may damage the insulation layer of the cable.

Figure 7-39 Installing the heat shrink tube

----End

7.11 Engineering Label Specifications for Cables

This chapter describes how to make, fill in, and attach cable labels.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 464

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Labels are affixed to the cables to identify the physical positions of the cables on
different devices. There are two types of cable labels: labels for the power cables
and labels for the signal cables.

NOTE

If otherwise required by the customer, fill in and arrange labels in such a way that helps
maintain label consistency in the same equipment room.

7.11.1 Introduction to Labels

This section describes the materials, types, and structures of labels. It also
describes the requirements on label printing and handwriting, attaching methods,
label contents, and precautions.

Material Specification
The material features of the labels are as follows:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm.
● Color: chalk white.
● Material: Polyester (PET).
● Allowable temperature: -29°C to +149°C.
● The labels can be printed on by a laser printer or written with an oil marker.
● The material must pass the authentication of Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
and Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

Types
There are two types of cable labels: one is for power cables and the other is for
signal cables.

Label for the Signal Cable

The label for a signal cable is L-shaped and of a fixed size. Figure 7-40 shows a
label for a signal cable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 465

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-40 Label for a signal cable

The dividing lines on the label make the position of a cable clearer. For example,
there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the enclosure number,
and another between the enclosure number and the slot number. The size of the
dividing line is 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm, and its color is PANTONE 656c (light blue).
The dotted lines mark the position for folding the label when you attach it to the
cable.
There is a mark "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the
label. Write information about the peer end of the cable, to which the label is
affixed after the mark.

Label for a Power Cable

The label for a power cable is attached to the identification plate on a cable tie.
The size of the bulge around the identification plate is 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm and is
symmetric on both sides. The label is attached to the center of the plate, as shown
in Figure 7-41.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 466

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-41 Label for a power cable

7.11.2 Usage of Labels

This section describes how to use the labels, the contents on the labels, and the
precautions for using the labels.

Contents on Labels
The contents on a label for a signal cable are different from the contents on a
label for a power cable.

For a Signal Cable

The two sides of a label affixed to a signal cable indicate the location of the ports
connected to both ends of the cable, as shown in Figure 7-42.
● Area 1 records the location information about the cable end to which the
label is to be affixed.
● Area 2 (with the "TO:" mark) records the location information about the
other end of the cable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 467

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

● Area 3 is folded between areas 1 and 2.

Figure 7-42 Printing parts on a label for a signal cable

If the label is viewed from the cable leading-out area, it appears on the right side
of the cable. The side with "TO:" that faces outward indicates the location of one
end of the cable; the other side indicates the location of the other end.

For a Power Cable

A label for a power cable is affixed only to one side of the identification plate. The
information (the part after the mark "TO:") on the label indicates the location of
the peer end device, control cabinet, cable distribution box, or socket of the cable
end to which the label is affixed.

Precautions for Using Labels

Pay attention to the following items when using the labels:

● When you print or write information on the labels or attach the labels, ensure
that the labels are clean.
● Do not use ink-jet printers or ink pens to print or write on the labels because
the label paper is made up of moisture-proof and waterproof material.
● Affix labels neatly. The new label is of striped type. The appearance of the
product is affected if the affixing position is incorrect.
● Bundle the cable ties at the same height, and place all identification plates in
the same direction.
● The positions of "up", "down", "right", and "left" in this section (excluding the
description of printer setting) are from the perspective of facing the labels.

7.11.3 Filling In Labels

You can use an oil marker to fill in the labels.

Writing Tool
To keep the labels legible and neat, use a black oil marker to fill in the labels. An
oil marker is more effective than a ballpoint pen. When you use a marker to fill in
the labels, ensure that the surface of the labels is not oily. Oil can smudge the
letters.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 468

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTE

The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to fill in the labels.

Writing Font
The handwritten font must be similar to the standard typeface "Times New
Roman" so that it is clear and legible. Table 7-17 lists the standard typeface.

Table 7-17 Standard typeface for handwriting

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z

The typeface for handwriting should be of a proper size, identifiable, and neat.

Figure 7-43 shows the writing direction.

Figure 7-43 Writing direction on the label

7.11.4 Affixing Labels

The cable labels facilitate the cable connection and maintenance.

NOTE

If the customers require label consistency in their equipment rooms, fill in and arrange the
labels according to requirements.

This section describes how to attach a label for a signal cable and a power cable.

Affixing a Label to a Signal Cable

The label attaching position on a signal cable is 2 cm from the connector. In
special cases, for example, to avoid bending the cable or affecting other cables,
you can attach the label to a different position.

A label should be affixed to each end of a cable. When the cable is placed
vertically, the label should point rightwards, and when the cable is placed
horizontally, the label should point downwards. Figure 7-44 shows how to
properly attach a label to the signal cable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 469

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-44 Properly affixing a label to a signal cable

Figure 7-45 shows how to attach a label to a signal cable.

Figure 7-45 Affixing a label to a signal cable

Affixing a Label to a Power Cable

Remove a label from the bottom of the label page, and then attach it to the
concave part on either side of the identification plate of a cable tie. Ensure that
the label directions are consistent in the equipment room. The cable tie should be
fastened 2 cm from the connectors. In special cases, the labels can be affixed to
other positions.

Cable ties should be fastened at both ends of a cable. After bundling the cables,
the completed identification plate should be visible on the top of the cable in the

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 470

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

horizontal cabling, or on the right side of the cable in the vertical cabling. Make
sure that the label points outwards, as shown in Figure 7-46.

Figure 7-46 Appearance of a label affixed to a power cable

7.12 Replacing an Optical Fiber, Optical Module,

Electrical Module, or Network Cable Using a Fiber
Extractor
If the operation space is limited, a fiber extractor can be used to replace LC fibers,
pluggable optical modules, electrical modules, and unshielded network cables.

NOTE

The procedure of replacing an optical module is similar to that of replacing an electrical

module. This section uses an optical module as an example.

7.12.1 Introduction to the Fiber Extractor

A fiber extractor helps you to replace LC fibers, pluggable optical modules, and
unshielded network cables.

Structure
Figure 7-47 shows the structure of the fiber extractor.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 471

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-47 Fiber extractor

A fiber extractor consists of the following parts:

● Duckbill end: It helps the fiber extractor enter the board and clamp the
optical module when the fiber extractor is used to remove an optical module
from a board.
● L-shaped hook: It hooks the security pin of an optical module when the fiber
extractor is used to remove an optical module. After the optical module is
removed, it holds the optical module so that the optical module will not drop
down.
● Limiting groove: It limits the insertion depth of the fiber extractor to prevent
damage to the optical module when the fiber extractor is used to remove an
optical module.
● Fixing groove: It is used to fix the connector of the optical fiber to prevent the
optical fiber from swinging when the fiber extractor is used to remove an
optical fiber.
● Spring: It provides the elastic force to enable the fiber extractor to
automatically open.
● Handle: Users need to hold the handles when using the fiber extractor.

Applicable Objects of the Fiber Extractor

The fiber extractor is used to replace LC optical fibers, pluggable optical modules,
and unshielded network cables, as shown in Figure 7-48.

Figure 7-48 Applicable objects of the fiber extractor

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 472

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

NOTICE

The fiber extractor cannot be used to replace shielded network cables.

7.12.2 Replacing an Optical Fiber, Optical Module, or Network

Cable

Tools, Instruments, and Materials

Fiber extractor, ESD gloves, and ESD bag

Precautions
● Replacing an optical fiber, network cable, optical module, or electrical module
will interrupt services.
● Wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap when using a fiber extractor to replace
the optical fiber, network cable, optical module, or electrical module.
● Do not exert too much force when using the fiber extractor to prevent
damage to the optical fiber, network cable, optical module, or electrical
module.

7.12.2.1 Replacing an Optical Fiber

Replacing an Optical Fiber Pre-equipped with an Optical Attenuator

● Use a fiber extractor to remove the optical fiber pre-equipped with an optical
attenuator.
a. Acquire the clamping method of the fiber extractor.
When using the fiber extractor to remove an LC fiber pre-equipped with
an optical attenuator, lock the fiber connector with the fixing groove and
clamp the clip on the fiber connector with the duckbill end, as shown in
Figure 7-49.

Figure 7-49 Clamping method for removing the optical fiber pre-
equipped with an optical attenuator

b. Remove the LC fiber pre-equipped with an optical attenuator.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 473

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Align the fiber extractor with the fiber connector. Clamp the fiber
connector with proper force as shown in Figure 7-49, and then pull the
fiber outwards as shown in Figure 7-50.

Figure 7-50 Removing the optical fiber pre-equipped with an optical

attenuator

● Use a fiber extractor to install the optical fiber pre-equipped with an optical
attenuator.
a. Acquire the clamping method of the fiber extractor.
Figure 7-51 shows the clamping method of the fiber extractor when the
fiber extractor is used to install an LC fiber pre-equipped with an optical
attenuator.

Figure 7-51 Clamping method for installing the optical fiber pre-
equipped with an optical attenuator

b. Install the optical fiber pre-equipped with an optical attenuator.

Clamp the fiber connector as shown in Figure 7-51. Then insert the fiber
connector into an optical port until the clip locks the fiber connector. (You
can hear a click when the connector gets locked.)

Replacing an Optical Fiber Not Equipped with an Optical Attenuator

● Use a fiber extractor to remove the optical fiber not equipped with an optical
attenuator.
a. Acquire the clamping method of the fiber extractor.
Figure 7-52 shows the clamping method of the fiber extractor when the
fiber extractor is used to remove an LC fiber not equipped with an optical
attenuator.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 474

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-52 Clamping method for removing the optical fiber not
equipped with an optical attenuator

b. Remove the LC fiber not equipped with an optical attenuator.

Align the fiber extractor with the fiber connector. Clamp the fiber
connector with proper force as shown in Figure 7-52, and then pull the
fiber outwards as shown in Figure 7-53.

Figure 7-53 Removing the optical fiber not equipped with an optical
attenuator

● Use a fiber extractor to install the optical fiber not equipped with an optical
attenuator.
a. Acquire the clamping method of the fiber extractor.
Figure 7-54 shows the clamping method of the fiber extractor when the
fiber extractor is used to install an LC fiber not equipped with an optical
attenuator.

Figure 7-54 Clamping method for installing the optical fiber not
equipped with an optical attenuator

b. Install the optical fiber not equipped with an optical attenuator.

Clamp the fiber connector as shown in Figure 7-54. Then insert the fiber
connector into an optical port until the clip locks the fiber connector. (You
can hear a click when the fiber connector gets locked.)

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 475

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

7.12.2.2 Replacing a Network Cable

NOTICE

The fiber extractor cannot be used to replace shielded network cables.

● Use a fiber extractor to remove the unshielded network cable.

a. Acquire the clamping method of the fiber extractor.
Figure 7-55 shows the clamping method of the fiber extractor when the
fiber extractor is used to remove the unshielded network cable.

Figure 7-55 Clamping method for removing the unshielded network

cable

b. Remove the unshielded network cable.

Align the fiber extractor with the RJ45 connector of the network cable.
Clamp the connector with proper force as shown in Figure 7-55, and
then pull the cable outwards as shown in Figure 7-56.

Figure 7-56 Removing the unshielded network cable

● Use a fiber extractor to install the unshielded network cable.

a. Acquire the clamping method of the fiber extractor.
Figure 7-57 shows the clamping method of the fiber extractor when the
fiber extractor is used to install the unshielded network cable.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 476

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-57 Clamping method for installing the unshielded network

cable

b. Install the unshielded network cable.

Clamp the RJ45 connector as shown in Figure 7-57. Then gently insert
the connector into an Ethernet port until the clip locks the connector.
(You can hear a click when the connector gets locked.)

7.12.2.3 Replacing an Optical or Electrical Module

The procedure of replacing an optical module is similar to that of replacing an
electrical module. This section uses an optical module as an example.

NOTICE

Before removing or installing an optical or electrical module, ensure that no fiber

jumpers are connected to the optical ports or no network cables are connected to
the electrical ports on the module.

● Use a fiber extractor to remove the optical module.

a. Acquire the clamping method of the fiber extractor.
When using the fiber extractor to remove a pluggable optical module,
apply proper force to clamp the security pin of the optical module with
the L-shaped hook, as shown in Figure 7-58.

Figure 7-58 Clamping method for removing the optical module

b. Remove the optical module.

Align the fiber extractor with the pluggable optical module. Clamp the
security pin of the module with proper force as shown in Figure 7-58,
and then pull the module outwards as shown in Figure 7-59.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 477

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide 7 Appendix

Figure 7-59 Removing the optical module

● Use a fiber extractor to install the optical module.

a. Acquire the clamping method of the fiber extractor.
Figure 7-60 shows the clamping method of the fiber extractor when the
fiber extractor is used to install the optical module.

Figure 7-60 Clamping method for installing the optical module

b. Install the optical module.

Clamp the optical module as shown in Figure 7-60. Then insert the
optical module into an optical port until the module is fully inserted.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 478

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide A How to Obtain Help

A How to Obtain Help

If a tough or critical problem persists in routine maintenance or troubleshooting,

contact Huawei for technical support.

A.1 Preparations for Contacting Huawei

To better solve the problem, you need to collect troubleshooting information and
make debugging preparations before contacting Huawei.

A.1.1 Collecting Troubleshooting Information

You need to collect troubleshooting information before troubleshooting.
You need to collect the following information:
● Name and address of the customer
● Contact person and telephone number
● Time when the fault occurred
● Description of the fault phenomena
● Device type and software version
● Measures taken after the fault occurs and the related results
● Troubleshooting level and required solution deadline

A.1.2 Making Debugging Preparations

When you contact Huawei for help, the technical support engineer of Huawei
might assist you to do certain operations to collect information about the fault or
rectify the fault directly.
Before contacting Huawei for help, you need to prepare the boards, port modules,
screwdrivers, screws, cables for serial ports, network cables, and other required
materials.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 479

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide A How to Obtain Help

A.2 How to Use the Document

Huawei provides guide documents shipped with the device. The guide documents
can be used to handle the common problems occurring in daily maintenance or
troubleshooting.
To better solve the problems, use the documents before you contact Huawei for
technical support.

A.3 How to Obtain Help from Website

Huawei provides users with timely and efficient technical support through the
regional offices, secondary technical support system, telephone technical support,
remote technical support, and onsite technical support.
Contents of the Huawei technical support system are as follows:
● Huawei headquarters technical support department
● Regional office technical support center
● Customer service center
● Technical support website: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/
You can query how to contact the regional offices at https://
support.huawei.com/enterprise/.

A.4 Ways to Contact Huawei

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical
support and service. For any assistance, contact our local office or company
headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's
Republic of China
Website: https://e.huawei.com/

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 480

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide B Glossary

B Glossary

If you want to obtain information about glossaries, visit https://

support.huawei.com/enterprise/. In the search field, enter a product model, and
select a path from the paths that are automatically displayed to go to the
document page of the product. Browse or download the OceanStor V500R007
Glossary.

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 481

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide C Acronyms and Abbreviations

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AC Alternating Current
AD Active Directory
AES Advanced Encryption Standard
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
ASP Application Service Provider

B
BMC Baseboard Management Controller

C
CLI Command Line Interface
CSA Canadian Standards Association

D
DC Direct Current
3DES Triple Data Encryption Standard
DES Data Encryption Standard
DLC Double Lucent Connector
DNS Domain Name Server

E
ESD Electrostatic Discharge

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 482

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide C Acronyms and Abbreviations

ESDP Electronic Software Delivery Platform

ESN Equipment Serial Number

F
FC Fibre Channel
FC-AL Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop
FCoE Fibre Channel over Ethernet
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
FTP File Transfer Protocol

G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GTS Global Technical Service
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications

H
HBA Host Bus Adapter
HD High Density

I
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IP Internet Protocol
IPv4 Internet Protocol version 4
IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6
ISA Instrument Society of America
ISO International Organization for Standardization

L
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
LUN Logical Unit Number

M
MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5
MIB Management Information Base
MPO Multiple-fiber Push-on/Pull-off
MGMT Management

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 483

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide C Acronyms and Abbreviations

N
NDMP Network Data Management Protocol
NEG Negative
NIS Network Integration Service
NL-SAS Near Line Serial Attached SCSI
NTP Network Time Protocol

O
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
OID Object Identifier
OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

P
PDU Power Distribution Unit
PO Purchase Order
PPB Part Per Billion
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

R
RoHS Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances
RH Relative Humidity
RTN Return Current

S
SAN Storage Area Network
SAS Serial Attached SCSI
SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable
SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol
SHA Secure Hash Algorithm
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SMS Short Messaging Service
STP Shielded Twisted Pair
SSD Solid State Disk
SSH Secure Shell

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 484

OceanStor 2000, 5000, 5000F, 6000, and 6000F
Series
Installation Guide C Acronyms and Abbreviations

T
TC Technical Committee
TLS Transport Layer Security

U
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UL Underwriters Laboratory
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
USM User-based Security Model

V
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

Issue 10 (2021-10-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 485